A cement and concrete industry publication

Worked Examples
to Eurocode 2
For the design of in-situ concrete elements in framed buildings
to BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004 and its UK National Annex: 2005

CH Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE et al

Foreword
The introduction of European standards to UK construction is a significant event as, for the
first time, all design and construction codes within the EU will be harmonised. The ten design
standards, known as the Eurocodes, will affect all design and construction activities as all current
British Standards for structural design are due to be withdrawn in 2010.
The cement and concrete industry recognised the need to enable UK design professionals to use
Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, quickly, effectively, efficiently and with confidence.
Supported by government, consultants and relevant industry bodies, the Concrete Industry
Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG) was formed in 1999 and this Group has provided the guidance for a
coordinated and collaborative approach to the introduction of Eurocode 2.
As a result, a range of resources are being delivered by the concrete sector (see www.eurocode2.
info). The aim of this publication, Worked Examples to Eurocode 2 is to distil from Eurocode 2,
other Eurocodes and other sources the material that is commonly used in the design of concrete
framed buildings.

Acknowledgements
The original ideas for this publication emanates from the research project `Eurocode 2: Transition
from UK to European concrete design standards’, which was led by the BCA and part funded by
the DTI under their PII scheme and was overseen by a Steering Group and the CIEG. The work has
been brought to fruition by The Concrete Centre from early initial drafts by various authors listed
on the inside back cover. The concrete industry acknowledges and appreciates the support given
by many individuals, companies and organisations in the preparation of this document. These are
listed on the inside back cover.
We gratefully acknowledge the authors of the initial drafts and the help and advice given by Robin
Whittle in checking the text. Thanks are also due to Gillian Bond, Kevin Smith, Sally Huish and the
design team at Michael Burbridge Ltd for their work on the production.
The copyright of British Standards extracts reproduced in this document is held by the British Standards Institution (BSI).
Permission to reproduce extracts from British Standards is granted by BSI under the terms of Licence No: 2009RM010. No other
use of this material is permitted. This publication is not intended to be a replacement for the standard and may not reflect the
most up-to-date status of the standard. British Standards can be obtained in PDF or hard copy formats from the BSI online shop:
http://shop.bsigroup.com or by contacting BSI Customer Services for hard copies only:
Tel:+44 (0)20 8996 9001, Email: [email protected].

Published by The Concrete Centre, part of the Mineral Products Association

Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801 www.concretecentre.com
The Concrete Centre is part of the Mineral Products Association, the trade association for the aggregates,
asphalt, cement, concrete, lime, mortar and silica sand industries. www.mineralproducts.org
Cement and Concrete Industry Publications (CCIP) are produced through an industry initiative to
publish technical guidance in support of concrete design and construction. CCIP publications are
available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concretebookshop.com Tel: +44 (0)7004-607777
CCIP-041
Published December 2009
ISBN 978-1-9046818-84-7
Price Group P
© MPA - The Concrete Centre
All advice or information from MPA - The Concrete Centre is intended only for use in the UK by those who will evaluate the
significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for
negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by MPA - The Concrete Centre or its subcontractors,
suppliers or advisors. Readers should note that the publications from MPA - The Concrete Centre are subject to revision from time
to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.

Printed by Michael Burbridge Ltd, Maidenhead, UK.

2
Worked Examples
to Eurocode 2
Contents
Symbols ii 4 Beams 97
4.0 General 97
1 Introduction 1 4.1 Continuous beam on pin supports 98
1.1 Aim 1 4.2 Heavily loaded L-beam 104
1.2 Eurocode: Basis of structural design 3 4.3 Continuous wide T-beam 119
1.3 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures 4
1.4 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures 4 5 Columns 134
1.5 National Annexes 5 5.0 General 134
1.6 Basis of the worked examples in this publication 5 5.1 Edge column 135
1.7 Assumptions 6 5.2 Perimeter column (internal environment) 139
1.8 Material properties 6 5.3 Internal column 146
1.9 Execution 6 5.4 Small perimeter column subject
to two-hour fire resistance 157
2 Analysis, actions and load arrangements 7
2.1 Methods of analysis 7 6 Walls 166
2.2 Actions 7 6.0 General 166
2.3 Characteristic values of actions 7 6.1 Shear wall 167
2.4 Variable actions: imposed loads 8
2.5 Variable actions: snow loads 12 7 References and further reading 183
2.6 Variable actions: wind loads 13 Appendix A: Derived formulae 185
2.7 Variable actions: others 17
2.8 Permanent actions 18 Appendix B: Serviceability limit state 190
2.9 Design values of actions 21
Appendix C: Design aids 194
2.10 Load arrangement of actions: introduction 25
2.11 Load arrangements according to the
UK National Annex to Eurocode 25
2.12 Examples of loading 27

3 Slabs 35
3.0 General 35
3.1 Simply supported one-way slab 36
3.2 Continuous one-way solid slab 40
3.3 Continuous ribbed slab 52
3.4 Flat slab 71
3.5 Stair flight 95

i
Symbols and abbreviations used in this publication

Symbol Definition
A Cross-sectional area; Accidental action
A Site altitude, m (snow)
A Altitude of the site in metres above mean sea level (wind)
A, B, C Variables used in the determination of llim
Ac Cross-sectional area of concrete
Ad Design value of an accidental action
AEd Design value of a seismic action
Aref Reference area of the structure or structural element (wind)
As Cross-sectional area of reinforcement
As,min Minimum cross-sectional area of reinforcement
As,prov Area of steel provided
As,req Area of steel required
As1 Area of reinforcing steel in layer 1
As2 Area of compression steel (in layer 2)
Asl Area of the tensile reinforcement extending at least lbd + d beyond the section considered
AsM (AsN) Total area of reinforcement required in symmetrical, rectangular columns to resist moment (axial load) using
simplified calculation method
Asw Cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement; Area of punching shear reinforcement in one perimeter around the
column
Asw,min Minimum cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement; Minimum area of punching shear reinforcement in one
perimeter around the column
At Area of tensile reinforcement in flat slab column strips
a Distance, allowance at supports
a Axis distance from the concrete surface to the centre of the bar (fire)
a An exponent (in considering biaxial bending of columns)
a Projection of the footing from the face of the column or wall
al Distance by which the location where a bar is no longer required for bending moment is displaced to allow for the
forces from the truss model for shear. (‘Shift’ distance for curtailment)
a1, a2, Distance from edge of support to centre of support
a1, b1 Dimensions of the control perimeter around an elongated support (punching shear)
a.m.s.l. Altitude above mean sea level
b Overall width of a cross-section, or flange width in a T- or L-beam
b Breadth of building (wind)
be Effective width of a flat slab (adjacent to perimeter column)
beff Effective width of a flange
beq (heq) Equivalent width (height) of column = b(h) for rectangular sections
bmin Minimum width of web on T-, I- or L-beams
bt Mean width of the tension zone. For a T-beam with the flange in compression, only the width of the web is taken
into account
bw Width of the web on T-, I- or L-beams. Minimum width between tension and compression chords
b1 Half of distance between adjacent webs of downstand beams
Ce Exposure coefficient (snow)
Ct Thermal coefficient (snow)
Cw Shear centre

ii
Symbol Definition
c1, c2 Dimensions of a rectangular column. For edge columns, c1 is measured perpendicular to the free edge (punching
shear)
calt Altitude factor (wind)
cd Dynamic factor (wind)
cdir Directional factor (wind)
ce,flat Exposure factor (wind)
cf Force coefficient (wind)
cmin Minimum cover, (due to the requirements for bond, cmin,b or durability cmin,dur)
cnom Nominal cover. Nominal cover should satisfy the minimum requirements of bond, durability and fire
cpe (External) pressure coefficient (wind)
cpe,10 (External) pressure coefficient for areas > 1 m2 (wind)
cpi Internal pressure coefficient (wind)
cprob Probability factor (wind)
cseason Season factor (wind)
cs Size factor (wind)
cy, cx Column dimensions in plan
Dcdev Allowance made in design for deviation
D Diameter of a circular column; Diameter
d Effective depth to tension steel
d2 Effective depth to compression steel
dc Effective depth of concrete in compression
E Effect of action; Integrity (in fire); Elastic modulus
Ecd Design value of modulus of elasticity of concrete
Ecm Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
EI Bending stiffness
Es Design value of modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel
Exp. Expression
EQU Static equilibrium
e Eccentricity
e0 Minimum eccentricity in columns
e2 Deflection (used in assessing M2 in slender columns)
ei Eccentricity due to imperfections
ey, ez Eccentricity, MEd /VEd along y and z axes respectively (punching shear)
F1 Factor to account for flanged sections (deflection)
F2 Factor to account for brittle partitions in association with long spans (deflection)
F3 Factor to account for service stress in tensile reinforcement (deflection)
F Action
FEM Fixed end moment
Fc (Fs) Force in concrete (steel)
Fd Design value of an action
FE Tensile force in reinforcement to be anchored
Fk Characteristic value of an action
Frep Representative action (= yFk where y = factor to convert characteristic to representative action)
Fs Tensile force in reinforcement
Ftd Design value of the tensile force in longitudinal reinforcement
DFtd Additional tensile force in longitudinal reinforcement due to the truss shear model

iii
Symbol Definition
FV,Ed Total vertical load (on braced and bracing members)
Fw Resultant characteristic force due to wind. (See section 2.6)
fbd Ultimate bond stress
fcd Design value of concrete compressive strength
fck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
fct,d Design tensile strength of concrete (act fct,k /gC)
fct,k Characteristic axial tensile strength of concrete
fctm Mean value of axial tensile strength of concrete
fsc Compressive stress in compression reinforcement at ULS
fyd Design yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement, Asl
fyk Characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
fywd Design yield strength of the shear reinforcement
fywd,ef Effective design strength of punching shear reinforcement
fywk Characteristic yield strength of shear reinforcement
Gk Characteristic value of a permanent action
Gk,sup Upper characteristic value of a permanent action
Gk,inf Lower characteristic value of a permanent action
gk Characteristic value of a permanent action per unit length or area
Hi Horizontal action applied at a level
H Height of building (wind)
h Overall depth of a cross-section; Height
have Obstruction height (wind)
hdis Displacement height (wind)
hf Depth of footing; Thickness of flange
hs Depth of slab
I Second moment of area of concrete section; Inertia
I Insulation (in fire)
i Radius of gyration
K MEd /bd 2fck. A measure of the relative compressive stress in a member in flexure
K Factor to account for structural system (deflection)
K' Value of K above which compression reinforcement is required
Kv A correction factor for axial load
Kf A correction factor for creep
k Coefficient or factor
k Relative flexibility or relative stiffness
l Clear height of column between end restraints
l Height of the structure in metres
l (or L) Length; Span
l0 Effective length (of columns)
l0 Distance between points of zero moment
l0 Design lap length
l0,fi Effective length under fire conditions
lb Basic anchorage length
lbd Design anchorage length
lb,eq Equivalent anchorage length
lb,min Minimum anchorage length
iv
Symbol Definition
lb,rqd Basic anchorage length
leff Effective span
ln Clear span
ly, lz Spans of a two-way slab in the y and z directions
M Bending moment. Moment from first order analysis
M' Moment capacity of a singly reinforced section (above which compression reinforcement is required)
M0,Eqp First order bending moment in quasi permanent load combination (SLS)
M01, M02 First order end moments at ULS including allowances for imperfections
M0Ed Equivalent first order moment including the effect of imperfections (at about mid height)
M0Ed,fi First order moment under fire conditions
M2 Nominal second order moment in slender columns
MEd Design value of the applied internal bending moment
MEdy, MEdz Design moment in the respective direction
MRdy, MRdz Moment resistance in the respective direction
Mt Design transfer moment to column from a flat slab
m Number of vertical members contributing to an effect
m Mass
N Axial force
N Basic span-to-effective-depth ratio, l/d, for K = 1.0
N0Ed,fi Axial load under fire conditions
NA National Annex
Na, Nb Longitudinal forces contributing to Hi
NEd Design value of the applied axial force (tension or compression) at ULS
NDP Nationally Determined Parameter(s) as published in a country’s National Annex
n Load level at normal temperatures. Conservatively n = 0.7 (fire)
n Axial stress at ULS
n Ultimate action (load) per unit length (or area)
n Relative axial force NEd /(Ac fcd)
nbal The value of n at maximum moment resistance
n0, ns Number of storeys
Qk Characteristic value of a variable action
Qk1 (Qki) Characteristic value of a leading variable action (Characteristic value of an accompanying variable action)
qk Characteristic value of a variable action per unit length or area
qb Basic wind pressure
qp Peak wind pressure
qp(ze) Peak velocity pressure at reference height ze, (wind)
R Resistance; Mechanical resistance (in fire)
RA Reaction at support A
RB Reaction at support B
Rd Design value of the resistance to an action
r Radius
rm Ratio of first order end moments in columns at ULS
SLS Serviceability limit state(s) – corresponding to conditions beyond which specified service requirements are no
longer met
s Spacing
s Snow load on a roof

v
Symbol Definition
sk Characteristic ground snow load
sr Radial spacing of perimeters of shear reinforcement
st Tangential spacing shear reinforcement along perimeters of shear reinforcement
t Thickness; Time being considered; Breadth of support
t0 The age of concrete at the time of loading
ULS Ultimate limit state(s) – associated with collapse or other forms of structural failure
u Perimeter of concrete cross-section, having area Ac
u Perimeter of that part which is exposed to drying
u Circumference of outer edge of effective cross-section (torsion)
u0 Perimeter adjacent to columns (punching shear)
u1 Basic control perimeter (at 2d from face of load) (punching shear)
u1* Reduced control perimeter at perimeter columns (at 2d from face of load) (punching shear)
ui Length of the control perimeter under consideration (punching shear)
uout Perimeter at which shear reinforcement is no longer required
V Shear force
VEd Design value of the applied shear force
VRd,c Shear resistance of a member without shear reinforcement
VRd,max Shear resistance of a member limited by the crushing of compression struts
VRd,cmin Minimum shear resistance of member considering concrete alone
VRd,s Shear resistance of a member governed by the yielding of shear reinforcement
vb Basic wind velocity
vb,0 The fundamental basic wind velocity being the characteristic 10 minute wind velocity at 10 m above ground level in
open country
vb,map Fundamental basic wind velocity from Figure NA.1 m/s
vEd Punching shear stress
vEd Shear stress for sections without shear reinforcement (= VEd /bwd)
vEd,z Shear stress for sections with shear reinforcement (= VEd /bwz = VEd /bw0.9d)
vRd,c Design shear resistance of concrete without shear reinforcement expressed as a stress
vRd,max Capacity of concrete struts expressed as a stress
W1 Factor corresponding to a distribution of shear (punching shear)
We Peak external wind load
Wk Characteristic value of wind action (NB not in the Eurocodes and should be regarded as a form of Qk,
characteristic value of a variable action)
wk Characteristic unit wind load.
wk Crack width
wmax Limiting calculated crack width
X0, XA, XC Concrete exposure classes
XD, XF, XS
x Neutral axis depth
x Distance between buildings (wind)
x Distance of the section being considered from the centre line of the support
x, y, z Co-ordinates; Planes under consideration
xu Depth of the neutral axis at the ultimate limit state after redistribution
Z Zone number obtained from map (snow)
z Lever arm of internal forces

vi
Symbol Definition
z Reference height (wind)
ze Reference height for windward walls of rectangular buildings (wind)
a Angle; Angle of shear links to the longitudinal axis; Ratio
aA A coefficient for use with a representative variable action taking into account area supported
a1, a2, a3 Factors dealing with anchorage and laps of bars
a4, a5, a6
acc (act) A coefficient taking into account long term effects of compressive (tensile) load and the way load is applied
ae Modular ratio = Es /Ecd
an A coefficient for use with a representative variable action taking into account number of storeys supported
b Angle; Ratio; Coefficient
b Factor dealing with eccentricity (punching shear)
g Partial factor
gC Partial factor for concrete
gF Partial factor for actions, F
gG Partial factor for permanent actions, G
gGk,sup Partial factor to be applied to Gk,inf
gGk,inf Partial factor to be applied to Gk,sup
gQ Partial factor for variable actions, Q
gM Partial factor for material (usually gC or gS)
gS Partial factor for reinforcing steel
d Redistribution ratio equals ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment (1 – % redistribution)
ecu Ultimate compressive strain in the concrete
ecu2 Ultimate compressive strain limit in concrete which is not fully in pure axial compression assuming use of the
parabolic–rectangular stress–strain relationship (numerically ecu2 = ecu3)
ecu3 Ultimate compressive strain limit in concrete which is not fully in pure axial compression assuming use of the
bilinear stress–strain relationship
esc Compressive strain in reinforcement
est Tensile strain in reinforcement
n Factor defining effective strength (= 1 for ≤ C50/60)
n1 Coefficient for bond conditions
n2 Coefficient for bar diameter
y Angle; Angle of compression struts (shear)
yi Inclination used to represent imperfections
l Slenderness ratio
l Factor defining the height of the compression zone (= 0.8 for ≤ C50/60)
lfi Slenderness in fire
llim Limiting slenderness ratio (of columns)
mi, m1, m2 Snow load shape factors
mfi Ratio of the design axial load under fire conditions to the design resistance of the column at normal temperature
but with an eccentricity applicable to fire conditions
v Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear
j Reduction factor/distribution coefficient. Factor applied to Gk in BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)
r Required tension reinforcement ratio
r Density of air (wind)
r' Reinforcement ratio for required compression reinforcement, As2/bd

vii
Symbol Definition
r1 Percentage of reinforcement lapped within 0.65l0 from the centre line of the lap being considered
rl Reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcement
rly, rlz Reinforcement ratio of bonded steel in the y and z direction
r0 Reference reinforcement ratio fck0.5´ 10–3
sgd Design value of the ground pressure
ss Stress in reinforcement at SLS
ss Absolute value of the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after the formation of the crack
ssc(sst) Stress in compression (and tension) reinforcement
ssd Design stress in the bar at the ultimate limit state
ssu Unmodified service stress in reinforcement determined from ULS loads (See Figure C3)
h(∞,t0) Final value of creep coefficient
hef Effective creep factor
f Bar diameter
c Factors defining representative values of variable actions
c0 Combination value of a variable action (e.g. used when considering ULS)
c1 Frequent value of a variable action (e.g. used when considering whether section will have cracked or not)
c2 Quasi-permanent value of a variable action (e.g. used when considering deformation)
w Mechanical reinforcement ratio = As fyd /Ac fcd ≤ 1

viii
Introduction

1 Introduction
1.1 Aim
The aim of this publication is to illustrate through worked examples how BS EN 1992–1–1[1]
(Eurocode 2) may be used in practice to design in-situ concrete building structures. It is intended
that these worked examples will explain how calculations to Eurocode 2 may be performed.
Eurocode 2 strictly consists of four parts (Parts 1–1, 1–2, 2 and 3)[1-4] but for the purposes of
this publication, Eurocode 2 refers to part 1–1 only, unless qualified. The worked examples will
be carried out within the environment of other relevant publications listed below, and illustrated
in Figure 1.1:
■ The other three parts of Eurocode 2.
■ Other Eurocodes.
■ Material and execution standards.
■ Publications by the concrete industry and others.

There are, therefore, many references to other documents and while it is intended that this
publication, referred to as Worked examples, can stand alone, it is anticipated that users may
require several of the other references to hand, in particular, Concise Eurocode 2[5], which
summarises the rules and principles that will be commonly used in the design of reinforced
concrete framed buildings to Eurocode 2.

STANDARDS WORKED CONCRETE INDUSTRY PUBLICATIONS

EXAMPLES PUBLICATIONS BY OTHERS

NA

BS EN 1990 CONCISE
BASIS OF EUROCODE
DESIGN 2

MANUALS
VOL 2
NA
BS EN 1991–2 A cement and concrete industry publication
HOW TO
NA DESIGN
BS EN 1991–1–1
–2 NA CONCRETE
NA Worked Examples
–3 NA to Eurocode 2 STRUCTURES
ACTIONS –4 NA For the design of in-situ concrete elements in framed buildings

DETAILERS
to BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004 and its UK National Annex: 2005

–6 CH Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE et al

HANDBOOK
Densities and
imposed loads
Fire www.
Snow Eurocode2
Wind .info
Execution
DESIGN
GUIDES

PD6687
NA
NA RC SPREAD
BS EN 1992–1–1 1–2 NA SHEETS
DESIGN OF NA
–2
CONCRETE –3
STRUCTURES BS EN 13670
EXECUTION
General OF
Fire CONCRETE
STRUCTURES PRECAST PRECAST
Bridges DESIGN WORKED
Liquid retaining MANUAL EXAMPLES

Note
The term Standards encompasses British Standards, Eurocodes, National Annexes (NA) and Published Documents

Figure 1.1
Worked examples in context

The designs are in accordance with BS EN 1992–1–1[1], as modified by the UK National Annex[1a]
and explained in PD 6687[6].
1
Generally, the calculations are cross-referenced to the relevant clauses in all four parts of
Eurocode 2[1–4] and, where appropriate, to other documents. See Figure 1.2 for a guide to
presentation. References to BS 8110[7] refer to Part 1 unless otherwise stated.

Generally, the ‘simple’ examples depend on equations and design aids derived from Eurocode 2.
The derived equations are given in Appendix A and the design aids from Section 15 of Concise
Eurocode 2[5] are repeated in Appendix B.

The examples are intended to be appropriate for their purpose, which is to illustrate the use of
Eurocode 2 for in-situ concrete building structures. There are simple examples to illustrate how
typical hand calculations might be done using available charts and tables derived from the Code.
These are followed by more detailed examples illustrating the detailed workings of the Codes.
In order to explain the use of Eurocode 2, several of the calculations are presented in detail far
in excess of that necessary in design calculations once users are familiar with the Code. To an
extent, the designs are contrived to show valid methods of designing elements, to give insight
and to help in validating computer methods. They are not necessarily the most appropriate, the
most economic or the only methods of designing the members illustrated.

Sections 1 and 2 Worked examples

Relevant clauses or figure numbers from BS EN
Cl. 6.4.4 1992–1–1 (if the reference is to other parts, other Cl. 6.4.4
Eurocodes or other documents this will be indicated)

From the relevant UK National Annex (generally to

NA
BS EN 1992–1–1) NA

Cl. 6.4.4 & NA From both BS EN 1992–1–1 and UK National Annex Cl. 6.4.4 & NA

Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.1

Relevant parts of this publication
Section 5.2 Section 5.2

From other Eurocodes: BS EN 1990, BS EN 1991,

EC1-1-1: 6.4.3
BS EN 1992–1–2, etc EC1-1-1: 6.4.3

Background paper to UK National Annexes

PD 6687[6]
BS EN 1992–1 PD 6687[6]

Concise Concise Eurocode 2[5] Concise

How to: Floors [8]

How to design concrete structures using How to:
Eurocode 2[8]: Floors Floors[8]
In Appendices, derived content in tables not from
Grey shaded tables
Eurocode 2

Figure 1.2
Guide to presentation

As some of the detailing rules in Eurocode 2 are generally more involved than those to BS 8110,
some of the designs presented in this publication have been extended into areas that have
traditionally been the responsibility of detailers. These extended calculations are not necessarily
part of ‘normal’ design but are included at the end of some calculations. It is assumed that
the designer will discuss and agree with the detailer areas of responsibility and the degree of
rationalisation, the extent of designing details, assessment of curtailment and other aspects
that the detailer should undertake. It is recognised that in the vast majority of cases, the rules
given in detailing manuals[8,9] will be used. However, the examples are intended to help when
curtailment, anchorage and lap lengths need to be determined.

2
Introduction

1.2 Eurocode: Basis of structural design

In the Eurocode system BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design[10] overarches all the
other Eurocodes, BS EN 1991 to BS EN 1999. BS EN 1990 defines the effects of actions, including
geotechnical and seismic actions, and applies to all structures irrespective of the material of
construction. The material Eurocodes define how the effects of actions are resisted by giving rules for
design and detailing of concrete, steel, composite, timber, masonry and aluminium. (see Figure 1.3).

BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Structural safety,

Basis of structural design serviceability and durability

BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures

Actions on structures

BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Concrete

BS EN 1993, Eurocode 3: Steel
BS EN 1994, Eurocode 4: Composite Design and detailing
BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5: Timber
BS EN 1996, Eurocode 6: Masonry
BS EN 1999, Eurocode 9: Aluminium

BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7: BS EN 1998, Eurocode 8: Geotechnical

Geotechnical design Seismic design and seismic
design

Figure 1.3
The Eurocode hierarchy

BS EN 1990 provides the necessary information for the analysis of structures including partial
and other factors to be applied to the actions from Eurocode 1. It establishes the principles and EC0: 2.1
requirements for the safety, serviceability and durability of structures. It describes the basis for
design as follows:
A structure shall be designed and executed (constructed) in such a way that it will, during its
intended life, with appropriate degrees of reliability and in an economical way:
■ Sustain all actions and influences likely to occur during execution and use.
■ Remain fit for the use for which it is required.

In other words, it shall be designed using limit states principles to have adequate:
■ Stability.
■ Structural resistance (including structural resistance in fire).
■ Serviceability.
■ Durability.

For building structures, a design working life of 50 years is implied.

BS EN 1990 states that limit states should be verified in all relevant design situations: persistent,
transient or accidental. No relevant limit state shall be exceeded when design values for actions
and resistances are used in design. The limit states are:
■ Ultimate limit states (ULS), which are associated with collapse or other forms of structural
failure.
■ Serviceability limit states (SLS), which correspond to conditions beyond which specified
service requirements are no longer met.
All actions are assumed to vary in time and space. Statistical principles are applied to arrive at the
magnitude of the partial load factors to be used in design to achieve the required reliability index
(level of safety). There is an underlying assumption that the actions themselves are described in
statistical terms.
3
1.3 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures
Actions are defined in the 10 parts of BS EN 1991 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures[11]:
BS EN 1991–1–1: 2002: Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings
BS EN 1991–1–2: 2002: Actions on structures exposed to fire
BS EN 1991–1–3: 2003: Snow loads
BS EN 1991–1–4: 2005: Wind actions
BS EN 1991–1–5: 2003: Thermal actions
BS EN 1991–1–6: 2005: Actions during execution
BS EN 1991–1–7: 2006: Accidental actions
BS EN 1991–2: 2003: Actions on structures. Traffic loads on bridges
BS EN 1991–3: 2006: Cranes and machinery
BS EN 1991–4: 2006: Silos and tanks

This publication is mainly concerned with designing for the actions defined by Part–1–1:
Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings.

Design values of actions and load arrangements are covered in Section 2.

1.4 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures[1–4] operates within an environment of other European
and British standards (see Figure 1.3). It is governed by BS EN 1990[10] and subject to the actions
defined in Eurocodes 1[11], 7[12] and 8[13]. It depends on various materials and execution standards
and is used as the basis of other standards. Part 2, Bridges[3], and Part 3, Liquid retaining and
containment structures[4], work by exception to Part 1–1 and 1–2, that is, clauses in Parts 2 and 3
confirm, modify or replace clauses in Part 1–1.

BS EN 1990
EUROCODE
Basis of Structural Design

BS EN 1997 BS EN 1998
EUROCODE 7 EUROCODE 8
Geotechnical Design Seismic Design
BS EN 1991
EUROCODE 1
Basis of Structural Design

BS 8500 BS 4449
BS EN 206 Specifying Reinforcing
Concrete Concrete Steels
BS EN 1992
EUROCODE 2
BS EN 13670 Design of concrete structures BS EN 10080
Execution of Part 1–1: General Rules for Reinforcing
Structures Structures Steels
Part 1–2: Structural Fire Design

BS EN 1995 BS EN 1992 BS EN 13369

EUROCODE 5 BS EN 1992 EUROCODE 2
EUROCODE 2 Precast
Design of Part 3: Concrete
Composite Part 2:
Bridges Liquid Retaining
Structures Structures

Note
For clarity National Annexes and explanatory documents (e.g. PD 6687, and
Non-Contradictory Complementary Information – NCCI) are not shown.

Figure 1.4
Eurocode 2 in context

4
Introduction

1.5 National Annexes

It is the prerogative of each CEN Member State to control levels of safety in that country. As a
result, some safety factors and other parameters in the Eurocodes, such as climatic conditions,
durability classes and design methods, are subject to confirmation or selection at a national level.
The decisions made by the national bodies become Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs)
which are published in a National Annex (NA) for each part of each Eurocode. The National
Annex may also include reference to non-contradictory complementary information (NCCI),
such as national standards or guidance documents.

This publication includes references to the relevant National Annexes as appropriate.

1.6 Basis of the worked examples in this publication

The design calculations in this publication are in accordance with:
■ BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design[10] and its UK National Annex[10a].
■ BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures in 10 parts[11] and their UK National
Annexes[11a].
■ BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–1: Design of concrete structures – General rules and
rules for buildings[1] and its UK National Annex[1a].
■ BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–2: Design of concrete structures – General rules –
Structural fire design[2] and its UK National Annex[2a].
■ PD 6687, Background paper to the UK National Annexes[6].
■ BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design – Part 1. General rules[12] and its UK National
Annex[12a].

They use materials conforming to:

■ BS 8500–1: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1: Method of specifying
and guidance to the specifier[14].
■ BS 4449: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – Bar, coil and
decoiled product – Specification[15].

They make reference to several publications, most notably:

■ Concise Eurocode 2 for the design of in-situ concrete framed buildings to BS EN 1992–1–1:
2004 and its UK National Annex: 2005[5].
■ How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2[8].

The execution of the works is assumed to conform to:

■ PD 6687 Background paper to the UK National Annexes BS EN 1992–1.[6]
■ NSCS, National structural concrete specification for building construction, 3rd edition[16] May
2004.
Or, when available
■ BS EN 13670: Execution of concrete structures. Due 2010[17]. As implemented by
specifications such as:
■ NSCS, National structural concrete specification for building construction, 4th edition[18]
CCIP-050, due 2010.

5
1.7 Assumptions
1.7.1 Eurocode 2
Eurocode 2 assumes that:
Cl. 1.3 ■ Design and construction will be undertaken by appropriately qualified and experienced personnel.
■ Adequate supervision and quality control will be provided.
■ Materials and products will be used as specified.
■ The structure will be adequately maintained and will be used in accordance with the design brief.
PD 6687[6] ■ The requirements for execution and workmanship given in EN 13670 are complied with.

1.7.2 The worked examples

Unless noted otherwise, the calculations in this publication assume:

EC0: Table 2.1 ■ A design life of 50 years.

Table 3.1 ■ The use of C30/37 concrete.

BS 4449 ■ The use of Grade A, B or C reinforcement, designated ‘H’ in accordance with BS 8666[19].

Table 4.1,
■ Exposure class XC1.
BS 8500: Table A.1

Building Regs[20,21] ■ 1 hour fire resistance.

Generally each calculation is rounded and it is the rounded value that is used in any further calculation.

1.8 Material properties

Material properties are specified in terms of their characteristic values. This usually corresponds
to the lower 5% fractile of an assumed statistical distribution of the property considered.

The values of gC and gS, partial factors for materials, are indicated in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1
Table 2.1 & NA Partial factors for materials

Design situation gC – concrete gS – reinforcing steel

ULS – persistent and transient 1.50 1.15
Accidental – non-fire 1.20 1.00
Accidental – fire 1.00 1.00
SLS 1.00 1.00

1.9 Execution
In the UK, DD ENV 13670[22] is currently available but without its National Application Document.
For building structures in the UK, the background document PD 6687[6] considers the provisions of
the National Structural Concrete Specification (NSCS)[16] to be equivalent to those in EN 13670 for
tolerance class 1. When published, BS EN 13670[17] and, if appropriate, the corresponding National
Application Document will take precedence.

6
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

2 Analysis, actions and load arrangements

2.1 Methods of analysis
2.1.1 ULS
At the ultimate limit state (ULS) the type of analysis should be appropriate to the problem being
considered. The following are commonly used:
■ Linear elastic analysis. Cl. 5.1.1(7)
■ Linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution.
■ Plastic analysis.

For ULS, the moments derived from elastic analysis may be redistributed provided that the
resulting distribution of moments remains in equilibrium with the applied actions. In continuous
beams or slabs with fck ≤ 50 MPa the minimum allowable ratio of the redistributed moment to Cl. 5.5.4 & NA
the moment in the linear analysis, d, is 0.70 where Class B or Class C reinforcement is used or
0.80 where Class A reinforcement is used.
Within the limits set, coefficients for moment and shear derived from elastic analysis may be
Cl. 5.1.1
used to determine forces in regular structures (see Appendix B). The design of columns should be
based on elastic moments without redistribution.
Plastic analysis may be used for design at ULS provided that the required ductility can be assured,
Cl. 5.6.2
for example: by limiting xu /d (to ≤ 0.25 for concrete strength classes ≤ C50/60); using Class B
or C reinforcement; or ensuring the ratio of moments at intermediate supports to moments in
spans is between 0.5 and 2.0.

2.1.2 SLS
At the serviceability limit state (SLS) linear elastic analysis may be used. Linear elastic analysis
may be carried out assuming:
■ Cross-sections are uncracked and remain plane (i.e. analysis may be based on concrete
Cl. 5.4(1)
gross sections).
■ Linear stress–strain relationships.
■ The use of mean values of elastic modulus.

2.2 Actions
Actions refer to loads applied to the structure as defined below:

■ Permanent actions are actions for which the variation in magnitude with time is negligible. EC1-1-1: 2.1

■ Variable actions are actions for which the variation in magnitude with time is not negligible. EC1-1-1:
2.2, 3.3.1(2)

■ Accidental actions are actions of short duration but of significant magnitude that are
EC1-1-7
unlikely to occur on a given structure during the design working life.
Imposed deformations are not considered in this publication.

2.3 Characteristic values of actions

The values of actions given in the various parts of Eurocode 1: Actions on structures[11] are taken
as characteristic values. The characteristic value of an action is defined by one of the following EC0: 4.1.2
three alternatives:
■ Its mean value – generally used for permanent actions.

7
■ An upper value with an intended probability of not being exceeded or lower value with an
intended probability of being achieved – normally used for variable actions with known
statistical distributions, such as wind or snow.
■ A nominal value – used for some variable and accidental actions.

2.4 Variable actions: imposed loads

2.4.1 General
Imposed loads on buildings are divided into categories. Those most frequently used in concrete
design are shown in Table 2.1.

Category Description
EC1-1-1: A Areas for domestic and residential activities
Tables 6.1, 6.7, 6.9
B Office areas
& NA
C Areas of congregation
D Shopping areas
E Storage areas and industrial use (including access areas)
F Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN)
G Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN)
H Roofs (inaccessible except for maintenance and repair)
I Roofs (accessible with occupancy categories A – D)
K Roofs (accessible for special services, e.g. for helicopter landing areas)
Table 2.1 Notes
Categories of 1 Category J is not used.
imposed loads 2 For forklift loading refer to BS EN 1991–1–1 Cl. 6.2.3.

2.4.2 Characteristic values of imposed loads

Characteristic values for commonly used imposed loads are given in Tables 2.2 to 2.8.
Table 2.2
A: domestic and residential
EC1-1-1:
Tables 6.1, 6.2 Sub- Example Imposed loads
& NA.3 category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
A1 All usages within self-contained dwelling units. Communal 1.5 2.0
areas (including kitchens) in smalla blocks of flats
A2 Bedrooms and dormitories, except those in self-contained 1.5 2.0
single family dwelling units and in hotels and motels
A3 Bedrooms in hotels and motels; hospital wards; toilet areas 2.0 2.0
A4 Billiard/snooker rooms 2.0 2.7
A5 Balconies in single-family dwelling units and communal areas 2.5 2.0
in smalla blocks of flats
A6 Balconies in hostels, guest houses, residential clubs. Communal Min. 3.0 b Min. 2.0 c
areas in largera blocks of flats
A7 Balconies in hotels and motels Min. 4.0 b Min. 2.0 c
Notes
a Small blocks of flats are those with ≤ 3 storeys and ≤ 4 flats per floor/staircase. Otherwise they are
considered to be larger blocks of flats
b Same as the rooms to which they give access, but with a minimum of 3.0 kN/m2 or 4.0 kN/m2
c Concentrated at the outer edge

Table 2.3
B: offices
EC1-1-1:
Tables 6.1, 6.2 Sub- Example Imposed loads
& NA.3 category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
B1 General use other than in B2 2.5 2.7
B2 At or below ground floor level 3.0 2.7
8
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Table 2.4
C: areas of congregation
EC1-1-1:
Sub- Example Imposed loads Tables 6.1, 6.2
category & NA.3
qk Qk
C1 Areas with tables
C11 Public, institutional and communal dining rooms and 2.0 3.0
lounges, cafes and restaurants (Note: use C4 or C5 if
appropriate)
C12 Reading rooms with no book storage 2.5 4.0
C13 Classrooms 3.0 3.0
C2 Areas with fixed seats
C21 Assembly areas with fixed seatinga 4.0 3.6
C22 Places of worship 3.0 2.7
C3 Areas without obstacles for moving people
C31 Corridors, hallways, aisles in institutional type buildings, 3.0 4.5
hostels, guest houses, residential clubs and communal
areas in largerb blocks of flats
C32 Stairs, landings in institutional type buildings, hostels, 3.0 4.0
guest houses, residential clubs and communal areas in
largerb blocks of flats
C33 Corridors, hallways, aisles in otherc buildings 4.0 4.5
C34 Corridors, hallways, aisles in otherc buildings subjected to 5.0 4.5
wheeled vehicles, including trolleys
C35 Stairs, landings in otherc buildings subjected to crowds 4.0 4.0
C36 Walkways – Light duty (access suitable for one person, 3.0 2.0
walkway width approx 600 mm)
C37 Walkways – General duty (regular two-way pedestrian 5.0 3.6
traffic)
C38 Walkways – Heavy duty (high-density pedestrian traffic 7.5 4.5
including escape routes)
C39 Museum floors and art galleries for exhibition purposes 4.0 4.5
C4 Areas with possible physical activities
C41 Dance halls and studios, gymnasia, stagesd 5.0 3.6
C42 Drill halls and drill roomsd 5.0 7.0
C5 Areas subjected to large crowds
C51 Assembly areas without fixed seating, concert halls, bars 5.0 3.6
and places of worshipd,e
C52 Stages in public assembly areasd 7.5 4.5
Key
a Fixed seating is seating where its removal and the use of the space for other purposes is improbable
b Small blocks of flats are those with ≤ 3 storeys and ≤ 4 flats per floor/staircase. Otherwise they are
considered to be ‘larger’ blocks of flats
c Other buildings include those not covered by C31 and C32, and include hotels and motels and
institutional buildings subjected to crowds
d For structures that might be susceptible to resonance effects, reference should be made to NA.2.1
e For grandstands and stadia, reference should be made to the requirements of the appropriate
certifying authority

9
Table 2.5
D: shopping areas
EC1-1-1:
Tables 6.1, 6.2 Sub- Example Imposed loads
& NA.3 category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
D Shopping areas
D1 Areas in general retail shops 4.0 3.6
D2 Areas in department stores 4.0 3.6

Table 2.6
EC1-1-1: E: storage areas and industrial use (including access areas)
Tables 6.3, 6.4
& NA.4, NA.5 Sub- Example Imposed loads
category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
E1 Areas susceptible to accumulation of goods including access areas
E11 General areas for static equipment not specified 2.0 1.8
elsewhere (institutional and public buildings)
E12 Reading rooms with book storage, e.g. libraries 4.0 4.5
E13 General storage other than those specifieda 2.4/m 7.0
E14 File rooms, filing and storage space (offices) 5.0 4.5
E15 Stack rooms (books) 2.4/m height 7.0
(min. 6.5)
E16 Paper storage and stationery stores 4.0/m height 9.0
E17 Dense mobile stacking (books) on mobile trolleys in 4.8/m height 7.0
public and institutional buildings
E18 Dense mobile stacking (books) on mobile trucks in 4.8/m height 7.0
warehouses (min. 15.0)
E19 Cold storage 5.0/m height 9.0
(min. 15.0)
E2 Industrial use See BS EN 1991–1–1:
Forklifts Classes FL1 to FL6 Tables 6.5 & 6.6
Key
a Lower bound value given. More specific load values should be agreed with client

Table 2.7
F and G: traffic and parking areas

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
F Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN)
Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN) 2.5 5.0
G Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN)
Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN) 5.0 To be
determined for
specific use

10
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Table 2.8
H, I and K: roofs
EC1-1-1:
Sub- Example Imposed loads 6.3.4.1(2), Tables 6.9,
category 6.10, 6.11 & NA.7
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
H Roofs (inaccessible except for maintenance and repair)
Roof slope, a° < 30° 0.6
30° < a < 60° 0.6(60 – a)/30 0.9
< 60° 0
I Roofs (accessible with occupancy categories A – D)
Categories A – D As Tables 2.2 to 2.5 according to
specific use
K Roofs (accessible for special services, e.g. for helicopter landing areas)
Helicopter class HC1 (< 20 kN) (subject to –– 20
dynamic factor f = 1.4)
Helicopter class HC2 (< 60 kN) –– 60
Notes
1 Roofs are categorized according to their accessibility. Imposed loads for roofs that are normally
EC1-1-1:
accessible are generally the same as for the specific use and category of the adjacent area. Imposed
6.3.4 & NA
loads for roofs without access are given above.
2 There is no category J.

Movable partitions
The self-weight of movable partitions may be taken into account by a uniformly distributed load,
EC1-1-1:
qk, which should be added to the imposed loads of floors as follows: 6.3.1.2 (8) & NA

■ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 1.0 kN/m wall length:

qk = 0.5 kN/m2.
■ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 2.0 kN/m wall length:
qk = 0.8 kN/m2.
■ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 3.0 kN/m wall length:
qk = 1.2 kN/m2.

Heavier partitions should be considered separately.

2.4.3 Reduction factors

General
Roofs do not qualify for load reductions. The method given below complies with the UK EC1-1-1:
National Annex but differs from that given in the Eurocode. 6.3.1.2 (10)
6.3.1.2(11) & NA
Area
A reduction factor for imposed loads for area, aA, may be used and should be determined EC1-1-1:
using: 6.3.1.2 (10)
& NA Exp. (NA.1)
aA = 1.0 – A/1000 ≥ 0.75
where
A is the area (m2) supported with loads qualifying for reduction (i.e. categories A to E as
listed in Table 2.1).

11
EC1-1-1: Number of storeys
6.3.1.2 (11) A reduction factor for number of storeys, an, may be used and should be determined using:
& NA Exp. ( NA.2)
an = 1.1 – n/10 for 1 ≤ n ≤ 5
an = 0.6 for 5 < n ≤ 10
an = 0.5 for n > 10
where
n = number of storeys with loads qualifying for reduction (i.e. categories A to D as listed in
Table 2.1).

EC1-1-1:
Use
6.3.1.2 (11) & NA According to the UK NA, aA and an may not be used together.

2.5 Variable actions: snow loads

In persistent or transient situations, snow load on a roof, s, is defined as being:
EC1-1-3:
5.2(3)
s = mi CeCtsk

where
mi = snow load shape factor, , either m1 or m2
EC1-1-3:
5.3.1, 5.3.2 & NA
m1 = undrifted snow shape factor
m2 = drifted snow shape factor
For flat roofs, 0° = a (with no higher structures close or abutting),
m1 = m2 = 0.8
For shallow monopitch roofs, 0°< a < 30° (with no higher structures close or
abutting), m1 = 0.8, m2 = 0.8 (1 + a/30) For other forms of roof and local effects
refer to BS EN 1991–1–3 Sections 5.3 and 6

EC1-1-3: Ce = exposure coefficient

5.2(7) &Table 5.1 For windswept topography Ce = 0.8
For normal topography Ce = 1.0
For sheltered topography Ce = 1.2
EC1-1-3: Ct = thermal coefficient, Ct = 1.0 other than for some glass-covered roofs, or similar
5.2(8)

EC1-1-3: sk = characteristic ground snow load kN/m2

& NA 2.8 = 0.15(0.1Z + 0.05) + (A + 100)/525
where
Z = zone number obtained from the map in BS EN 1991–1–3 NA Figure NA.1
A = site altitude, m
Figure NA.1 of the NA to BS EN 1991–1–3 also gives figures for sk at 100 m a.m.s.l.
associated with the zones.
For the majority of the South East, the Midlands, Northern Ireland and the north of
England apart from high ground, sk = 0.50 kN/m2.

For the West Country, West Wales and Ireland the figure is less. For most of Scotland
and parts of the east coast of England, the figure is more. See Figure 2.1.
Snow load is classified as a variable fixed action. Exceptional circumstances may be treated as
accidental actions in which case reference should be made to BS EN 1991–1–3.

12
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

5
4
55

1 Zone 1 = 0.25 kN/m2 at 100 m a.m.s.l.

2 2 Zone 1 = 0.40 kN/m2 at 100 m a.m.s.l.
3
3 4 4 3 Zone 1 = 0.50 kN/m2 at 100 m a.m.s.l.
3 4 Zone 1 = 0.60 kN/m2 at 100 m a.m.s.l.
4
2 2 5 Zone 1 = 0.70 kN/m2 at 100 m a.m.s.l.
2 4 EC1-1-3: NA Fig.
4 NA.1
1 2
1
2 3 4
1 2 3
2
1 4 2
2 3
1

Figure 2.1
Characteristic ground snow load map (ground snow load at 100 m a.m.s.l. (kN/m2)

2.6 Variable actions: wind loads

This Section presents a very simple interpretation of Eurocode 1[11, 11a] and is intended to
provide a basic understanding with respect to rectangular-plan buildings with flat roofs. In
general, maximum values are given: with more information a lower value might be used. The
user should be careful to ensure that any information used is within the scope of the application
envisaged. The user is referred to more specialist guidance[23, 24] or BS EN 1991–1–4[25] and
its UK National Annex[25a]. The National Annex includes clear and concise flow charts for the
determination of peak velocity pressure, qp.

In essence characteristic wind load can be expressed as:

wk = cf qp(z)
where
cf = force coefficient, which varies, but is a max. of 1.3 for overall load
qp(z) = ce(z) ceT qb
where
ce(z) = exposure factor from Figure 2.3
EC1-1-4:
ceT = town terrain factor from Figure 2.4 Figs NA.7, NA.8
qb = 0.006vb2 kN/m2
where
vb = vb,mapcalt
where
vb,map = fundamental basic wind velocity from Figure 2.2
calt = altitude factor, conservatively, calt = 1 + 0.001A EC1-1-4:
Fig. NA.1
where
A = altitude a.m.s.l
Symbols abbreviations and some of the caveats are explained in the sections below, which
together provide a procedure for determining wind load to BS EN 1991–1–4.

13
2.6.1 Determine basic wind velocity, vb
vb = cdircseasoncprobvb,0
where
EC1-1-4: cdir = directional factor
4.2(1) Note 2 Conservatively, cdir = 1.0
& NA 2.4, 2.5 (cdir is a minimum of 0.73 or 0.74 for wind in an easterly direction,
30° to 120°)
EC1-1-4: cseason = season factor
4.2(2) Note 3 For a 6 month return period, including winter, or greater,
& NA 2.7: Fig. NA.2 cseason = 1.00
EC1-1-4: cprob = probability factor
4.2(1) Notes 4 & 5 = 1.00 for return period of 50 years
& NA 2.8 vb,0 = vb,map calt
EC1-1-4: where
4.2(1) Note 2 vb,map = fundamental basic wind velocity from Figure 2.2
& NA 2.4: Fig. NA.1

EC1-1-4: calt = altitude factor

4.2(2) Note 1 Conservatively, calt = 1 + 0.001A
& NA 2.5
where
A = altitude of the site in metres a.m.s.l.
Where orography is significant (i.e. the site is close to a slope
steeper than 0.05), refer to NA 2.5

2.6.2 Calculate basic wind pressure, qb

qb = 0.5r vb2
where
EC1-1-4: 4.5(1)
Note 2 & NA 2.18
vb = as above
r = density of air
= 1.226 kg/m3 (= 12.0 N/m3) for UK

2.6.3 Calculate peak wind pressure, qp(z)

qp(z) = ce(z) qb for country locations
EC1-1-4: 4.5(1)
Note 1 & NA 2.17
= ce(z) ceT qb for town locations
where
EC1-1-4: 4.5(1)
Note 1, NA 2.17
qb = as above
& Fig. A.NA.1

EC1-1-4: 4.5(1) ce(z) = exposure factor derived from Figure 2.3 at height z (see below)
Note 1 & NA 2.17:
Fig. NA.7

EC1-1-4: 4.5(1) ce,T = exposure correction factor for town terrain derived from Figure 2.4
Note 1 & NA 2.17:
Fig. NA.8

EC1-1-4: 7.2.2(1), z = the height at which qp is sought

Note & NA 2.26 For a windward wall and when h ≤ b, qp is calculated at the reference height
ze = h. For other aspect ratios h:b of the windward wall, qp ,is calculated at
different reference heights for each part (see BS EN 1991–1–4).
where
h = height of building
b = breadth of building
For leeward and side walls,
z = height of building
14
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

200 200
Use 1.0 in this area
31
30 4.0
29 100 100
28 90 90
27 80 80
70 70
26 60 60
50 50
3.5
40 40

30 30
10

z -hdis(m)

z -hdis(m)
20 20
3.0

25 0.9
23
10 10
22 9 2.5 9
8 8
24 7 7
6 6 0.8
5 5
4 2.0 4
0.7
3 3

2 1.5 2
≤0.1 1 10 ≥100 ≤0.1 1 10 ≥20
Distance upwind to shoreline (km) Distance inside town terrain (km)

Note Note
Subject to altitude correction. Generally hdis = 0. For terrain category IV (towns etc.) see BS EN 1991–1–4: A.5.

Figure 2.2 Figure 2.3 Figure 2.4

Map of fundamental basic wind Exposure factor ce(z) for sites in country Multiplier for exposure correction for
velocity, vb,map, (m/s) or town terrain sites in town terrain

EC1-1-4: 4.2(1) EC1-1-4: 4.5(1) EC1-1-4: 4.5(1)

Note 2 & NA 2.4: Fig. NA.1 Note 1 & NA 2.17: Fig. NA.7 Note 1 & NA 2.17: Fig. NA.8

2.6.4 Calculate characteristic wind load, wk

wk = qp(z)cf
where
qp(z) = as above
EC1-1-4:
cf = force coefficient for the structure or structural element 7, 8 & NA
Generally
= cpe + cpi
where
cpe = (external) pressure coefficient dependent on size of area considered and zone. EC1-1-4:
For areas above 1 m2, cpe,10 should be used. 7.2.1(1) Note 2 &
NA. 2.25
Overall loads EC1-1-4:
For the walls of rectangular-plan buildings, cpe,10 may be determined from 7.2.2(2) Note 1 &
Table 7.1 of BS EN 1991–1–4. NA.2.27

However, for the determination of overall loads on buildings, the net pressure EC1-1-4:
coefficients given in Table 2.9 may be used. In this case it will be unnecessary 7.2.2(2) Note 1 &
to determine internal wind pressure coefficients. NA.2.27, Table NA.4

Cladding loads EC1-1-4:

For areas above 1 m2, cpe,10 should be used. cpe,10 may be determined from 7.2.2(2) Note 1 &
Table 7.1 of BS EN 1991–1–4. See Table 2.10. NA.2.27

15
EC1-1-4:
Flat roofs
7.2.3, NA.2.28 & NA For flat roofs, according to the Advisory Note in the NA some of the values
advisory note of cpe,10 in Table 7.2 of BS EN 1991–1–4 (see Table 2.11) are significantly
different from current practice in the UK. It recommends that designers should
BS 6399: consider using the values in BS 6399:2 to maintain the current levels of safety
Table 8 & Fig. 18 and economy. See Table 2.12.
EC1-1-4: For other forms of roof refer to BS EN 1991–1–4 and the UK NA.
NA.2.28 & NA It will also be necessary to determine internal wind pressure coefficients for
advisory note the design of cladding.
EC1-1-4: cpi = internal pressure coefficient.
7.2.9(6) Note 2 For no dominant openings cpi may be taken as the more onerous of +0.2 and –0.3

EC1-1-4: Table 2.9

NA 2.27, Table NA.4 Net pressure coefficient, cpe,10, for walls of rectangular plan buildings*
h/d Net pressure coefficient, cpe,10
5 1.3
1 1.1
≥ 0.25 0.8
Notes
1 * in effect these values are force coefficients for determining overall loads on buildings.
2 h = height of building.
3 b = breadth of building (perpendicular to wind).
4 d = depth of building (parallel to wind).
5 Values may be interpolated.
6 Excludes funnelling.

Table 2.10
EC1-1-4: External pressure coefficient, cpe,10, for walls of rectangular-plan buildings
7.2.2(2) Table 7.1,
Note 1 & NA 2.27: Zone Description cpe,10
Tables NA.4a , NA.4b Max. Min.
Zone A For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas within –1.2
0.2min[b; 2h] of windward edge
Zone B For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas within –0.8
0.2min[b; 2h] of windward edge
Zone C For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas from –0.5
0.2min[b; 2h] to min[b; 2h] of windward edge
Zone D Windward wall +0.8
Zone E Leeward wall –0.7
Zones D Net +1.3
and E
Notes
1 h = height of building.
2 b = breadth of building (perpendicular to wind).

EC1-1-4: Table 2.11

7.2, Table 7.2 & NA External pressure coefficient, cpe,10 for flat roofs*
Zone Description cpe,10
Sharp edge With parapet
at eaves
Zone F Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and within –1.8 –1.6
0.2min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to wind direction)
Zone G Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and outwith –1.2 –1.1
0.2min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to wind direction)
Zone H Roof between 0.1min[b; 2h] and 0.5min[b; 2h] from –0.7 –0.7
windward edge
Zone I Remainder between 0.5min[b; 2h] and leeward edge ±0.2 ±0.2
Notes
1 * According to NA to BS EN 1991-1-4, this table is not recommended for use in the UK.
2 h = height of building.
16 3 b = breadth of building (perpendicular to wind).
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Table 2.12 EC1-1-4:

External pressure coefficient, cpe, for flat roofs 7.2.3, NA.2.28 &
NA advisory note.
Zone Description cpe

Sharp edge With parapet BS 6399:

at eaves Table 8 & Fig. 18
Zone A Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and within –2.0 –1.9
0.25min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to wind direction)
Zone B Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and outwith –1.4 –1.3
0.25min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to wind direction)
Zone C Roof between 0.1min[b; 2h] and 0.5min[b; 2h] from –0.7 –0.7
windward edge
Zone D Remainder between 0.5min[b; 2h] and leeward edge ±0.2 ±0.2
Notes
1 h = height of building.
2 b = breadth of building (perpendicular to wind).

2.6.5 Calculate the overall wind force, Fw

Fw = cscdSwk Aref EC1-1-4:
where 5.3.2, Exp. (5.4)
& NA

EC1-1-4:
wk = as above 6.2(1) a), 6.2(1) c)
cscd = structural factor, conservatively
EC1-1-4:
= 1.0 6.2(1) e) & NA.2.20
or may be derived
where
cs = size factor EC1-1-4:
cs may be derived from Exp. (6.2) or table NA.3. Depending on values of 6.3(1), Exp. (6.2) &
(b + h) and (z – hdis) and dividing into Zone A, B or C, a value of cs NA.2.20, Table NA3
(a factor < 1.00) may be found.
cd = dynamic factor EC1-1-4:
cd may be derived from Exp. (6.3) or figure NA.9. Depending on values of ds 6.3(1), Exp. (6.3) &
(logarithmic decrement of structural damping) and h/b, a value of cd (a factor > NA.2.20: Fig. NA9
1.00) may be found.
cd may be taken as 1.0 for framed buildings with structural walls and masonry EC1-1-4:
internal walls, and for cladding panels and elements 5.3.2, Exp. (5.4)
& NA
Aref = reference area of the structure or structural element

2.7 Variable actions: others EC1-1-6, EC1-2,

EC1-1-2, EC1-1-5,
Actions due to construction, traffic, fire, thermal actions, use as silos or from cranes are outside EC1-3 & EC1-4
the scope of this publication and reference should be made to specialist literature.

17
2.8 Permanent actions
The densities and area loads of commonly used materials, sheet materials and forms of
construction are given in Tables 2.13 to 2.15.

Actions arising from settlement, deformation and creep are outside the scope of this document
but generally are to be considered as permanent actions. Where critical, refer to specialist
literature.
Table 2.13
Bulk densities for soils and materials[11, 26]

Bulk densities kN/m3 Bulk densities kN/m3

Soils Materials
Clay – stiff 19–22 Concrete – reinforced 25.0
Clay – soft 16–19 Concrete – wet reinforced 26.0
Granular – loose 16–18 Glass 25.6
Granular – dense 19–21 Granite 27.3
Silty clay, sandy clay 16–20 Hardcore 19.0
Materials Limestone (Portland stone – med. weight) 22.0
Asphalt 22.5 Limestone (marble – heavyweight) 26.7
Blocks – aerated concrete (min.) 5.0 Macadam paving 21.0
Blocks – aerated concrete (max.) 9.0 MDF 8.0
Blocks – dense aggregate 20.0 Plaster 14.1
Blocks – lightweight 14.0 Plywood 6.3
Books – bulk storage 8–11 Sandstone 23.5
Brickwork – blue 24.0 Screed – sand/cement 22.0
Brickwork – engineering 22.0 Steel/iron 77.0
Brickwork – fletton 18.0 Terracotta 20.7
Brickwork – London stock 19.0 Timber – Douglas fir 5.2
Brickwork – sand lime 21.0 Timber – European beech/oak 7.1
Chipboard 6.9 Timber – Grade C16 3.6
Concrete – aerated 10.0 Timber – Grade C24 4.1
Concrete – lightweight 18.0 Timber – Iroko/teak 6.4
Concrete – plain 24.0

18
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Table 2.14
Typical area loads for concrete slabs and sheet materials [11, 26]

Typical area loads kN/m2 Typical area loads kN/m2

Concrete slabs Sheet materials
Precast concrete solid units (100 mm) 2.50 Plaster skim coat 0.05
Precast concrete hollowcore unitsa (150 mm) 2.40 Plasterboard (12.5 mm) 0.09
Precast concrete hollowcore unitsa (200 mm) 2.87 Plasterboard (19 mm) 0.15
Precast concrete.hollowcore unitsa (300 mm) 4.07 Plywood (12.5 mm) 0.08
Precast concrete hollowcore unitsa (400 mm) 4.84 Plywood (19 mm) 0.12
Ribbed slabb (250 mm) 4.00 Quarry tiles including mortar bedding 0.32
Ribbed slabb (300 mm) 4.30 Raised floor – heavy duty 0.50
Ribbed slabb (350 mm) 4.70 Raised floor – medium weight 0.40
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (325 mm) 6.00 Raised floor – lightweight 0.30
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (425 mm) 7.30 Render (13 mm) 0.30
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (525 mm) 8.60 Screed – 50 mm 1.15
Sheet materials Screed – lightweight (25 mm) 0.45
Asphalt (20 mm) 0.46 Stainless steel roofing (0.4 mm) 0.05
Carpet and underlay 0.05 Suspended ceiling – steel 0.10
Chipboard (18 mm) 0.12 Suspended fibreboard tiles 0.05
Dry lining on stud (20 mm) 0.15 T&G boards (15.5 mm) 0.09
False ceiling – steel framing 0.10 T&G boards (22 mm) 0.12
Felt (3 layer) and chippings 0.35 Tiles – ceramic floor on bedding 1.00
Glass – double glazing 0.52 Battens for slating and tiling 0.03
Glass – single glazing 0.30 Tiles – clay roof (max) 0.67
Insulation – glass fibre (150 mm) 0.03 Tiles – natural slate (thick) 0.65
Paving stones (50 mm) 1.20 Tiles – interlocking concrete 0.55
Plaster – two coat gypsum (12 mm) 0.21 Tiles – plain concrete 0.75
Key
a Hollowcore figures assume no topping (50 mm structural topping : 1.25 kN/m2)
b Ribbed slabs: 150 web @ 750 centres with 100 mm thick flange/slab. Web slope 1:10
c Waffle slabs: 150 ribs @ 900 centres with 100 mm thick flange/slab. Web slope 1:10

19
2.5c Loads for typical forms of construction
Table 2.15 Table 2.14
Loads for typical forms of construction[26] 2.5c Loads for typical forms of construction
Cavity wall (kN/m2) Residential floor (kN/m2)
Brickwork 102.5 mm 2.40 Carpet 0.05
Insulation 50 mm 0.02 Floating floor 0.15
Blockwork 100 mm 1.40 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Plaster 0.21 Suspended ceiling 0.20
Total 4.0
Services 0.10
Lightweight cladding (kN/m2)
Total 6.75
Insulated panel 0.20
School floor (kN/m2)
Purlins 0.05
Carpet/flooring 0.05
Dry lining on stud 0.15
Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Total 0.40
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Curtain walling (kN/m2)
Allow 1.00 Services 0.20

Precast concrete cladding (kN/m2) Total 6.60

Facing 1.00 Hospital floor (kN/m2)
Precast panel (100 mm) 2.40 Flooring 0.05
Insulation 0.05 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Dry lining on stud 0.15 Screed 2.20
Total 3.60 Suspended ceiling 0.15
Dry lining (kN/m2) Services (but can be greater) 0.05
Metal studs 0.05 Total 8.70
Plasterboard and skim × 2 0.40
Flat roof/external terrace (kN/m2)
Total 0.45
Paving or gravel, allow 2.20
Timber stud wall (kN/m2)
Waterproofing 0.50
Timber studs 0.10
Insulation 0.10
Plasterboard and skim × 2 0.40
Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab ceiling 6.25
Total 0.50
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Office floor (kN/m2)
Carpet 0.03 Services 0.30

Raised floor 0.30 Total 9.50

Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25 Timber pitched roof (kN/m2)
Suspended ceiling 0.15 Tiles (range 0.50–0.75) 0.75
Services 0.30 Battens 0.05
Total 7.03 Felt 0.05
Office core area (kN/m2) Rafters 0.15
Tiles and bedding, allow 1.00 Insulation 0.05
Screed 2.20 Plasterboard & skim 0.15
Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Services 0.10
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Ceiling joists 0.15
Services 0.30
Total perpendicular to roof 1.45
Total 9.90
Total on plan assuming 30° pitch 1.60
Stairs (kN/m2)
Metal decking roof (kN/m2)
150 mm waist ( ≡ 175 @ 25 kN/m3) 4.40
Insulated panel 0.20
Treads 0.15 × 0.25 × 4/2 @ 25 kN/m3 1.88
Screed 0.05 @ 22 kN/m3 1.10 Purlins 0.10

Plaster 0.21 Steelwork 0.30

Finish: tiles & bedding 1.00 Services 0.10
Total 8.60 Total 0.70

20
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

2.9 Design values of actions

2.9.1 General case
The design value of an action, Fd , that occurs in a load case is
Fd = gFc Fk
where
gF = partial factor for the action according to the limit state under consideration. Table
2.16 indicates the partial factors to be used in the UK for the combinations of
representative actions in building structures.
c Fk may be considered as the representative action, Frep, appropriate to the limit state
being considered
where
c = a factor that converts the characteristic value of an action into a representative
value. It adjusts the value of the action to account for the nature of the limit
state under consideration and the joint probability of the actions occurring
simultaneously. It can assume the value of 1.0 for a permanent action or c0
or c1 or c2 for a variable action. Table 2.17 shows how characteristic values of
variable actions are converted into representative values. This table is derived
from BS EN 1990[10] and its National Annex[10a].
Fk = characteristic value of an action as defined in Sections 2.2 and 2.3.

Table 2.16 EC0:

gF) for use in verification of limit states in persistent and transient design situations
Partial factors (g Tables A1.2(A), A1.2(B),
A1.2(C), A1.4 & NA
Limit state Permanent actions Leading variable action Accompanying variable
(Gk) (Qk,1) actions (Qk,i)d
a) Equilibrium (EQU)
1.10 (0.9)a 1.50 (0.0)a c0,i 1.50 (0.0)a
b) Strength at ULS (STR/GEO) not involving geotechnical actions
Either
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 (1.0)a 1.5 c01.5
or the worst case of
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 (1.0)a c01.5 c01.5
and
Exp. (6.10b) 1.25 (1.0)a 1.5 c01.5
c) Strength at ULS (STR/GEO) with geotechnical actions
Worst case of
Set B 1.35 (1.0)a 1.5 (0.0)a
and
Set C 1.0 1.3
d) Serviceability
Characteristic 1.00 1.00 c0,i 1.00
Frequent 1.00 c1,1 1.00 c2,i 1.00
Quasi-permanent 1.00 c2,1 1.00 c2,i 1.00
e) Accidental design situations
Exp. (6.11a) 1.0 Adb c1,i (main)
c2,i (others)
f) Seismic
Exp. (6.12a/b) 1.0 AEdc c2,i
Key Notes
a Value if favourable (shown in brackets) 1 The values of c are given in Table 2.17.
b Leading accidental action, Ad, is unfactored 2 Geotechnical actions given in the table
c Seismic action, AEd are based on Design Approach 1 in
d Refer to BS EN 1990: A1.2.2 & NA Clause A1.3.1(5) of BS EN 1990, which is
recommended in its National Annex.

21
2.9.2 Design values at ULS
For the ULS of strength (STR), the designer may choose between using Expression (6.10) or the
EC0: 6.4.3.2(3)
worst case of Expression (6.10a) or Expression (6.10b).

Single variable action

At ULS, the design value of actions is
either
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1
or the worst case of:
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 Gk + c0,1 1.5 Qk,1
and
Exp. (6.10b) 1.25 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1
where
Gk = permanent action
Qk,1 = single variable action
c0,1 = combination factor for a single variable load (see Table 2.17)

Table 2.17
Values of c factors
EC0: A1.2.2 Action c0 c1 c2
& NA
Imposed loads in buildings
Category A: domestic, residential areas 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category B: office areas 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category C: congregation areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category D: shopping areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category E: storage areas 1.0 0.9 0.8
Category F: traffic area (vehicle weight ≤ 30 kN) 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category G: traffic area (30 kN < vehicle weight ≤ 160 kN) 0.7 0.5 0.3

EC1-1-1: 3.3.2 Category H: roofsa 0.7 0.0 0.0

Snow loads where altitude ≤ 1000 m a.m.s.l.a 0.5 0.2 0.0
Wind loadsa 0.5 0.2 0.0
Temperature effects (non-fire)a 0.6 0.5 0.0
Key
a On roofs, imposed loads, snow loads and wind loads should not be applied together.
Notes
1 The numerical values given above are in accordance with BS EN 1990 and its UK National Annex.
2 Categories K and L are assumed to be as for Category H

Expression (6.10) leads to the use of gF = gG = 1.35 for permanent actions and gF = gQ = 1.50 for
variable actions (gG for permanent actions is intended to be constant across all spans).

Expression (6.10) is always equal to or more conservative than the less favourable of Expressions
(6.10a) and (6.10b). Expression (6.10b) will normally apply when the permanent actions are not
greater than 4.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads, category E in Table 2.17,
where Expression (6.10a) always applies).

Therefore, except in the case of concrete structures supporting storage loads where c0 = 1.0,
or for mixed use, Expression (6.10b) will usually apply. Thus, for members supporting vertical
actions at ULS, 1.25Gk + 1.5Qk will be appropriate for most situations and applicable to most
concrete structures (see Figure 2.5).

Compared with the use of Expression (6.10), the use of either Expression (6.10a) or (6.10b) leads
to a more consistent reliability index across lightweight and heavyweight materials.

22
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

50

40
Use Exp. (6.10a)
gk kN/m (or kN/m2)

30
Note
Assuming c0 = 0.7
20 i.e. applicable to all areas
except storage.
Use Exp. (6.10b)
10

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
q k kN/m (or kN/m2)

Figure 2.5
When to use Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b)

Accompanying variable actions

Again the designer may choose between using Expression (6.10) or the less favourable of
EC0:
Expressions (6.10a) or (6.10b). 6.4.3.2(3)
Either
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1 + S(c0,i 1.5 Qk,i )
or the worst case of:
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 Gk + c0,1 1.5 Qk,1 + S(c0,i 1.5 Qk,i)
and
Exp. (6.10b) 1.25 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1 + S(c0,i 1.5 Qk,i)
where
Gk = permanent action
Qk,1 = 1st variable action
Qk,i = ith variable action
c0,1 = characteristic combination factor for 1st variable load (see Table 2.17)
c0,i = characteristic combination factor for ith variable load (see Table 2.17)

In the above, Qk,1 (and c0,i ) refers to the leading variable action and Qk,i (and c0,i ) refers to
EC0:
accompanying independent variable actions. In general, the distinction between the two types of A1.2.2, A1.3.1 & NA
actions will be obvious (see Figure 2.6); where it is not, each load should in turn be treated as the
leading action. Also, the numerical values for partial factors given in the UK National Annex[10a]
are used in the equations above. The value of c0 depends on the use of the building and should
be obtained from the UK National Annex for BS EN 1990 (see Table 2.17).

qk2
gk2

qk1
gk1
Note
qk1 Generally the variable
gk1 actions on a typical office
qk3 = wk block would be considered
as being three sets of
qk1
gk1 independent variable
actions:
1. Imposed office loads
qk1 on the office floors.
gk1 2. Roof imposed load.
A B C 3. Wind load.

Figure 2.6
Independent variable actions
23
The expressions take into account the probability of joint occurrence of loads by applying the
c0,i factor to the accompanying variable action. The probability that these combined actions will
be exceeded is deemed to be similar to the probability of a single action being exceeded.

If the two independent variable actions Qk,1 and Qk,2 are associated with different spans and the
use of Expression (6.10b) is appropriate, then in one set of analyses apply
1.25Gk + 1.5Qk,1 to the Qk,1 spans
and 1.25Gk + c0.i 1.5Qk,1 to the Qk,2 spans.
In associated analyses apply
1.25Gk + c0,i 1.5Qk,1 to the Qk,1 spans
and 1.25Gk + 1.25Qk,2 to the Qk,2 spans.
See Example 2.11.2 (two variable actions).

2.9.3 Design values at SLS

There are three combinations of actions at SLS (or load combination at SLS). These are given in
EC0: 6.5 & Table A1.4
Table 2.18. The combination and value to be used depends on the nature of the limit state being
checked. Quasi-permanent combinations are associated with deformation, crack widths and
crack control. Frequent combinations may be used to determine whether a section is cracked or
not. The numeric values of c0, c1 and c2 are given in Table 2.17.

Colloquially
c0 has become known as the ‘characteristic’ value
c1 has become known as the ‘frequent’ value
c2 has become known as the ‘quasi-permanent’ value

Table 2.18
EC0: Table A1.4
Partial factors to be applied in the verification of the SLS

Combination Permanent actions Gk Variable actions Qk

Unfavourablea Favourablea Leadingb Othersb
Characteristic Gk,sup Gk,inf Qk,1 c0,iQk,i
Frequent Gk,sup Gk,inf c1,1Qk,1 c2,iQk,i
Quasi-permanent Gk,sup Gk,inf c2,1Qk,1 c2,iQk,i
Key
a Generally Gk,sup and Gk,inf may be taken as Gk. See Section 2.9.5
b c factors are given in Table 2.17

2.9.4 Design values for other limit states

Load combinations are given in Table 2.16 for
a) Equilibrium (EQU),
b) Strength at ULS not involving geotechnical actions,
c) Strength at ULS with geotechnical actions,
d) Serviceability,
e) Accidental and
f) Seismic design situations.

24
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

2.9.5 Variations in permanent actions

When the variation of a permanent action is not small then the upper (Gkj,sup) and the lower
EC0: 4.1.2, 4.1.2 (3)
(Gkj,inf) characteristic values (the 95% and 5% fractile values respectively) should be established.
This procedure is necessary only when the coefficient of variation (= 100 × standard deviation/
mean) is greater than 10. In terms of permanent actions, variations in the self-weight of concrete PD 6687[6]: 2.8.4
in concrete frames are considered small.

At ULS where the variation is not small, gGk,sup should be used with Gkj,sup and gGk,inf with
Gkj,inf. Similarly, where the variation is not small, at SLS Gkj,sup should be used where actions are
unfavourable and Gkj,inf used where favourable.

Where checks, notably checks on static equilibrium (EQU), are very sensitive to variation of the
magnitude of a permanent action from one place to another, the favourable and unfavourable
EC0: 6.4.3 (4)
parts of this action should be considered as individual actions. In such ‘very sensitive’ verifications
gG,sup and gG,inf should be used.

2.10 Load arrangements of actions: introduction

The process of designing concrete structures involves identifying relevant design situations and
EC0: 3.2
limit states. These include persistent, transient or accidental situations. In each design situation
the structure should be verified at the relevant limit states.

In the analysis of the structure at the limit state being considered, the maximum effect of
actions should be obtained using a realistic arrangement of loads. Generally variable actions
should be arranged to produce the most unfavourable effect, for example to produce maximum
overturning moments in spans or maximum bending moments in supports.

For building structures, design concentrates mainly on the ULS, the ultimate limit state of EC0: 3.3, 3.4, 6.4, 6.5
strength (STR), and SLS, the serviceability limit state. However, it is essential that all limit states
are considered. The limit states of equilibrium (EQU), strength at ULS with geotechnical actions
(STR/GEO) and accidental situations must be taken into account as appropriate.

2.11 Load arrangements according to the UK National

Annex to Eurocode
In building structures, any of the following sets of simplified load arrangements may be used at
Cl. 5.1.3 & NA
ULS and SLS (See Figure 2.7).
■ The more critical of:
a) alternate spans carrying gGGk + gQQk with other spans loaded with gGGk; and
b) any two adjacent spans carrying gGGk + gQQk with other spans loaded with gGGk.
■ Or the more critical of:
a) alternate spans carrying gGGk + gQQk; with other spans loaded with gGGk; and
b) all spans carrying gGGk + gQQk.
■ Or, for slabs only, all spans carrying gGGk + gGGk, provided the following conditions are met:
● In a one-way spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2 (a bay is defined as a
strip across the full width of a structure bounded on the other sides by lines of support).
● The ratio of the variable action, Qk, to the permanent action, Gk, does not exceed 1.25.
● The magnitude of the variable action excluding partitions does not exceed 5 kN/m2.

Where analysis is carried out for the single load case of all spans loaded, the resulting moments,
except those at cantilevers, should be reduced by 20%, with a consequential increase in the
span moments.

25
g JJ d g @@ d

g JJ d g JJ d g @
@ d

g JJ d g @@ d

a) Alternate spans loaded b) Adjacent spans loaded c) All spans loaded

Note
Whilst the use of Exp. (6.10) is indicated, these arrangements may equally be used with Exp. (6.10a)
or (6.10b).

Figure 2.7
Load arrangements for beams and slabs according to UK NA to Eurocode

26
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

2.12 Examples of loading

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041
Continuous beam in a domestic Checked by web Sheet no. 1
structure Client TCC Date Oct 09

2.12.1 Continuous beam in a domestic structure

Determine the appropriate load combination and ultimate load
for a continuous beam of four 6 m spans in a domestic structure
supporting a 175 mm slab at 6 m centres.

qk
gk

A B C D E
6000 mm 6000 mm 6000 mm 6000 mm

Figure 2.8 Continuous beam in a domestic structure

a) Actions kN/m
Permanent action, gk
Self-weight, 175 mm thick slabs : 0.17 x 25 x 6.0 = 26.3
E/o self-weight downstand 800 × 225 : 0.80 x 0.225 x 25 = 4.5
50 mm screed @ 22 kN/m3 : 0.05 x 22 x 6.0 = 6.6
Finishes and services : 0.50 x 6.0 = 3.0
Dividing wall 2.40 × 4.42 (200 mm dense blockwork with = 10.6
plaster both sides)
Total gk = 51.0

Variable action, qk
Imposed, dwelling @ 1.5 kN/m2 : 1.5 x 6.0 = 9.0
Total qk = 9.0

Ultimate load, n
Assuming use of Exp. (6.10), n = 1.35 × 51 + 1.5 × 9.0 = = 82.4
Assuming use of worst case of Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b)
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 9.0 = = 78.3
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 9.0 = = 77.3
In this case Exp. (6.10a) would be critical‡
∴ ultimate load = 78.3

‡ This could also be determined from Figure 2.5 or by determining that gk > 4.5qk

27
Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041
Continuous beam in mixed use Checked by web Sheet no. 1
structure Client TCC Date Oct 09

2.12.2 Continuous beam in mixed use structure

EC1-1-1:
Determine the worst case arrangements of actions for ULS design of a 6.3.1.1 & NA,
continuous beam supporting a 175 mm slab @ 6 m centres. Note that EC0:
the variable actions are from two sources as defined in Figure 2.9.: A.1.2.2. & NA

qk1 = 15 kN/m qk2 = 24 kN/m

gk = 51 kN/m

A B C D E
6000 mm 6000 mm 6000 mm 6000 mm
Office use @ 2.5 kN/m2 Shopping use @ 4.0 kN/m2
c0 = 0.7 c0 = 0.7

Figure 2.9 Continuous beam in mixed-use structure

a) Load combination
Load combination Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) will be used, as either
will produce a smaller total load than Exp. (6.10). It is necessary to
decide which expression governs.
i) Actions kN/m
Permanent action
As before, Example 2.12.1 gk = 51.0

Variable action
Office @ 2.5 kN/m2 qk1 = 15.0
Shopping @ 4.0 kN/m2 qk2 = 24.0

Ultimate load, n
For office use:
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 15.0 = 84.6
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 15.0 = 86.3
For shopping use:
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 1.5 × 0.7 × 24.0 = 94.1
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 24.0 = 99.8
By inspection Exp. (6.10b) governs in both cases‡

b) Arrangement of ultimate loads

As the variable actions arise from different sources, one is a leading
variable action and the other is an accompanying variable action. The
unit loads to be used in the various arrangements are:

‡ This could also be determined from Figure 2.5 or by determining that g > 4.5q
k k

28
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

i) Actions kN/m
Permanent
1.25 × 51.0 = 63.8
Variable
Office use
as leading action, gQQk = 1.5 × 15 = 22.5
as accompanying action, c0gQQk = 0.7 = 15.75
× 1.5 × 15
Shopping use
as leading action, gQQk = 1.5 × 24 = 36.0
as accompanying action, c0gQQk = 0.7 = 25.2
× 1.5 × 24

ii) For maximum bending moment in span AB

The arrangement and magnitude of actions of loads are shown
in Figure 2.10. The variable load in span AB assumes the value as
leading action and that in span CD takes the value as an
accompanying action.

Leading Accompanying Permanent

variable action variable action action
gQ q k1 = 22.5 kN/m c Q g Q q k2 = 25.2 kN/m gG g k = 63.8 kN/m

A B C D E

Figure 2.10 For maximum bending moment in span

p AB

iii) For maximum bending moment in span CD

The load arrangement is similar to that in Figure 2.10, but now
the variable load in span AB takes its value as an accompanying
action
(i.e. 15.75 kN/m) and that in span CD assumes the value as
leading action (36 kN/m).
Accompanying Leading Permanent
variable action variable action action
c Qg Q q k1 = 15.8 kN/m g Qq k2 = 36.0 kN/m gG,inf g k = 63.8 kN/m

A B C D E

Figure 2.11 For maximum bending moment in span

p CD

29
iv) For maximum bending moment at support B
The arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.12. As both spans AB EC1-1-1:
and BC receive load from the same source, no reduction is possible 6.3.1.1 (10)
(
(other g area‡).
than that for large ). & NA

Leading Permanent
variable action action
gQ q k1 = 22.5 kN/m gG g k = 63.8 kN/m

A B C D E

Figure 2.12 For maximum bending moment at support

pp B

v) For maximum bending moment at support D

The relevant arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.13. Comments
made in d) also apply here.

Leading Permanent
variable action action
gQ q k2 = 36 kN/m gG g k = 63.8 kN/m

A B C D E

Figure 2.13 For maximum bending moment at support

pp D

vi) For critical curtailment and hogging in span CD

The relevant arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.14.

Accompanying
p Leading
variable action variable action
c 0gQ q k1 = 15.8 kN/m g Q q k2 = 36.0 kN/m
Permanent actionn
gG,in f g k = 51 kN/m
m
A B C D E

Figure 2.14 For curtailment and hogging in span

p CD

Eurocode 2 requires that all spans should be loaded with either gG,sup or gG,inff (as Cl. 2.4.3(2)
per Table 2.16). As illustrated in Figure 2.14, using gG,inff = 1.0 might be critical for
curtailment and hogging in spans.
spans

EC1-1-1:
‡ Variable actions may be subjected to reduction factors: a , according to the
A
6.3.1.2 (10)
area supported
pp ( 2), aA = 1.0 – A/1000 ≥ 0.75.
(m & NA

30
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Propped cantilever Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

2.12.3 Propped cantilever EC0:

Determine the Equilibrium, ULS and SLS (deformation) load Table 1.2(B),
Note 3
combinations for the propped cantilever shown in Figure 2.15. The
action P at the end of the cantilever arises from the permanent
action of a wall.
qk P
gk

C
A B

Figure 2.15 Propped

pp cantilever beam and loading
For the purposes of this example, the permanent action P is considered
to be from a separate source than the self-weight of the structure so
both gG,sup and gG,inf need to be considered.
EC0:
Table A1.2 (A)
& NA
a) Equilibrium limit state (EQU) for maximum uplift at A
EC0:
gGk,sup P= 1.1P
0.0qk = 0 1.5qk 6.4.3.1 (4),
gGinf gk= 0.9gk Table A1.2 (A)
C
gGk,sup gk= 1.1gk & NA
A B

b) Ultimate limit state (ULS)

i) For maximum moment at B and anchorage of top reinforcement BA

gGk,sup gk= 1.35gk gQ qk= 1.5qk gGk,sup P= 1.35P EC0: Tables A1.1,
A1.2 (B) & NA
C
A B

Figure 2.17 ULS: maximum moment at B

Notes
gGk,inf gk = 1.0 gk may be critical in terms of curtailment of top bars BA.

31
ii) For maximum sagging moment AB

gQqk= 1.5qk gGk,sup P=

P 1.1P EC0:
gGk,sup gk= 1.35gk Table A1.1,
A1.2 (B) & NA
C
A B

Figure 2.18 ULS: maximum span

p moment AB
Notes
1 Depending on the magnitude of gk, qk length AB and BC, gGk,inf gk (= 1.0 gk) may be more
critical for span moment.
2 The magnitude of the load combination indicated are those for Exp. (6.10) of BS EN
1990. The worst case of Exp. (6.10a) and Exp. (6.10b) may also have been used.
3 Presuming supports A and B were columns then the critical load combination for Column
A would be as Figure 2.18. For column B the critical load combination might be either as
Figure 2.17 or 2.18.

c) Serviceability limit state (SLS) of deformation:

(quasi-permanent loads)
i) For maximum deformation at C

c2qk= 0.3*qk
1.0c
1.0gk 1.0P
EC0:
Tables A1.1,
C A1.2.2, A1.4 &
A B
*Assuming office area
NA

Figure 2.19 SLS: maximum deformation at C

ii) For maximum deformation AB

c2qk= 0.3*qk
1.0c
1.0P
1.0gk
C
A B
* Assuming office area

Figure 2.20 SLS: maximum deformation AB

Notes
Quasi-permanent load combinations may also be used for calculations of crack widths or
controlling cracking, i.e. the same load combinations as shown in Figures 2.19 and 2.20 may
be used to determine SLS moment to determine stress in reinforcement. The characteristic
and/or frequent combinations may be appropriate for other SLS limit states: for example, it
is recommended that the frequent combination is used to determine whether a member has
cracked or not.

32
Analysis, actions and load arrangements

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP-041

Overall stability Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

2.12.4 Overall stability (EQU)

For the frame shown in Figure 2.21, identify the various load
arrangements to check overall stability (EQU) against overturning.
Assume that the structure is an office block and that the loads qk2
and qk3 may be treated as arising from one source.
qk1
gk1

qk2
gk2

wk
qk3
gk3

A B

Figure 2.21 Frame configuration

a) EQU – Treating the floorr imposed load as the leading variable

action
Permanent action,
P
favourable
0.9gk1 on = gQkco qk1 = 1.05qk1
Accompanying variable actioon
Permanent action, unfavourabble = gGk,supgk1 = 1.1gk1
Permanent action,
P
favourable
Accompanying 0.9gk2 Lead variable action = gQk qk2
k2 = 1.5qk2
variable action Permanent action, unfavourabble = gGk,supgk2 = 1.1gk2
Permanent action,
P
= gQk co wk favourable
0.9gk3 Lead variable action = gQk qk3
= 1.5 x 0.5 x wk k3 = 1.5qk3
Permanent action, unfavourabble = gGk,supgk3 = 1.1gk3
= 0.75 wk

A B

Figure 2.22 Frame with floor variable action as leading variable action Tables 2.16
& 2.17

See Table 2.17 for values of c0

33
b) EQU – Treating the rooff imposed load as the leading variable
action

0.9gk1 1.5q k1
1.1gk1

0.9gk2 1.5 x 0.7 x q k2 = 1.05 q k2

1.1gk2 Tables 2.16
& 2.17
0.75 wk
0.9gk3 1.5 x 0.7 x q k3 = 1.05 q k3
1.1gk3

A B

Figure 2.23 Frame with roof variable action as leading variable actttion

c) EQU – Treating wind as the leading variable action

0.9gk1 1.5 x 0.7 x q k1 = 1.05 q k1

1.1gk1

0.9gk2 1.5 x 0.7 x q k2 = 1.05 q k2

1.1gk2 Tables 2.16
& 2.17
1.5 wk
0.9gk3 1.5 x 0.7 x q k3 = 1.05 q k3
1.1gk3

A B

Figure 2.24 Frame with wind as lead variable action

34
3: Slabs

3 Slabs
3.0 General
The calculations in this section are presented in the following sub-sections:
3.1 A simply supported one-way slab
3.2 A continuous one-way slab
3.3 A continuous ribbed slab
3.4 A bay of a flat slab
3.5 A stair flight.

These calculations are intended to show what might be deemed typical hand calculations. They
are illustrative of the Code and are not necessarily best practice. The first three sub-sections
include detailing checks e.g. curtailment lengths determined strictly in accordance with the
provisions of BS EN 1992–1–1. The flat slab calculation is supplemented by a commentary.

A general method of designing slabs is shown below.

■ Determine design life. EC0 & NA Table NA.2.1
■ Assess actions on the slab. EC1 & NA
■ Assess durability requirements and determine Table 4.1
concrete strength. BS 8500-1: Tables A4 & A5
■ Check cover requirements for appropriate fire EC2-1-2: Tables 5.8,
resistance period. 5.9, 5.10 & 5.11
■ Calculate minimum cover for durability, fire and Cl. 4.4.1
bond requirements.
■ Determine which combinations of actions apply. EC0 & NA Tables
NA.A1.1 & NA.A1.2 (B)
■ Determine loading arrangements. Cl. 5.1.3(1) & NA
■ Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear Cl. 5.4, 5.5, 5.6
forces.
■ Design flexural reinforcement. Cl. 6.1
■ Check deflection. Cl. 7.4
■ Check shear capacity. Cl. 6.2
■ Other design checks:
Check minimum reinforcement Cl. 9.3.1.1(1), 9.2.1.1(1)
Check cracking (size or spacing of bars) Cl. 7.3, Tables 7.2N & 7.3N
Check effects of partial fixity Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
Check secondary reinforcement. Cl. 9.3.1.1(2), 9.3.1.4(1)
■ Check curtailment. Cl. 9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.3, Fig. 9.2
■ Check anchorage. Cl. 9.3.1.2, 8.4.4, 9.3.1.1(4)
Cl. 9.2.1.5(1), 9.2.1.5(2)
■ Check laps. Cl. 8.7.3

35
3.1 Simply supported one-way slab
This calculation is intended to show a typical basic hand calculation.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Simply supported one-way slab Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

A 175 mm thick slab is required to support screed, finishes, an

office variable action of 2.5 kN/m2 and demountable partitions
(@ 2 kN/m). The slab is supported on load-bearing block walls.
fck = 30 MPa, fyk = 500 MPa. Assume a 50-year design life and a
requirement for 1 hour resistance to fire.
qk = 3.3 kN/m2
gk = 5.9 kN/m2

4800

Figure 3.1 Simply

p supported
pp one-way slab

3.1.1 Actions
kN/m2
Permanent:
Self-weight 0.175 × 25 = 4.4 EC1-1-1: Table A1
50 mm screed = 1.0
Finishes, services = 0.5
Total gk = 5.9
Variable:
Offices, general use B1 = 2.5 EC1-1-1: Tables
Movable partitions @ 2.0 kN/m = 0.8 6.1, 6.2 & NA
Total qk = 3.3 EC1-1-1: 6.3.12(8)
3.1.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom: Exp. (4.1)
cnom = cmin + Dcdev
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur]
where Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond = diameter of bar
Assume 12 mm main bars.
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions Table 4.1.
Assuming XCI and using C30/37 concrete, BS 8500-1:
cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4.
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
Assuming no measurement of cover,
Dcdev = 10 mm
∴ cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm

36
3.1: Simply supported one-way slab

Fire:
Check adequacy of section for 1 hour fire resistance (i.e. REI 60). EC2-1-2:
Thickness, hs,min = 80 mm cf. 175 mm proposed ∴ OK 4.1(1), 5.1(1)
Axis distance, amin = 20 mm cf. 25 + f/2 = 31 i.e. not critical ∴ OK & Table 5.8
∴ choose cnom = 25 mm

3.1.3 Load combination (and arrangement)

Ultimate load, n:
By inspection, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs Fig. 2.5
∴ n = 1.25 × 5.9 + 1.5 × 3.3 = 12.3 kN/m2 ECO:
Exp. (6.10b)
3.1.4 Analysis
Design moment:
MEd = 12.3 × 4.82/8 = 35.4 kNm
Shear force:
V = 12.3 × 4.8/2 = 29.5 kN/m

3.1.5 Flexural design

Effective depth:
d = 175 − 25 − 12/2 = 144 mm
Flexure in span:
K = MEd/bd2fck = 35.4 × 106/(1000 × 1442 × 30) = 0.057 Fig. 3.5
z/d = 0.95 Appendix A1
z = 0.95 × 144 = 137 mm Table C5
As = MEd/fydz = 35.4 × 106/(137 × 500/1.15) = 594 mm2/m
(r = 0.41%)
Try H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2/m)

3.1.6 Deflection
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Basic span-to-effective-depth ratio for r = 0.41% = 20 Table 7.4N & NA
As,prov/As,req = 645/599 = 1.08 Exp. (7.17)
Max. span = 20 × 1.08 × 144 = 3110 mm i.e. < 4800 mm ∴ no good
Consider in more detail:
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
where Cl. 7.4.2,
N = 25.6 (r = 0.41%, fck = 30 MPa) Appendix C7,
K = 1.0 (simply supported) Tables C10-C13
F1 = 1.0 (beff/bw = 1.0)
F2 = 1.0 (span < 7.0 m)
F3 = 310/ ss ≤ 1.5

37
where‡
ss = ssu (As,reqq/As,prov) 1/d Cl. 7.4.2, Exp. (7.17)
where Table 7.4N, & NA
ssu ≈ 242 MPa (From Figure C3 and Table NA.5:
gk/qk = 1.79, c2 = 0.3, gG = 1.25) Note 5
d = redistribution ratio = 1.0 Figure C3
∴ ss ≈ 242 × 594/645 = 222
∴ F3 = 310/222 = 1.40 ≤ 1.5 Figure C3

∴ Allowable l/
l d = 25.6 × 1.40 = 35.8
Actual l/
l d = 4800/144 = 33.3 ∴ OK
Use H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2/m)

3.1.7 Shear
By inspection, OK
However, if considered critical:
V = 29.5 kN/m as before Cl. 6.2.1(8)
VEd = 29.5 – 0.14 × 12.3 = 27.8 kN/m
vEd = 27.8 × 103/144 × 103 = 0.19 MPa Cl. 6.2.2(1);
vRd,c = 0.53 MPa Table C6
∴ No shear reinforcement required
q

3.1.8 Summary of design

H12 @ 175
Figure 3.2 Simply
p supported
pp slab: summary

3.1.9 Detailing checks

It is presumed that the detailer would take the design summarised
above and detail the slab to normal best practice, e.g. to SMDSC[9]
or to How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 2,[8] Chapter
10, Detailing. This would usually include dimensioning and detailing
curtailment, laps, U-bars and also undertaking the other checks detailed
below. See also 3.2.10 detailing checks for a continuous one-way slab.

a) Minimum areas
Minimum area of reinforcement:
As,min = 0.26 (ffctm/ffyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
where
bt = width of tension zone Table 3.1
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666

‡ See Appendix B1.5

38
3.1: Simply supported one-waySlabs
slab

As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 144/500 = 216 mm2/m

r = 0.15%)
(r
∴ H12 @ 175 B1 OK

Crack control:
OK by inspection. Table 7.2N & NA
Maximum spacing of bars:
< 3h < 400 mm OK Cl. 9.3.1.1.(3)

Secondary reinforcement:
20% As,reqq = 0.2 × 645 = 129 mm2/m
Use H10 @ 350 (224) B2
Cl. 9.3.1.1.(2)
Edges: effects of assuming partial fixity along edge
Top steel required = 0.25 × 594 = 149 mm2/m
Use H10 @ 350 (224) T2 B2 as U-bars Cl. 9.3.1.2.(2)
extending 960 mm into slab§

b) Curtailment
Curtailment main bars:
Curtail main bars 50 mm from or at face of support. SMDSC[9]:
Fig. 6.4;
How to[8]:
Detailing
At supports:
50% of As to be anchored from face of support. Cl. 9.3.1.2.(1)
Use H12 @ 350 B1 T1 U-bars

In accordance with SMDSC[9] detail MS3 lap U-bars 500 mm with

main steel, curtail T1 leg of U-bar 0.1ll (= say 500 mm) from face
of support.

§A free unsupported edge is required to use ‘longitudinal and transverse Cl. 9.3.1.4.(1)
reinforcement’ generally using U-bars with legs at least 2h long. For slabs
150 mm deep or greater, SMDSC[9] standard detail recommends U-bars lapping
500 mm with bottom steel and extending 0.1ll top into span.

39
3.2 Continuous one-way solid slab
This calculation is intended to show in detail the provisions of designing a slab to Eurocode 2
using essentially the same slab as used in Example 3.1.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Continuous one-way solid slab Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

A 175 mm thick continuous slab is required to support screed, finishes,

an office variable action of 2.5 kN/m2 and demountable partitions
(@ 2 kN/m). The slab is supported on 200 mm wide load-bearing block
walls at 6000 mm centres. fck = 30, fyk = 500 and the design life is
50 years. A fire resistance of 1 hour is required.

qk = 3.3 kN/m2
gk = 5.9 kN/m2

200 5800 200 5800

Figure 3.3 Continuous solid slab

3.2.1 Actions
kN/m2
Permanent:
As Section 3.1.1 gk = 5.9

Variable:
As Section 3.1.1 qk = 3.3 EC1-1-1:
6.3.1.2(8)
3.2.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom:
As Section 3.1.2 cnom = 25 mm

3.2.3 Load combination (and arrangement)

Ultimate action (load):
As Section 3.1.3, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs Fig. 2.5
EC0:
∴ n = 1.25 × 5.9 + 1.5 × 3.3 = 12.3 kN/m2
Exp. (6.10b)
3.2.4 Analysis
Clear span, ln = 5800 mm
a1 = min[h/2; t/2] = min[175/2; 200/2] = 87.5 mm Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)
a2 = min[h/2; t/2] = min[175/2; 200/2] = 87.5 mm
leff = 5975 mm

40
3.2: Continuous one-way solidSlabs
slab

Bending moment:
End span MEd = 0.086 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 37.8 kNm/m Cl. 5.1.1(7)
1st internal support MEd = 0.086 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 37.8 kNm/m Table C2

Internal spans MEd = 0.063 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 27.7 kNm/m

and supports

Shear:
End support VEd = 0.40 × 12.3 × 5.975 = 29.4 kN/m
1st interior support VEd = 0.60 × 12.3 × 5.975 = 44.1 kN/m

3.2.5 Flexural design: span

a) End span (and 1st internal support)
Effective depth, d:
d = h − cnom − f/2
= 175 − 25 − 12/2 = 144 mm
Relative flexural stress, K:
K = MEd/bd2fck = 37.8 × 106/1000 × 1442 × 30 = 0.061
K' = 0.207 Appendix A1
or restricting x/d to 0.45
K' = 0.168
∴ by inspection, section is under-reinforced
(i.e. no compression reinforcement required).
Lever arm, z:
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d‡ Fig. 3.5
= (144/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.061)0.5] = 0.945d = 136 mm Appendix A1
Area of steel, As:
As = MEd/fydz
= 37.8 × 106/(500/1.15 × 136) = 639 mm2/m
(r = 0.44%)
Try H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2/m)
b) Internal spans and supports
Lever arm, z:
By inspection, z = 0.95d = 0.95 × 144 = 137 mm Fig. 3.5
Appendix A1
Area of steel, As:
As = MEd/fydz
= 27.7 × 106/(500/1.15 × 137) = 465 mm2/m
(r = 0.32%)
Try H12 @ 225 B1 (502 mm2/m)

‡ Designers may choose to use another form of this equation:

z/d = 0.5 + (0.25 − 0.882K)0.5 ≤ 0.95

41
3.2.6 Deflection: end span
Check end span-to-effective-depth ratio.
Allowable l/d
d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix B
where
N = basic effective depth to span ratio:
r = 0.44%
r0 = fck0.5 × 10−3 = 0.55% ∴ use Exp. (7.16a) Cl. 7.4.2(2)
N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5
r0/rr+ 3.2fck0.5
r−
(r0/r 1)1.5 Exp. (7.16a)
= 11 + 1.5 × 300.5 × 0.55/0.44 + 3.2 × 300.5 (0.55/0.44 – 1)1.5
= 11.0 + 10.3 + 2.2 = 23.5
K = structural system factor Cl. 7.4.2
= 1.3 (end span of continuous slab)
F1 = flanged section factor Cl. 7.4.2
= 1.0 (befff/bw = 1.0)
F2 = factor for long spans associated with brittle partitions Cl. 7.4.2
= 1.0 (span < 7.0 m)
F3 = 310/ ss ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp. (7.17)
Table 7.4N & NA,
Table NA.5:
Note 5
where‡
ss = (ffyk/ gS) (As,reqq/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads (1/d) Exp. (7.17)
= fyd × (As,reqq/As,prov) × (gk + c2 qk)/(g
gGgk + gQqk) (1/d) EC0: A1.2.2
Table C14
= (500/1.15) × (639/645) × [(5.9 + 0.3 × 3.3)/12.3] × 1.08§
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.56 × 1.08 = 260 MPa
F3 = 310/260 = 1.19
Note: As,prov/As,req ≤ 1.50 Table 7.4N & NA,
Table NA.5:
Note 5
Allowable l/d
d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
= 23.5 × 1.3 × 1.0 × 1.19
= 36.4
Max. span = 36.4 × 144 = 5675 mm, i.e. < 5795 mm ∴ No good
Try increasing reinforcement to H12 @ 150 B1 (754 mm2/m)

ss = 434.8 × 639/754 × 0.56 × 1.08 = 223

F3 = 310/223 = 1.39
Allowable l/d
d = 23.5 × 1.3 × 1.0 × 1.39
= 42.5
‡ See Appendix B1.5
§ The use of Table C3 implies certain amounts of redistribution, which are defined in
Table C14.

42
3.2: Continuous one-way solidSlabs
slab

Max. span = 42.5 × 144 = 6120 mm, i.e. > 5795 mm OK

∴ H12 @ 150 B1 (754 mm /m) OK
2

3.2.7 Deflection: internal span

Check internal span-to-effective-depth ratio.
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
where
N = basic effective depth to span ratio:
r = 0.32%
r0 = fck0.5 × 10−3 = 0.55% ∴ use Exp. (7.16a) Cl. 7.4.2(2)
N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5
r0/rr+ 3.2fck0.5 r−
(r0/r 1)1.5 Exp. (7.16a)
= 11 + 1.5 × 300.5× 0.55/0.32 + 3.2 × 300.5 (0.55/0.32 – 1)1.5
= 11.0 + 14.1 + 10.7 = 35.8
K = structural system factor
= 1.5 (interior span of continuous slab) Cl. 7.4.2
F1 = flanged section factor
= 1.0 (befff/bw = 1.0) Cl. 7.4.2
F2 = factor for long spans associated with brittle partitions
= 1.0 (span < 7.0 m) Cl. 7.4.2
F3 = 310/ ss ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp.
(7.17), Table 7.4N
& NA, Table NA.5
Note 5.
where
ss = fyd × (As,reqq/As,prov) × (gk + c2 qk)/(g
gGgk + gQqk) (1/d) Exp. (7.17)
= (500/1.15) × (465/502) × [(5.9 + 0.3 × 3.3)/12.3] × 1.03 EC0: A1.2.2
= 434.8 × 0.93 × 0.56 × 1.03 = 233 MPa Table C14

F3 = 310/233 = 1.33
Allowable l/d
d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
= 35.8 × 1.5 × 1.0 × 1.33
= 71.4
Max. span = 71.4 × 144 = 10280 mm i.e. > 5795 mm OK
Use H12 @ 225 B1 (502 mm2/m) in internal spans
p
3.2.8 Shear
Design shear force, VEd:
At d from face of end support,
VEd= 29.4 – (0.144 + 0.0875) × 12.3 = 26.6 kN/m Cl. 6.2.1(8)
At d from face of 1st interior support,
VEd = 44.1 − (0.144 + 0.0875) × 12.3 = 41.3 kN/m

Shear resistance, VRd,c:

VRd,c = (0.18/ gC)k(100 rl fck)0.333 bwd ≥ 0.0035kk1.5fck0.5bwd Cl. 6.2.2(1)

43
where
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2.0 as d < 200 mm
k = 2.0
rl = Asl/bd
Assuming 50% curtailment (at end support)
= 50% × 754/(144 × 1000) = 0.26%
VRd,c = (0.18/1.5) × 2.0 × (100 × 0.26/100 × 30)0.33 × 1000 × 144
= 0.12 × 2 × 1.97 × 1000 × 144
= 0.47 × 1000 × 144 = 68.1 kN/m
But VRd,cmin = 0.035k1.5fck0.5 bwd
where
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2.0; as before k = 2.0
VRd,cmin = 0.035 × 21.5 × 300.5 × 1000 × 144
= 0.54 × 1000 × 144 = 77.6 kN/m
∴ VRd,c = 77.6 kN/m
∴ OK, no shear reinforcement required at end or 1st internal
supports
∴ H12 @ 150 B1 & H12 @ 175 T1 OK

By inspection, shear at other internal supports OK.

3.2.9 Summary of design

H12 @ 175
fck = 30 MPa
P
cnom = 25 mm
H12 @ 150 H12 @ 225

Figure 3.4 Continuous solid slab: design summary

Commentary
It is usually presumed that the detailer would take the design
summarised above together with the general arrangement illustrated
in Figure 3.3 and detail the slab to normal best practice. The
detailer’s responsibilities, standards and timescales should be clearly
defined but it would be usual for the detailer to draw and schedule
not only the designed reinforcement but all the reinforcement
required to provide a compliant and buildable solution. The work
would usually include checking the following aspects and providing
appropriate detailing :
• Minimum areas
• Curtailment lengths
• Anchorages

44
3.2: Continuous one-way solidSlabs
slab

• Laps
• U-bars
• Rationalisation
• Critical dimensions
• Details and sections

The determination of minimum reinforcement areas, curtailment

lengths, anchorages and laps using the principles in Eurocode 2 is
shown in detail in the following calculations. In practice these would
be determined from published tables of data or by using reference
texts[8, 9]. Nonetheless the designer should check the drawing
for design intent and compliance with standards. It is therefore
necessary for the designer to understand and agree the principles
of the detailing used.

3.2.10 Detailing checks

a) Minimum areas

Minimum area of longitudinal tension (flexural) reinforcement

As,min = 0.26(ffctm/ffyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
where
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.667 Table 3.1
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.6677 × 1000 × 144/500 = 216 mm2/m
r = 0.15%)
(r
∴ H12 @ 225 B1 OK
Secondary (transverse reinforcement)
Minimum 20% As,req Cl. 9.3.1.1(2)
20% As,reqq = 0.2 × 502 = 100 mm2/m
Consider As,min to apply as before. SMDSC[9]
As,min = 216 mm2/m
Try H10 @ 350 B2 (224 mm2/m)
Check edge.
Assuming partial fixity exists at edges, 25% of As is required Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span.

As,reqq = 25% × 639 = 160 mm2/m

As,min as before = 216 mm2/m Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
∴ Use H10 @ 350 (224 mm2/m) U-bars at edges

45
Curtail 0.2 × 5975 = 1195 mm, say 1200 mm measured from face Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
of support‡.

Maximum spacing of bars

Maximum spacing of bars < 3h < 400 mm OK Cl. 9.3.1.1.(3)
Crack control
As slab < 200 mm, measures to control cracking are unnecessary. Cl. 7.3.3(1)
However, as a check on end span: Cl. 7.3.3(2),
Loading is the main cause of cracking, 7.3.1.5
∴ use Table 7.2N or Table 7.3N for wmax = 0.4 mm and ss = 241 MPa
(see deflection check).
Max. bar size = 20 mm Table 7.2N &
or max. spacing = 250 mm interpolation,
∴ H12 @ 150 B1 OK. Table 7.3N &
interpolation
End supports: effects of partial fixity
Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is required Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span.
As,reqq = 15% × 639 = 96 mm2/m
But, As,min as before = 216 mm2/m
(rr = 0.15%) Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
One option would be to use bob bars, but choose to use U-bars
Try H12 @ 450 (251 mm2/m) U-bars at supports
pp
Curtail 0.2 × 5975 = say, 1200 mm measured from face of support.‡ Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
b) Curtailment
i) End span, bottom reinforcement
Assuming end support to be simply supported, 50% of As should
Cl. 9.3.1.2(1)
extend into the support.
50% × 639 = 320 mm2/m
Try H12 @ 300 (376 mm2/m) at supports
pp
In theory, 50% curtailment of reinforcement may take place al from Cl. 9.3.1.2(1)
where the moment of resistance of the section with the remaining Note, 9.2.1.3 (2)
50% would be adequate to resist the applied bending moment. In
practice, it is usual to determine the curtailment distance as being
al from where MEd = MEd,max/2.

‡DetailMS2 of SMDSC[9], suggests 50% of T1 legs of U-bars should extend 0.3l

(= say 1800 mm) from face of support by placing U-bars alternately reversed.

46
3.2: Continuous one-way solid slab

A B

a) Load arrangement
r

A B
X

MEd,max

MEdx = RAX – nXX 2/2

b) Bending moment MEdx

A B
lbd
987 MEdx /z

633 lbd TTensile force

in reinforcement, Fs
TTensile resistance of reinforcement

c) TTensile force in bottom reinforcement

50%
50%
A
B
987
633 (say 500)
(say 850)

d) Curtailment of bottom reinforcement

Figure 3.5 Curtailment of bottom reinforcement: actions, bending

moments, forces in reinforcement and curtailment

Thus, for a single simply supported span supporting a UDL of n,

MEd,max = 0.086nl 2; RA = 0.4nl
At distance, XX, from end support, moment,
MEd@XX = RAX – nX 2/2
∴ when M@XX = MEd,max/2:
0.086nl 2/2 = 0.4nlXX – nX 2/2

47
Assuming X = xl
0.043nl2 = 0.4nlxll – nxx2l2/2
0.043 = 0.4xx – x2/2
0 = 0.043 – 0.4xx + x2/2
x = 0.128 or 0.672, say 0.13 and 0.66
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.13 x span
0.13 × 5975 = 777 mm
Shift rule: for slabs, al may be taken as d (= 144 mm), Cl. 9.2.1.3(2),
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at 777 – 144 6.2.2(5)
= 633 mm from centreline of support.
Say 500 mm from face of support
pp A
∴ in end span at 1st internal support 50% moment occurs at 0.66
× span
0.66 × 5975 = 3944 mm

Shift rule: for slabs al may be taken as d (= 144 mm), Cl. 9.2.1.3(2),
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at 3944 + 144 6.2.2(5)
= 4088 mm from support A
or 5975 – 4088 = 987 mm from centreline of support B.
Say 850 mm from face of support
pp B
ii) 1st interior support, top reinforcement Cl. 9.3.1.2(1)
Presuming 50% curtailment of reinforcement is required this may Note, 9.2.1.3(2)
take place al from where the moment of resistance of the section
with the remaining 50% would be adequate. However, it is usual to
determine the curtailment distance as being al from where MEd =
MEd,max/2.
Thus, for the 1st interior support supporting a UDL of n,
MEd,maxTT = 0.086nl 2; RB = 0.6nl
At distance Y from end support, moment,
MEd@Y Y = MEd,maxTT – RAY + nY 2/2
∴ when M@Y Y = MEd,maxT /2
0.086nl 2/2 = 0.086nl 2 – 0.6nlY Y + nY 2/2
Assuming Y = yl
0.043nl 2 = 0.086nl 2 – 0.6nlyll + ny 2l 2/2
0 = 0.043 − 0.6yy + y 2/2
y = 0.077 (or 1.122), say 0.08
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.08 × span
0.08 × 5975 = 478 mm
Shift rule: for slabs, al may be taken as d 144 mm Cl. 9.2.1.3(2),
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at 478 + 144 6.2.2(5)
= 622 mm from centreline of support.
50% of reinforcement may be curtailed at, say,
600 mm from either face of support
pp B

48
3.2: Continuous one-way solid slab

100% curtailment may take place al from where there is no hogging

moment. Thus,
when M@Y = MEd,maxT/2
0 = 0.086nl2 – 0.6nlY + nY2/2

Assuming Y = yl
0 = 0.086 – 0.6y + y2/2
y = 0.166 (or 1.034), say 0.17
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.17 × span
0.17 × 5975 = 1016 mm
Shift rule: for slabs, al may be taken as d
∴ curtail to 100% of required reinforcement at 1016 + 144
= 1160 mm from centreline of support.
100% of reinforcement may be curtailed at, say,
1100 mm from either face of support B.
iii) Support B bottom steel at support
At the support 25% of span steel required Cl. 9.3.1.1(4),
9.2.1.5(1),
9.2.1.4(1)
0.25 × 639 = 160 mm2
As,min as before = 216 mm2/m Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
For convenience use H12 @ 300 B1 (376 mm2/m)

c) Anchorage at end support

As simply supported, 50% of As should extend into the support. Cl. 9.2.1.2(1) &
This 50% of As should be anchored to resist a force of Note, 9.2.1.4(2)
FE = VEd × al/z Exp. (9.3)
where
VEd = the absolute value of the shear force
al = d, where the slab is not reinforced for shear Cl. 9.2.1.3(2)
z = lever arm of internal forces
FE = 29.4 × d/0.95‡ d = 30.9 kN/m
Anchorage length, lbd: Cl. 8.4.4
lbd = alb,rqd ≥ lb,min Exp. (8.4)
where
a = conservatively 1.0
lb,rqd = basic anchorage length required
= (f/4) (ssd/fbd) Exp. (8.3)
where
f = diameter of the bar = 12 mm
ssd = design stress in the bar at the ultimate limit state
= FE/As,prov
= 30.9 × 1000/376 = 81.5 MPa

‡ Maximum z = 0.947 at mid-span and greater towards support.

49
fbd = ultimate bond stress
= 2.25 n1 n2 fct,d Cl. 8.4.2(2)
where
n1 = 1.0 for ‘good’ bond conditions and 0.7 for all other
conditions = 1.0
n2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm
fct,d = design tensile strength Cl. 3.1.6(2) &
= act fct,k/ gC. For fck = 30 MPa NA, Tables 3.1
= 1.0 × 2.0/1.5 = 1.33 MPa & 2.1N
∴fbd = 2.25 × 1.33 = 3.0 MPa
lb,rqd = (12/4) (81.5/1.33) = 183 mm
lb,min = max(10d, 100 mm) = 120 mm Exp. (8.6)
lbd = 183 mm measured from face of support Fig. 9.3
By inspection, using U-bars, OK
d) Laps
Lap H12 @ 300 U-bars with H12 @ 150 straights.
Tension lap, l0 = a1 a2 a3 a5 a6 lb,rqd a l0min Exp. (8.10)
where
a1 = 1.0 (straight bars) Table 8.2
a2 = 1 − 0.15 (cd − f)/f
where
cd = min(pitch, side cover or cover) Fig. 8.4
= 25 mm
f = bar diameter
= 12 mm
a2 = 0.84 Table 8.2
a3 = 1.0 (no confinement by reinforcement)
a5 = 1.0 (no confinement by pressure)
a6 = 1.5 Table 8.3
lb,rqd = (f/4) ssd/fbd Exp. (8.3)
where
ssd = the design stress at ULS at the position from
where the anchorage is measured.
Assuming lap starts 500 mm from face of
support (587.5 mm from centreline of support):
MEd = 29.5 × 0.59 − 12.3 × 0.592/2
= 15.2 kNm
ssd = MEd /(Asz)
= 15.2 × 106/(376 × 144/0.95) = 267 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress Cl. 8.4.2(2)
= 2.25 n1 n2 fct,d

50
3.2: Continuous one-way solid slab

where
n1 = 1.0 for ‘good’ conditions
n2 = 1.0 for f < 32 mm
fct,d = act fct,k/gC

where
act = 1.0 Cl. 3.1.6 (2) & NA
fct,k = 2.0 Table 3.1
gC = 1.5 Table 2.1N & NA
∴fbd = 2.25 × 2.0/1.5 = 3.0 MPa
lb,rqd = (f/4) ssd/fbd
= (12/4) × (267/3) = 267 mm
l0min b = max[0.3 a6 lb,rqd; 15f/ 200 mm] Exp. 8.6
= max[0.3 × 1.5 × 229; 15 × 12; 200]
= max[124; 180; 200] = 200 mm
∴ l0 = a1 a2 a3 a5 a6 lb,rqd ≥ l0min
= 1.0 × 0.84 × 1.0 × 1.0 × 1.5 × 329 ≥ 200 = 414 mm
But good practice suggests minimum lap of max[tension lap; 500]
∴ lap with bottom reinforcement = 500 mm starting 500 from SMDSC[9]: MS2
face of support.

3.2.11 Summary of reinforcement details

A

200
1200 500 600 600 500
H12 U-bars @ 300 H12 @ 175 T1

H12 @ 150 H12 @ 300 H12 @ 225

200 500 500 500 350 350 500
200
A

Figure 3.6 Continuous solid slab: reinforcement details

1200

500 H10 @ 350 B2

Figure 3.7 Section A–A showing reinforcement details at edge

51
3.3 Continuous ribbed slab
Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041
Continuous ribbed slab Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

This continuous 300 mm deep ribbed slab has spans of 7.5 m,

9.0 m and 7.5 m and is required for an office to support a variable
action of 5 kN/m2. It is supported on wide beams that are the same
depth as the slab designed in Section 4.3. One hour fire resistance
is required: internal environment. The ribs are 150 mm wide @ 900
mm centres. Links are required in span to facilitate prefabrication of
reinforcement. Assume that partitions are liable to be damaged by
excessive deflections. In order to reduce deformations yet maintain a
shallow profile use fck = 35 MPa and fyk = 500 MPa.

gk = 4.17 kN/m2
gk = 4.3 kN/m2
qk = 5.0 kN/m2

A B C D
7500 9000 7500
550 1000 1000 1000 1000 550

Notes on ribbed slab design

There are various established methods for analysing ribbed slabs and dealing
with the solid areas:
• Using UDLs simplifies the analysis and remains popular. One method is
to ignore the weight of the solid part of the slab in the analysis of the
ribbed slab. (The weight of the solid area is then added to the loads on the
supporting beam). This ignores the minor effect the solid areas have on
bending in the ribbed slab.
• Alternatively the weight of the solid part of the slab is spread as a UDL
over the whole span. This is conservative both in terms of moment and
shears at solid/shear interfaces but underestimates hogging in internal
spans.
• The advent of computer analysis has made analysis using patch loads
more viable and the resulting analysis more accurate.
• The ribbed part of the slab may be designed to span between solid areas.
(The ribs span d/2 into the solid areas, which are assumed to act as
beams in the orthogonal direction.) However, having to accommodate
torsions induced in supporting beams and columns usually makes it simpler
to design from centreline of support to centreline of support.
• Analysis programs can cope with the change of section and therefore
change of stiffness along the length of the slab. Moments would be
attracted to the stiffer, solid parts at supports. However, the difference in
stiffness between the ribbed and the solid parts is generally ignored.

52
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

In line with good practice analysis, this example is carried out using
centreline of support to centreline of support and patch loads‡.
Constant stiffness along the length of the slab has been assumed.

CL CL

A
100

300

A
200 550 1000 200

Figure 3.9 Long section through slab

150 750 150

Figure 3.10 Section A–A: section through ribbed slab

3.3.1 Actions
Permanent: UDL kN/m2
Self-weight: kN/m2
Rib 0.15 × 0.2 × 25/0.9 = 0.833
Slope 2 × (1/2) × 0.2/10 × 0.2 × 25/0.9 = 0.112
Slab 0.1 × 2.5 = 2.500
Cross rib 0.19 × 0.71 × 0.2 × 25/(0.9 × 7.5) = 0.100
Total self-weight = 3.545 ≈ 3.55
Ceiling = 0.15
Services = 0.30
Raised floor = 0.30
Total permanent actions gk = 4.30

‡ In this case, assuming the patch load analysis is accurate, taking the weight
of solid area to be spread over the whole span would overestimate span and
support moments by 6–8% and shears at the solid/rib interface by 8–9%.
Ignoring the weight of the solid area in the analysis of this ribbed slab would
lead to underestimates of span moments by 1%, support moments by 3% and
no difference in the estimation of shear at the solid shear interface. The latter
may be the preferred option.

53
Permanent: patch load
Extra over solid in beam area as patch load
(0.2 × 25 – 0.833) = 4.167 gk ≈ 4.17
Variable
Imposed = 4.00*
Allowance for partitions = 1.00*
Total variable action gk = 5.00

3.3.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom:
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max(cmin,b ; cmin,dur)
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= diameter of bar.
Assume 20 mm main bars and 8 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming XC1 and C30/37 concrete, cmin,durr = 15 mm Table 4.1.
BS 8500-1:
Table A4
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Dcdev = 10 mm Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
∴ cnom = 20 + 10 to main bars or
= 15 + 10 to links ∴ critical
Fire: EC2-1-2: 5.7.5(1)
Check adequacy of section for REI 60.
Minimum slab thickness, hs = 80 mm OK EC2-1-2: Table 5.8
Axis distance required
Minimum rib width bmin = 120 mm with a = 25 mm EC2-1-2: Table 5.6
or bmin = 200 mm with a = 12 mm
∴ at 150 mm wide (min.) a = 20 mm
By inspection, not critical.
Use 25 mm nominal cover to links

3.3.3 Load combination and arrangement

Ultimate load, n:
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical Fig. 2.5
nslab = 1.25 × 4.30 + 1.5 × 5.0 = 13.38 kN/m2 EC0: Exp. (6.10b)
nsolid areas = 1.25 × (4.30 + 4.17) + 1.5 × 5.0 = 18.59 kN/m2

*Client requirements. See also BS EN 1991–1–1, Tables 6.1, 6.2, Cl. 6.3.2.1(8) & NA.

54
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

Arrangement:
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded. Cl. 5.1.3(1) & NA
option b
3.3.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer, includes 15% redistribution at support and EC0: A1.2.2
none in the span.§ & NA, 5.3.1 (6)

90.7 kNm/m 90.7 kNm/m

100

80
60
40
20
0
–20 A B C D

–40
–60
–80 – 65.3 kNm/m – 61.1 kNm/m – 65.3 kNm/m
a) Elastic moments

100
77.1 kNm/m 77.1 kNm/m
80
60
40
20
0

–20 A B C D

–40
–60
–80 –61.7 kNm/m –55.9 kNm/m –61.7 kNm/m

b) Redistributed envelope

Figure 3.11 Bending moment diagrams

§ Note 1: A ribbed slab need not be treated as discrete elements provided

rib spacing ≤ 1500 mm, depth of the rib ≤ 4 × its width, the flange is > 0.1 ×
distance between ribs and transverse ribs are provided at a clear spacing not
exceeding 10 × overall depth of the slab.
Note 2: As 7.5 m < 85% of 9.0 m, coefficients presented in Concise Eurocode 2[5]
are not applicable.

55
80
42.5 kN/m 63.2 kN/m 63.5 kN/m

40

0
A B C D
– 40

– 80 – 63.5 kN/m – 63.2 kN/m – 42.5 kN/m

Figure 3.12 Redistributed shears, kN/m

At solid/rib interface:
AB @ 550 mm from A
MEd (sagging) = 20.4 kNm/m ≡ 18.3 kNm/rib
VEd = 32.5 kN/m ≡ 29.3 kN/rib

BA @1000 mm from B
MEd (hogging) = 47.1 kNm/m ≡ 42.4 kNm/rib
VEd = 45.4 kN/m ≡ 40.9 kN/rib
BC @ 1000 mm from B
MEd (hogging) = 43.0 kNm/m ≡ 38.7 kNm/rib
VEd = 45.1 kN/m ≡ 40.6 kN/rib
Symmetrical about centreline of BC.

3.3.5 Flexural design, span A–B

a) Span A–B: Flexure
MEd = 61.7 kNm/m
= 55.5 kNm/rib
K = MEd/bd 2fck
where
b = 900 mm
d = 300 − 25 – 8 – 20/2 = 257
assuming 8 mm link at H20 in span
fck = 35 MPa
∴K = 55.5 × 106/(900 × 2572 × 35) = 0.027
K' = 0.207 Appendix A1
or restricting x/d to 0.45
K' = 0.168
K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required.

56
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1

= (257/2) (1 + 0.951) ≤ 0.95 × 257
= 251 ≤ 244 ∴ z = 244 mm
But z = d – 0.4x Appendix A1
∴ x = 2.5(d − z) = 2.5(257 − 244) = 33 mm
∴ By inspection, neutral axis is in flange
As = MEd/fydz
where
fyd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 55.5 × 106/(434.8 × 244) = 523 mm2/rib
Try 2 no. H20/rib (628 mm2/rib)
b) Span A–B: Deflection
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7
where
N = Basic l/d: check whether r > r0 and whether to use Cl. 7.4.2(2)
Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b)
r0 = fck0.5/1000 = 350.5/1000 = 0.59%
r = As/Ac‡ = As,req/[bwd + (beff – bw)hf] PD 6687[6]
where
bw = min. width between tension and compression
chords. At bottom assuming 1/10 slope to rib:
= 150 + 2 × (25 + 8 + 20/2)/10
= 159 mm
r = 523/(159 ( 257 + (900 − 159) × 100)
= 523/114963
= 0.45%
r < r0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16a)

N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5r /r0 + 3.2fck0.5(r /r0 – 1)1.5] Exp. (7.16a)

= 11 + 1.5 × 350.5
× 0.055/0.045 + 3.2 × 350.5
(0.055/0.045 – 1)1.5
= [11 + 10.8 + 2.0] = 22.8
K = (end span) 1.3 Table 7.4N &
NA, Table NA.5:
Note 5
F1 = (beff /bw = 5.66) 0.8
F2 = 7.0/leff = 7.0/7.5 = (span > 7.0 m) 0.93 Cl. 7.4.2(2)
F3 = 310/ ss ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp. (7.17)
& NA; Table NA.5

‡ Section 2.18 of PD 6687 [6] suggests that r in T-beams should be based on

the area of concrete above the centroid of the tension steel.

57
where‡
ss = (fyk/gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d)
= 434.8(523/628) [ (4.30 + 0.3 × 5.0)/13.38]
(65.3/61.7§)
= 434.8 × 0.83 × 0.43 × 1.06
= 164 MPa
F3 = 310/ss
= 310/164 = 1.89# but ≤ 1.5, therefore say 1.50
∴ Permissible l/d = 22.8 × 1.3 × 0.8 × 0.93 × 1.50 = 33.0
Actual l/d = 7500/257 = 29.2 ∴ OK
Use 2 no. H20/rib (628 mm2/rib)

c) Support A (and D): flexure (sagging) at solid/rib interface

Reinforcement at solid/rib interface needs to be designed for both
moment and for additional tensile force due to shear (shift rule) Cl. 9.2.1.3.(2)
MEd,max = 18.3 kNm/rib
VEd,max = 29.3 kNm/rib
At solid/rib interface
As = MEd/fydz + DFtd /fyd Cl. 9.2.1.3.(2),
Fig. 9.2
where
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d
where
K = MEd/bd2fck
where
b = 900 mm
d = 300 − 25 – 8 – 25 − 20/2 = 232
assuming 8 mm links and H25B in edge beam
fck = 30
= 18.3 × 106/(900 × 2322 × 35) = 0.011

‡ See Appendix B1.5

§ In analysis, 15% redistribution of support moments led to redistribution of span
moments:
d = 61.7/65.3 = 0.94.
# Both As,prov/As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or Exp.
(7.16b) is restricted to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA. Therefore, 310/
ss is restricted to 1.5.

58
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

25 cover
12 fabric
8 link
16 bar

16 bar
20 bar 25 bar
8 link 8 link
25 cover 25 cover

Figure 3.13 Section at solid/rib intersection

∴z= (232/2) (1 + 0.980) ≤ 0.95 × 232 Appendix A1
= 230 ≤ 220 ∴ z = 220 mm
fyd = 434.8 MPa
DFtd = 0.5VEd (cot y – cot a) Cl. 6.2.3(7),
Exp. (6.18)
where
y = angle between the concrete compression strut and the Cl. 6.2.3(1)
beam axis. Assume cot y = 2.5 (as a maximum) Appendix A2
a = angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis. Appendix C,
Table C6
For vertical links, cot a = 0
Cl. 6.2.3(1)
DFtd = 1.25VEd = 1.25 × 29.3 = 36.6 kN
As = 18.3 × 106/(434.8 × 220) + 36.6 × 103/434.8
= 191 + 84 mm2 = 275 mm2
∴Try 1 no. H20 B in end supports*
d) Support B (and C) (at centreline of support)
MEd = 77.1 kNm/m
= 69.4 kNm/rib
K = MEd/bd2fck
where
d = 300 − 25 cover − 12 fabric − 8 link − 20/2
= 245
K = 69.4 × 106/(900 × 2452 × 35) = 0.037
By inspection, K ≤ K'
z = (245/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K)0.5] ≤ 0·95d
= (245/2) (1 + 0.932) < 0.95d
= 237 mm
As = MEd/fydz
= 69.4 × 106/434.8 × 237 = 673 mm2/rib

* An alternative method would have been to calculate the reinforcement required

to resist MEd at the shift distance, al, from the interface.

59
e) Support B (and C): flexure (hogging) at solid/rib interface
Reinforcement at solid/rib interface needs to be designed for both Cl. 9.2.1.3.(2)
moment and for additional tensile force due to shear (shift rule).
MEd,max = 42.4 kNm/rib max.
VEd,max = 40.9 kNm/rib max.
As = MEd/fydz + DFtd/fyd Cl. 9.2.1.3.(2)
where
z = (245/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K)0.5] ≤ 0·95d
where
K = MEd/bd2fck
= 42.4 × 106/(150 × 2452 × 35)
= 0.135
Check K ≤ K'
K' = 0.168 for d = 0.85 (i.e. 15% redistribution) Appendix C,
∴ Section under-reinforced: no compression reinforcement required Table C4
Appendix A
∴ z = (245/2) (1 + 0.723) ≤ 232 = 211 mm
fyd = 434.8 MPa
DFtd = 0.5VEd (cot y – cot a) Cl. 6.2.3(7),
Exp. (6.18)
where
y = angle between the concrete compression strut and the Cl. 6.2.3(1)
beam axis. Assume cot y = 2.5 (as a maximum) Appendix A2;
a = angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis. For Table C6
vertical links, cot a = 0 Cl. 6.2.3(1)
DFtd = 1.25VEd = 1.25 × 40.9 = 51.1 kN
As = 42.4 × 106/(434.8 × 211) + 51.1 × 103/434.8
= 462 + 117 mm2 = 579 mm2/rib
To be spread over beff where by inspection, beff = 900. Cl. 9.2.1.2(2)
∴ Centre of support more critical (679 mm2/rib required). Cl. 5.3.2.1(3)
Top steel may be spread across beff where Cl. 9.2.1.2(2),
beff = bw + beff1 + beff2 ≤ b 5.3.2
= bw + 2 × 0.1 × 0.15 × (l1 + l2)
= 150 + 0.03 × (7500 + 9000) ≤ 900
= 645 mm
∴ Use 2 no. H16 above rib and 3 no. H12 between (741 mm2/rib)
where 2 no. H16 and 2 no. H12 are within beff

3.3.6 Flexural design, span BC

a) Span B–C: Flexure
MEd = 55.9 kNm/m
= 50.3 kNm/rib

60
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

K = MEd/bd2fck
= 50.3 × 106/900 × 2572 × 35
= 0.02 i.e. ≤ K’ (as before K’ = 0.168)
By inspection,
z = 0.95d = 0.95 × 257 = 244 mm
By inspection, neutral axis is in flange.
As = MEd/fydz
= 50.3 × 106/434.8 × 244 = 474 mm2
Try 2 no. H20/rib (628 mm2/rib)
b) Span B–C: Deflection
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Section C7
where
N = Basic l/d Cl. 7.4.2(2)
r = 474/(159 (× 257 + (900 − 159) × 100)
= 474/114963
= 0.41%
r0 = 0.59% (for fck = 30)
∴ r < r0 use Exp. (7.16a)
N = 11 + 1.5 fck0.5 r0/r + 3.2fck0.5 (r0/r – 1)1.5 Exp. (7.16a)
= 11 + 1.5 × 350.5 × 0.055/0.041 + 3.2 × 350.5 (0.055/0.041 − 1)1.5
= 11 + 11.9 + 3.8 = 26.7
K = (internal span) 1.5 Table 7.4N, &
F1 = (beff/bw = 6.0) 0.8 NA, Table NA.5:
Note 5
F2 = 7.0/leff = 7.0/9.0 = (span > 7.0 m) 0.77 Cl. 7.4.2(2)
F3 = 310/sS ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2,
where Exp. (7.17)
ss = (fyk /gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d) & NA: Table NA.5
= 434.8 × (474/628) [(4.30 + 0.3 × 5.0)/13.38](61.1/55.9)
= 434.8 × 0.75 × 0.43 × 1.09
= 153 MPa
F3 = 310/ ss
= 310/153 = 2.03 therefore, say = 1.50‡ NA, Table NA.5:
Note 5
∴ Permissible l/d = 26.8 × 1.5 × 0.8 × 0.77 × 1.50 = 37.1
Actual l/d = 9000/257 = 35 ∴ OK
∴Use 2 H20/rib (628 mm2/rib)

‡ Both A
s,prov/As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or
Exp. (7.16b) is restricted to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA.

61
3.3.7 Design for shear
CL CL

10
1
b = 150

Figure 3.14 Section through rib

a) Support A (and D) at solid/rib interface

Shear at solid/rib interface = 29.3 kN/rib
Taking solid area as the support, at d from face of support Cl. 6.2.1(8)
VEd = 29.3 − 0.232 × 0.90 × 13.38 = 26.5 kN/rib Cl. 6.2.2(1) & NA
Resistance
VRd,c = (0.18/gC)k (100 rl fck)0.333 bwd
where
gC = 1.5
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2
= 1 + (200/257)0.5
= 1.88

rl = Asl/bwd
where
Asl = assume only 1 H20 anchored = 314 mm2
bw = min. width between tension and compression chords.
At bottom assuming 1/10 slope to rib:
= 150 + 2 × (25 + 8 + 20/2)/10
= 159 mm
d = 257 mm as before
rl = 314/(159 × 257) = 0.0077
fck = 35
∴VRd,c = (0.18/1.5) 1.88 (100 × 0.0077 × 35)0.333 × 159 × 257
= 0.68 × 159 × 257 = 27.8 kN/rib
∴ No shear links required. Cl. 6.2.1(5)
But use nominal links to allow prefabrication.
b) Support B (and C) at solid/rib interface
Shear at solid/rib interface = 40.9 kN/rib [max(BA; BC)]
At d from face of support Cl. 6.2.1(8)
VEd = 40.9 − 0.245 × 13.38 × 0.9 = 37.9 kN/rib

62
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

Resistance:
VRd,c = (0.18/ gC)k (100 rl fck)0.333 bwd Cl. 6.2.2(1) & NA
where
gC = 1.5
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2
= 1 + (200/245)0.5
= 1.90
rl = Asl/bwd
where
Asl = 2 H16 = 402 mm2
bw = 159 mm as before
d = 245 mm as before
rl = 0.0103
fck = 35 MPa
∴ VRd,c = (0.18/1.5) 1.9 (100 × 0.0103 × 35)0.333 × 159 × 245
= 0.75 × 159 × 245 = 29.2 kN/rib
∴ Shear links required.
Shear links required for a distance:
(37.9 − 29.2)/(13.38 × 0.9) + 245 = 722 + 245 = 967 mm
from interface.
Check shear capacity:
VRd,max = acw bw zvfcd/(cot y + tan y) Exp. (6.9) & NA
where
acw = 1.0
bw = 159 mm as before
z = 0.9d
v = 0.6 (1 − fck/250) = 0.528
fcd = 35/1.5 = 23.3 MPa
y = angle of inclination of strut.
Rearranging formula above:
(cot y + tan y) = acwbwzvfcd/VEd
= (1.0 × 159 × 0.9 × 245 × 0.528 × 23.3)
41.6 × 103
= 10.4
By inspection, cot−1y << 21.8. But cot y restricted to 2.5 and Cl. 6.2.3(2) & NA
∴ tan y = 0.4.
VRd,max = 1.0 × 159 × 0.9 × 245 × 0.528 × 20/(2.5 + 0.4) = 127.6 kN
∴ OK

63
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw/s) z fywd cot y ≤ VRd,max Exp. (6.8)
where
Asw/s = area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before
fywd = 500/1.15 = 434.8
cot y = 2.5 as before
∴ for VEd ≤ VRd,s
Asw/s ≥ VEd/z fywd cot y
≥ 37.9 × 103/(0.9 × 245 × 434.8 × 2.5) ≥ 0.158
Maximum spacing of links = 0.75d = 183 mm Cl. 9.2.2(6)
∴ Use H8 @ 175 cc in 2 legs (Asw /s = 0.57) for min. 967 mm into rib

3.3.8 Indirect supports

As the ribs of the slab are not supported at the top of the Cl. 9.2.5, Fig. 9.7
supporting beam sections (A, B, C, D), additional vertical
reinforcement should be provided in these supporting beams and
designed to resist the reactions. This additional reinforcement
should consist of links within the supporting beams (see Beams
design, Section 4.3.9).

Support A (and D) at solid/rib interface:

VEd = 26.5 kN/rib Fig. 9.7
As,req = 26.3 × 1000/(500/1.15) = 60 mm2
This area is required in links within h/6 = 300/6 = 50 mm of the
ribbed/solid interface and within h/2 = 300/2 = 150 mm of the
centreline of the rib.

Support B (and C) at solid/rib interface:

VEd = 37.9 kN/rib
As,req = 37.9 × 1000/(500/1.15) = 87 mm2 placed similarly

3.3.9 Other checks

Check shear between web and flange Cl. 6.4.2 (6) & NA
By inspection, VEd ≤ 0.4 fct,d ∴ OK

64
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

3.3.10 Summary of design

2H16 + 3H12/rib 2H16 + 3H12/rib

H8 links in 2 legs
@ 175cc
2H20/rib 2H20/rib 2H20/rib
A B C D
550 1050 1000 1000 1050 1050 1000 1000 1050 550
7500 9000 7500

fck = 35 MPa
cnom = 25 mm

Figure 3.15 Summary of design

Commentary
It is usually presumed that the detailer would take the above
design and detail the slab to normal best practice. As stated
in Section 3.2.9, the detailer’s responsibilities, standards and
timescales should be clearly defined but it would be usual for the
detailer to draw and schedule not only the designed reinforcement
but all the reinforcement required to provide a buildable solution.

The work would usually include checking the following aspects and
providing appropriate detailing:
• Minimum areas
• Curtailment lengths
• Anchorages
• Laps
• U-bars
• Rationalisation
• Details and sections

The determination of minimum reinforcement areas, curtailment

lengths and laps using the principles in Eurocode 2 is shown in
detail in the following calculations. In practice these would be
determined from published tables of data or by using reference
texts [12, 21]. Nonetheless the designer should check the drawing
for design intent and compliance with standards. It is therefore
necessary for the designer to understand and agree the principles
of the details used.

3.3.11 Detailing checks

a) Minimum areas
i) Minimum area of reinforcement in flange
As,min = 0.26 (fctm/fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd Cl. 9.3.1.1

65
where Cl. 9.2.1.1,
bt = width of tension zone Exp. (9.1N)
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666 Table 3.1
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 350.666 × 1000 × 100/500 = 166 mm2/m
(r = 0.17%)
∴ Use A142 in flange (say OK) BS 8666[19]
ii) Secondary reinforcement
Not applicable.
iii) Maximum spacing of bars
Maximum spacing of bars < 3 h < 400 mm
By inspection. OK Cl. 9.3.1.1.(3)
iv) Crack control
Loading is the main cause of cracking ∴ use Table 7.2N or Table 7.3N for Cl. 7.3.3(2)
wmax = 0.3 mm and max. ss = 200 MPa (see deflection check) Cl. 7.3.1.5
Max. bar size = 25 mm Table 7.2N
or max. spacing = 250 mm Table 7.3N
OK by inspection
v) Effects of partial fixity
Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is required Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span.
As,req = 15% × 525 = 79 mm2/rib
For the rib in tension:
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 159 × 257/500 = 55 mm2/rib
b) Curtailment
Wherever possible simplified methods of curtailing reinforcement
would be used. The following is intended to show how a rigorous
assessment of curtailment of reinforcement might be undertaken.
i) End support A: bottom steel at support Cl. 9.3.1.1(4),
Check anchorage. 9.3.1.2(1) &
As simply supported, 25% of As should be anchored in support. Note,
25% × 595 = 148 mm2 Cl. 9.2.1.4(1)
Use 1 no. H20/rib (314 mm2/rib) & NA
ii) Check anchorage length
Envelope of tensile force: Cl. 9.3.1.1(4),
To resist envelope of tensile force, provide reinforcement to al or lbd 9.2.1.3(1),
beyond centreline of support. Cl. 9.2.1.3(2),
For members without shear reinforcement, al = d = 232 9.2.1.3(3), Fig. 9.2
By inspection, ssd = 0, lbd = lbd,min = max(10f, 100 mm) Cl. 9.2.1.3
iii) Indirect support
Cl. 9.3.1.1(4),
As anchorage may be measured from face of indirect support, check 9.2.1.4(2),
force to be resisted at solid/rib interface: 9.2.1.4(3),
Fs = MEd/z + FE Fig. 9.3b

66
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

where
MEd = 18.3 kNm/rib
z = 220 as before Exp. (9.3)
FE = VEd × al/z
where Cl. 9.2.1.3,
VEd = 29.3 kN/rib Exp. (9.2)
al = z cot y/2
∴ FE = VEd cot y/2
= 29.3 × 1.25 = 36.6 kN/rib
Fs = 18.6 × 106/(220 × 103) + 36.6 = 121.1 kN
iv) Anchorage length:
lbd = alb,rqd ≥ lb,min Cl. 8.4.4,
where Exp. (8.4)
a = conservatively 1.0
lb,rqd = (f/4) (ssd/fbd) Exp. (8.3)
where
f = 20
ssd = design stress in the bar at the ULS
= 121.1 × 1000/314 = 385 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress
= 2.25 n1 n1 fct,d Cl. 8.4.2(2)
where
n1 = 1.0 for good bond conditions
n2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm
fct,d = act fct,k/gC Cl. 3.1.6(2),
= 1.0 × 2.2/1.5 Tables 3.1,
= 1.47 MPa 2.1 & NA
fbd = 2.25 × 1.47 = 3.31 MPa
∴ lb,rqd = (20/4) (385/3.31) = 581 mm Fig. 9.3
lb,min = max[10f; 100 mm] = 200 mm
∴ lbd = 581 mm measured from solid/rib intersection.
i.e. 31 mm beyond centreline of support‡.
v) End support A: top steel
Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is required Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
to extend at least 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span§.
As,req = 15% × 525 = 79 mm2/rib
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 350.666 × 159 × 257/500 = 68 mm2/rib Cl. 9.3.1.1
Cl. 9.2.1.1(1),
Use 2 no. H12 T1/rib in rib and 2 no. H10 T1/rib between ribs Exp. (9.1N)
(383 mm2/rib)
‡ Whilst this would comply with the requirements of Eurocode 2, it is common practice

to take bottom bars 0.5 × a tension lap beyond the centreline of support
(= 250 mm beyond the centreline of support; see model detail MS1 in SMDSC[9]).
§ It is usual to curtail 50% of the required reinforcement at 0.2l and to curtail the

remaining 50% at 0.3l or line of zero moment (see model detail MS2 in SMDSC[9]).

67
vi) Support B (and C): top steel
At the centreline of support (2 no. H16 T + 3 no. H12 T)/rib are
required. The intention is to curtail in two stages, firstly to 2 no.
H16 T/rib then to 2 no. H12 T/rib.

Curtailment of 2 no. H16 T/rib at support

(capacity of 2 no. H12 T/rib + shift rule):
Assume use of 2 no. H12 T throughout in midspan:
Assuming z = 211 mm as before,
MR2H12T = 2 × 113 × 434.8 × 211
= 20.7 kNm/rib (23.0 kNm/m)
(Note: section remains under-reinforced)

From analysis MEd = 23.0 kNm/m occurs at 2250 mm (towards A)

and 2575 mm (towards B).
Shift rule: al = z cot y/2
Assuming z = 211 mm as before
al = 1.25 × 211 = 264 mm
∴ 2 no. H12 T are adequate from 2250 + 264 = 2513 mm from B
towards A and 2575 + 263 = 2838 mm from B towards C.
∴ Curtail 2 no. H16 T @ say 2600 from BA and 2850 from BC

Curtailment of 3 no. H12 T/rib at support (capacity of 2 no. H16

T/rib + shift rule):
MR2H16T = 2 × 201 × 434.8 × 211
= 36.9 kNm/rib (41.0 kNm/m)
(Note: section remains under-reinforced)
From analysis MEd = 41.0 kNm/m occurs at 1310 mm (towards A)
and 1180 mm
(towards C).
Shift rule: al = 263 mm as before
∴ 2 no. H16 T are adequate from 1310 + 263 = 1573 mm from B
towards A and 1180 + 263 = 1443 mm from B towards C.
∴ Curtail 3 no. H12 at say 1600 from B (or C).
(See Figure 3.16)
vii) Support B (and C): bottom steel at support Cl. 9.3.1.1(4),
At the support 25% of span steel required 9.2.1.5(1),
0.25 × 628 = 157 mm2 9.2.1.4(1)
Try 1 no. H16 B/rib (201)

This reinforcement may be anchored into indirect support or carried Fig. 9.4
through.

68
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

2H16 + 3H12
per rib
a1 = 264 MEd = 77.1 x 0.9 = 60.4 kNm/rib
‘Shift’ moment

MR = As(fyk/gS)z
2H16/rib
lbd MEd

MEd = 36.79 kNm/rib

2H12/rib

MEd = 20.7 kNm/rib

A B C
264 1310 1180 264
2250 2575
264 264
a) Design moments and moment resistance

2H12 3H12 2H12

2H16
1600 1600
2600 2850
b) Curtailment of reinforcement
Figure 3.16 Curtailment of top
p reinforcement at B per
p rib

viii) Support B (and C): bottom steel curtailment BA and BC

To suit prefabrication 2 no. H20/rib will be curtailed at solid/rib
interface, 1000 mm from BA (B towards A) and BC.
From analysis, at solid/rib interface sagging moment = 0.
From analysis, at a1 from solid/rib interface, i.e. at 1000 + 1.25 × 244
= 1303 mm
at 1305 mm from BA sagging moment = say 5 kNm/rib
at 1305 mm from BC sagging moment = 0
Use 1 no. H16 B/rib (201)
c) Laps
At AB, check lap 1 no. H20 B to 2 no. H20 B in rib full tension lap:
l0 = a1 a6 lb,rqd > l0,min Exp. (8.10)
where
a1 = 1.0 (cd = 45 mm, i.e. < 3f) Table 8.2
a6 = 1.5 (as > 50% being lapped)
lb,rqd = (f/4) (ssd/fbd)
where
f = 20
ssd = 434.8
fbd = 3.0 MPa as before

69
l0,min = max. 10f or 100 = 200 Exp. (8.6)
l0 = 1.0 × 1.5 × (20/4) × 434.8/3.0
= 1087 mm, say = 1200 mm SMDSC[9]
At BA and BC, check lap 2 no. H12 T to 2 no. H16 T in rib – full tension lap:
l0 = a1 a6 lb,rqd > l0,min Exp. (8.10)
where
a1 = 0.7 (cd = 45 mm, i.e. > 3f) Table 8.2
a6 = 1.5 (as > 50% being lapped)
lb,rqd = (f/4) (ssd/fbd)
where
f = 20
ssd = 434.8
fbd = 2.1 (3.0 MPa as before but n1 = 0.7 for “not good bond Cl. 8.4.2
conditions”)
l0,min = max. 10f or 100 = 120
l0 = 0.7 × 1.5 × (12/4) × 434.8/2.1
= 651 mm, say = 700 mm SMDSC[9]
But to aid prefabrication take to solid/rib intersection 1000 mm
from centre of support.
At BA and BC, check lap 1 no. H16 B to 2 no. H20 B in rib:
By inspection, nominal say, 500 mm SMDSC[9]
d) RC detail of ribbed slab
Links not shown for clarity. Cover 25 mm to links.

600 600 600

200 200 1500 1000 1000 1000 1250 1250 1000

2H12T in rib 2H16 + 3H12/rib

and 2H1OT 2H16 + 3H12/rib A143
between 2H12T 2H12T/rib fabric

2H12 2H12 + 2H1O 2H16 3H12 2H12 2H12 3H12 2H16 2H16 3H12 2H12

1H20B 2H20B/rib 1H16B/rib 2H20B/rib 1H16B/rib

150 550 1200 500 1000 1000 500 500 1000 1000

7500 9000

Figure 3.17 Curtailment of flexural reinforcement in ribbed slab

70
3.3: Continuous ribbed slab

3.4 Flat slab

This example is for the design of a reinforced concrete flat slab without column heads. The slab
is part of a larger floor plate and is taken from Guide to the design and construction of reinforced
concrete flat slabs[27], where finite element analysis and design to Eurocode 2 is illustrated. As
with the Guide, grid line C will be designed but, for the sake of illustration, coefficients will be
used to establish design moments and shears in this critical area of the slab.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Flat slab Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

The slab is for an office where the specified load is 1.0 kN/m2 for
finishes and 4.0 kN/m2 imposed (no partitions). Perimeter load is
assumed to be 10 kN/m. Concrete is C30/37. The slab is 300 mm
thick and columns are 400 mm square. The floor slabs are at 4.50 m
vertical centres. A 2 hour fire rating is required.

A B Bb C
4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 D
1 E

200 x 200
hole
8.0

2 9.6

300 mm flat slabs

8.0 All columns 400 mm sq.

3 8.6
200 x 200
hole

Figure 3.18 Part p

plan of flat slab

3.4.1 Actions
kN/m2
Permanent: EC1-1-1:
Self-weight 0.30 × 25 = 7.5 Table A1
Finishes = 1.0
Total gk = 8.5
Variable:
Offices qk = 4.0‡

‡ Client requirement. See also BS EN 1991–1–1, Tables 6.1, 6.2, Cl. 6.3.2.1(8) & NA.

71
3.4.2 Cover
cnom:
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur; 10 mm] Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
where
cmin,b = 20 mm, assuming 20 mm diameter reinforcement
cmin,dur = 15 mm for XC1 and using C30/37 Table 4.1.
BS 8500-1:
Dcdev = 10 mm
Table A4.
Fire:
For 2 hours resistance, amin = 35 mm ∴ not critical EC2-1-2:
∴ cnom = 20 + 10 = 30 mm Table 5.9

3.4.3 Load combination and arrangement

qk = 4.0 kN/m2
gk = 8.5 kN/m2

1 2 3
9600 8600

Figure 3.19 Panel centred on grid C

Ultimate load, n: Fig. 2.5
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. EC0: Exp. (6.10b)
n = 1.25 × 8.50 + 1.5 × 4.0 = 16.6 kN/m2
Arrangement:
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded load cases and Cl. 5.1.3(1) & NA:
coefficients‡. Table NA.1
(option b)
3.4.4 Analysis grid line C
Consider grid line C as a bay 6.0 m wide. (This may be conservative
for grid line C but is correct for grid line D etc.)
MEd
Effective spans:
9600 – 2 × 400/2 + 2 × 300/2 = 9500 mm Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)
8600 – 2 × 400/2 + 2 × 300/2 = 8500 mm
Check applicability of moment coefficients:
8500/9500 = 0.89 ∴ as spans differ by less than 15% of larger Tables C2 & C3
span, coefficients are applicable.

‡The all-spans-loaded case with 20% redistribution of support moments would Cl. 5.3.1 & NA
also have been acceptable but would have involved some analysis. The use of Table
5.9 in BS EN 1992–1–2 (Fire resistance of solid flat slabs) is restricted to where
Table C3
redistribution does not exceed 15%; the coefficients presume 15% redistribution
at supports.

72
3.4: Flat slab

As two span, use table applicable to beams and slabs noting Table C3
increased coefficients for central support moment and shear.
Design moments in bay.
Spans:
MEd = (1.25 × 8.5 × 0.090 + 1.5 × 4.0 × 0.100)× 6.0 × 9.52 = 842.7 kNm
Support:
MEd = 16.6 × 0.106 × 6.0 × 9.52 = 952.8 kNm
C D
6000

1
1500 Column
strip

Middle
strip

1500
2 Column
1500 strip

1500 1500 3000 1500 1500

Column strip Middle strip Column strip

Figure 3.20 Column and middle strips

p
Apportionment of moments between column strips and middle strips:
Apportionment (as %)
Column strip Middle strip
–ve (hogging) Long span = 70%§ Long span = 30% Table I.1;
Short span = 75% Short span = 25% CS Flat slab
+ve (sagging) 50% 50% guide[27]
Table I.1
Parallel to grid C, column strip is ly/2 = 3 m wide. The middle strip is NA.3[1a]; Fig. I.1
also 3 m wide.
Long span moments:
MEd
Column strip, 3 m wide Middle strip, 3 m wide
–ve (hogging) 0.70 × 952.8/3.0 = 222.3 kNm/m 0.30 × 952.8/3.0 = 95.3 kNm/m
+ve (sagging) 0.50 × 842.7/3.0 = 140.5 kNm/m 0. 50 × 842.7/3.0 = 140.5 kNm/m

§The Concrete Society’s TR 64[27] recommends a percentage, k1, based on ly /lz

Assuming ly /lz = 1.5 the distribution of moments in the long span between column
strips and middle strips is given as 70% and 30%.

73
Punching shear force, VEd:
At C2,
VEd = 16.6 × 6.0 × 9.6‡ × 0.63 × 2 = 1204.8 kN Table C3
At C1 (and C3)
VEd = 16.6 × 6.0 × 9.6 × 0.45 + (10 + 0.2 × 0.3 × 25)§ × 1.25 × 6.0 Table C3
= 516.5 kN

3.4.5 Design grid line C

Effective depth, d:
d = 300 − 30 − 20/2 = 260 mm
a) Flexure: column strip and middle strip, sagging
MEd = 140.5 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 140.5 × 106/(1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.069
z d = 0.94
z/ Table C5
z = 0.94 × 260 = 244 mm
As = MEd/ffyd z = 140.5 × 106/(244 × 500/1.15) = 1324 mm2/m
r = 0.51%)
(r
Try H20 @ 200 B1 (1570 mm2/m)
b) Deflection: column strip and middle strip
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Allowable l/
l d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Cl. 7.4.2(2)
where Appendix C
N = 20.3 (r = 0.51%, fck = 30) Tables C10 –C13
K = 1.2 (flat slab)
F1 = 1.0 (befff/bw = 1.0)
F2 = 1.0 (no brittle partitions)#
F3 = 310/s ss ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp. (7.17)
where* Table 7.4N, &
ss = ssu (As,reqq/As,prov) 1/d NA, Table NA.5
where Note 5
ssu = (500/1.15) × (8.5 + 0.3 × 4.0)/16.6 = 254 MPa
(or ≈ 253 MPa; from Figure C3
Gk/Qk = 2.1, c2 = 0.3 and gG = 1.25) Fig. C3
d = redistribution ratio = 1.03
∴ ss ≈ 253 × (1324/1570)/1.03 = 207 Fig. C14
∴ F3 = 310/207 = 1.50†
∴ Allowable l/
l d = 20.3 × 1.2 × 1.50 = 36.5
‡ As punching shear force (rather than a beam shear force) ‘effective’ span is not
appropriate.
§ Cladding and strip of slab beyond centre of support.
# Otherwise for flat slabs 8.5/9.5 = 0.89 as span > 8.5 m.
* See Appendix B1.5 Cl. 7.4.2(2)
† In line with Note 5 to Table NA.5, 1.50 is considered to be a maximum for 310/s
ss.

74
3.4: Flat slab

Actual l/d = 9500/260 = 36.5 ∴ OK‡

Use H20 @ 200 B1 (1570)§
c) Flexure: column strip, hogging
MEd = 222.3 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 222.3 × 106/(1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.109
z/d = 0.89 Table C5
z = 0.89 × 260 = 231 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 222.3 × 106/(231 × 500/1.15) = 2213 mm2/m
(r = 0.85%)
Try H20 @ 125 T1 (2512 mm2/m)#
d) Flexure: middle strip, hogging
MEd = 95.3 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 95.3 × 106/(1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.069
z/d = 0.95 Table C5
z = 0.95 × 260 = 247 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 95.3 × 106/(247 × 500/1.15) = 887 mm2/m
(r = 0.34%)
Try H16 @ 200 T1 (1005 mm2/m)
e) Requirements
i) In column strip, inside middle 1500 mm Cl. 9.4.1(2)
There is a requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal to
0.125 of the panel width on either side of the column.
Area required = (3 × 2213 + 3 × 887)/2 mm2
= 4650 mm2
Over width = 2 × 0.125 × 6.0 m = 1500 mm
i.e. require 4650/1.5 = 3100 mm2/m for 750 mm either side of the
column centreline.
Use H20 @ 100 T1 (3140 mm2/m)
750 mm either side of centre of support (16 no. bars)
(r = 0.60%)

ii) In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm

Area required = 3.0 × 2213 – 16 × 314 mm2
= 1615 mm2
Over width = 3000 – 2 × 750 mm = 1500 mm
i.e. 1077 mm2/m
Use H20 @ 250 T1 (1256 mm2/m)
in remainder of column strip
‡ Note: Continuity into columns will reduce sagging moments and criticality of
deflection check (see Figures 3.26 and 3.27).
§ Note requirement for at least 2 bars in bottom layer to carry through column.
# The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce the Cl. 9.4.1(3)
amount of reinforcement required.

75
iii) In middle strip Use H16 @ 200 T1 (1005 mm2/m)

iv) Perpendicular to edge of slab at edge column

Design transfer moment to column Mt = 0.17 bed 2fck Cl. 9.4.2(1),
where I.1.2(5)
be = cz + y = 400 + 400 = 800 mm Fig. 9.9
Mt = 0.17 × 800 × 2602 × 30 × 10−6 = 275.8 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck = 275.8 × 106/(800 × 2602 × 30) = 0.170
z/d = 0.82
z = 0.82 × 260 = 213 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 275.8 × 106/(213 × 500/1.15) = 2978 mm2/m
This reinforcement to be placed within cx + 2cy = 1100 mm SMDSC[9]
Try 10 no. H20 T1 U-bars in pairs @ 200 (3140 mm2) local to column
(max. 200 mm from column)
Note:
Where a 200 × 200 hole occurs on face of column, be becomes 600 mm
and pro rata, As,req becomes 2233 mm2 i.e. use 4 no. H20 each side
of hole (2512 mm2).
v) Perpendicular to edge of slab generally
Assuming that there is partial fixity along the edge of the slab, top Cl. 9.3.1.2(2),
reinforcement capable of resisting 25% of the moment in the 9.2.1.4(1) & NA
adjacent span should be provided
0.25 × 2213 = 553 mm2/m OK
vi) Check minimum area of reinforcement
As,min = 0.26 (fctm/fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
where
bt = width of tension zone Table 3.1
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 260/500 = 390 mm2/m
(r = 0.15%)
Use H12 @ 200 (565 mm2/m)

The reinforcement should extend 0.2h from edge = 600 mm Cl. 9.3.1.4(2)

3.4.6 Analysis grid line 1 (grid 3 similar)

Consider grid line 1 as being 9.6/2 + 0.4/2 = 5.0 m wide with
continuous spans of 6.0 m. Column strip is 6.0/4 + 0.4/2 = 1.7 m
wide. Consider perimeter load is carried by column strip only. Cl. 5.1.1(4)

76
3.4: Flat slab

qk slab = 20.0 kN/m

gk cladding = 10.0 kN/m
gk slab = 42.5 kN/m

C 6000 D 6000 E 6000 F

Figure 3.21 Edge p

panel on grid 1 (grid 3 similar)

Actions:
Permanent from slab gk = 5 × 8.5 kN/m2 = 42.5 kN/m
Variable from slab qk = 5 × 4.0 kN/m2 = 20.0 kN/m
Permanent perimeter load gk = 10.0 kN/m
Cl. 5.1.3(1) &
Load combination and arrangement: NA: Table NA.1
As before, choose to use all-spans-loaded case and coefficients (option c)
Ultimate load, n:
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. Fig. 2.5
n = 1.25 × (42.5 +10) + 1.5 × 20 = 95.6 kN/m EC0: Exp. (6.10b)
Perimeter load, 10 × 1.25 = 12.5 kN/m
Effective span, leff
Effective span = 6000 – 2 × 400/2 + 2 × 300/2 = 5900 Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)

Design moments in bay, MEd:

In spans (worst case, end span assuming pinned support)
MEd = 0.086 × 83.0 × 5.92 = 248.5 kNm Table C2
At supports (worst case 1st support)
MEd = 0.086 × 83.0 × 5.92 = 248.5 kNm Table C2
Additional moment in column strip only due to perimeter load,
spans (and supports, worst case)
MEd = 0.086 × 12.5 × 5.92 = 37.4 kNm

Apportionment to column strips and middle strips: NA.3[1a]: Fig. I.1

Apportionment (as %)
Column strip, 1.7 m wide Middle strip Table I.1
–ve (hogging) Short span = 75% Short span = 25% CS Flat slab
guide[27]
+ve (sagging) 50% 50%

Short span moments:

MEd
Column strip, 1.7 m wide Middle strip, 3.3 m wide
–ve (hogging) (0.75 × 248.5 + 37.4)/1.70 0.25 × 248.5/3.3
= 131.6 kNm/m = 18.8 kNm/m
+ve (sagging) (0.50 × 248.5 + 37.4)/1.70 0.50 × 248.5/3.3
= 95.1 kNm/m = 37.6 kNm/m

77
Punching shear force, VEd
For internal supports, as before = 516.5 kN
For penultimate support, 516.5 × 1.18 = 609.5 kN Table C3

3.4.7 Design grid line 1 (grid 3 similar)

Cover:
cnom = 30 mm as before
d = 300 − 30 − 20 − 20/2 = 240 mm
a) Flexure: column strip, sagging
MEd = 95.1 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 95.1 × 106/(1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.055 Table C5
z/d = 0.95
z = 0.95 × 240 = 228 mm
As = MEd/fyd z = 95.1 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 959 mm2/m
(r = 0.40%)
Try H16 @ 200 B2 (1005 mm2/m)
b) Deflection: column strip
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7
where Tables C10–C13
N = 26.2 (r = 0.40%, fck = 30) Cl. 7.4.2, Exp.
K = 1.2 (flat slab) (7.17), Table 7.4N
& NA,
F1 = 1.0 (beff/bw = 1.0)
Table NA.5:
F2 = 1.0 (no brittle partitions) Note 5
F3 = 310/ ss ≤ 1.5
where
ss = ssu (As,req/As,prov) 1/d
where
ssu ≈ 283 MPa (from Figure C3 and Gk/Qk
= 3.6, c2 = 0.3, gG = 1.25) Fig. C3
d = redistribution ratio = 1.08
∴ ss ≈ 283 × (959/1005)/1.08 = 250 Table C14
∴ F3 = 310/250 = 1.24 Fig. C3

∴ Allowable l/d = 26.2 × 1.2 × 1.24 = 39.0

Actual l/d = 5900/240 = 24.5 ∴ OK
Use H16 @ 200 B2 (1005 mm2/m)
c) Flexure: middle strip, sagging
MEd = 37.6 kNm/m
By inspection, z = 228 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 37.6 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 379 mm2/m
(r = 0.56%)

78
3.4: Flat slab

By inspection, deflection OK.

Check minimum area of reinforcement.

As,min = 0.26 (fctm/fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
where
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666 Table 3.1
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 240/500 = 361 mm2/m
(r = 0.15%)
Use H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2/m)
d) Flexure: column strip, hogging
MEd = 131.6 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 131.6 × 106/(1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.076 Table C5
z/d= 0.928
z = 0.928 × 240 = 223 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 131.6 × 106/(223 × 500/1.15) = 1357 mm2/m
(r = 0.56%)
Try H20 @ 200 T2 (1570 mm2/m)‡
e) Flexure: middle strip, hogging
MEd = 18.8 kNm/m
By inspection, z = 228 mm Table C5
As = MEd/fydz = 18.8 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 190 mm2/m
(r = 0.08%)
As,min as before = 361 mm2/m Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
(r = 0.15%)
Try H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2/m)

f) Requirements
There is a requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal to 0.125 Cl. 9.4.1(2)
of the panel width on either side of the column. As this column strip is
adjacent to the edge of the slab, consider one side only:
Area required = (1.5 × 1357 + 3.3 × 190)/2 mm2
= 1334 mm2
Within = 0.125 × 6.0 m = 750 mm of the column centreline,
i.e. require 1334/0.75 = 1779 mm2/m for 750 mm from the column
centreline.

‡ The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce
the amount of reinforcement required. This should be balanced against the
effect of the presence of a 200 × 200 hole at some supports which would
have the effect of increasing K but not unduly increasing the total amount of
reinforcement required in the column strip (a 1.5% increase in total area would
been required).

79
Allowing for similar from centreline of column to edge of slab:
Use 6 no. H20 @ 175 T2(1794 mm2/m)
(r = 0.68%)
between edge and to 750 mm from centre of support

In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm, requirement is for

1.7 × 1357 – 6 × 314 = 422 mm2 in 750 mm, i.e. 563 mm2/m
Use H12 @ 175 T2 (646 mm2/m) in remainder of column strip

In middle strip Use H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2/m)

3.4.8 Analysis grid line 2

Consider panel on grid line 2 as being 9.6/2 + 8.6/2 = 9.1 m wide
and continuous spans of 6.0 m. Column strip is 6.0/2 = 3.0 m wide.
(See Figure 3.20).

qk slab = 36.4 kN/m

gk slab = 77.4 kN/m

C 6000 D 6000 E 6000 F

Figure 3.22 Internal p

panel on grid 2

Slab gk = 9.1 × 8.5 kN/m2 = 77.4 kN/m

Slab qk = 9.1 × 4.0 kN/m2 = 36.4 kN/m
Actions, load combination and arrangement: Cl. 5.1.3(1) &
Choose to use all-spans-loaded case. NA: Table NA.1
(option c)
Ultimate load, n:
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. Fig. 2.5
n = 1.25 × 77.4 + 1.5 × 36.4 = 151.4 kN/m EC0: Exp. (6.10b)

Effective span, leff:

Effective span = 5900 mm as before. Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)

Design moments in bay, MEd:

Spans (worst case, end span assuming pinned support)
MEd = 0.086 × 151.4 × 5.92 = 453.2 kNm Table C2

Support (worst case 1st support)

MEd = 0.086 × 151.4 × 5.92 = 453.2 kNm Table C2
Additional moment in column strip only due to perimeter load.

80
3.4: Flat slab

Apportionment to column strips and middle strips:

MEd
Column strip, 3.0 m wide Middle strip, 6.1 m wide
–ve (hogging) 0.75 × 453.2/3.0 0.25 × 453.2/6.1
= 113.3 kNm/m = 18.5 kNm/m
+ve (sagging) 0.50 × 453.2/3.0 0.50 × 453.2/6.1
= 75.5 kNm/m = 37.1 kNm/m

Punching shear force, VEd, as before.

3.4.9 Design grid line 2

Effective depth, d
d = 300 − 30 − 20 − 20/2 = 240 mm
a) Flexure: column strip, sagging
MEd = 75.5 kNm/m
By inspection, z = 228 mm Table C5
As = MEd/fydz = 75.5 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 761 mm2/m
(r = 0.32%)
Try H16 @ 250 B2 (804 mm2/m)
Deflection: column strip
By inspection, OK.
b) Flexure: column strip, sagging
MEd = 37.1 kNm/m
By inspection, z = 228 mm
As = MEd/fydz = 37.1 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 374 mm2/m
(r = 0.55%)
By inspection, deflection OK. Try H10 @ 200 B2 (393 mm2/m)
c) Flexure: column strip, hogging
MEd = 113.3 kNm/m
K = MEd/bd2fck = 113.3 × 106/(1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.065 Table C5
z/d = 0.94
z = 0.928 × 240 = 225 mm

As = MEd/fydz = 113.3 × 106/(225 × 500/1.15) = 1158 mm2/m

(r = 0.48%)
Try H20 @ 250 T2 (1256 mm2/m)‡
d) Flexure: middle strip, hogging
MEd = 18.5 kNm/m
By inspection, z = 228 mm

‡The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce
the amount of reinforcement required.

81
As = MEd/fydz = 18.5 × 106/(228 × 500/1.15) = 187 mm2/m
(r = 0.08%) Table C5
As before minimum area of reinforcement governs
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 240/500 = 361 mm2/m Cl. 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1
(r = 0.15%)
Try H12 @ 300 B2 (376 mm2/m)

e) Requirements
Regarding the requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal
to 0.125 of the panel width on either side of the column:
Area required = (3.0 × 1158 + 6.1 × 187)/2 mm2
= 2307 mm2
Within = 2 × 0.125 × 6.0 m = 1500 mm centred on the column
centreline,
i.e. require 2307/1.5 = 1538 mm2/m for 750 mm either side of the
column centreline.
Use H20 @ 200T2 (1570 mm2/m)
750 mm either side of centre of support
(r = 0.60%)

In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm, requirement is for

3.0 × 1158 – 1.5 × 1570 = 1119 mm2 in 1500 mm, i.e. 764 mm2/m
Use H16 @ 250 T2 (804 mm2/m) in remainder of column strip

In middle strip: Use H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2/m)

3.4.10 Punching shear, central column, C2

At C2, applied shear force, VEd = 1204.8 kN‡
a) Check at perimeter of column
vEd = bVEd /uid < vRd,max Cl. 6.4.3(2),
where 6.4.5(3)
b = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.15
VEd = applied shear force Fig. 6.21N & NA
ui = control perimeter under consideration.
For punching shear adjacent to interior columns Cl. 6.4.5(3)
u0 = 2(cx + cy) = 1600 mm
d = mean effective depth = (260 + 240)/2 = 250 mm Exp. (6.32)
vEd = 1.15 × 1204.8 × 103/1600 × 250 = 3.46 MPa
vRd,max = 0.5vfcd Cl. 6.4.5(3) Note

‡Column C2 is taken to be an internal column. In the case of a penultimate

column, an additional elastic reaction factor should have been considered.

82
3.4: Flat slab

where
v = 0.6(1 − fck/250) = 0.528
fcd = acclfck /gC = 1.0 × 1.0 × 30/1.5 = 20
= 0.5 × 0.528 × 20 = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK Table C7 §
b) Check shear stress at control perimeter u1 (2d from face of column) Cl. 6.4.2
vEd = bVEd/u1d < vRd,c
where
b, VEd and d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. Fig. 6.13
For punching shear at 2d from interior columns
u1 = 2(cx + cy) + 2π × 2d = 4741 mm
vEd = 1.15 × 1204.8 × 103/4741 × 250 = 1.17 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18/ gC k (100 rlfck)0.333 Exp. (6.47) & NA
where
gC = 1.5
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2 k = 1 + (200/250)0.5 = 1.89
rl = (rly rlz)0.5 = (0.0085 × 0.0048)0.5 = 0.0064 Cl. 6.4.4.1(1)
where
rly, rlz = Reinforcement ratio of bonded steel in the y and
z direction in a width of the column plus 3d each
side of column#
fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18/1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0064 × 30)0.333 = 0.61 MPa
∴ Punching shear reinforcement required Table C5*

c) Perimeter at which punching shear links are no longer required Exp. (6.54)
uout = VEd × b/(d vRd,c)
uout = 1204.8 × 1.15 × 103/(250 × 0.61) = 9085 mm
Length of column faces = 4 × 400 = 1600 mm
Radius to uout = (9085 – 1600)/2π = 1191 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1191 – 1.5 × 250 = 816 m
from face of column Cl. 6.4.5(4) & NA
Shear reinforcement (assuming rectangular arrangement of links):
sr,max = 250 × 0.75 = 187, say = 175 mm Cl. 9.4.3(1)

§At the perimeter of the column, vRd,max assumes the strut angle is 45°, i.e. that
cot y = 1.0. Where cot y = < 1.0, vRd,max is available from Table C7.
#The values used here for r ly , r lz ignore the fact that the reinforcement is
concentrated over the support. Considering the concentration would have given a
higher value of VRd,c at the expense of further calculation to determine r ly , r lz at
3d from the side of the column.
* vRd,c for various values of d and rl is available from Table C6.

83
Inside 2d control perimeter, st,max = 250 × 1.5 = 375, say 350 mm Cl. 9.4.3(2)
Outside control perimeter st,max = 250 × 2.0 = 500 mm
Assuming vertical reinforcement:
At the basic control perimeter, u1, 2d from the column‡:
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1/1.5fywd,ef) Exp. (6.52)
where
fywd,ef = effective design strength of reinforcement
= (250 + 0.25d) < fyd = 312 MPa Cl. 6.4.5(1)
For perimeter u1
Asw = (1.17 – 0.75 × 0.61) × 175 × 4741/(1.5 × 312)
= 1263 mm2 per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08fck0.5(sr st)/(1.5 fyk sin a + cos a) Exp. (9.11)
where
Asw,min = minimum area of a single leg of link
a = angle between main reinforcement and shear
reinforcement; for vertical reinforcement sin a = 1.0
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350)/(1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2
∴ Try H8 legs of links (50 mm2)
Asw /u1 ≥ 1263/4741 = 0.266 mm2/mm
Using H8 max. spacing = min[50/0.266; 1.5d] Cl. 9.4.3
= min[188; 375] = 188 mm cc
∴ Use min. H8 legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeter u1
Perimeters at 0.75d = 0.75 × 250 = 187.5 mm Cl. 9.4.3(1)
say = 175 mm centres
d) Check area of reinforcement > 1263 mm2 in perimeters inside u1§
1st perimeter to be > 0.3d but < 0.5d from face of column. Say Fig. 9.10,
0.4d = 100 mm from face of column. Cl. 9.4.3(4)
By inspection of Figure 3.23 the equivalent of 10 locations are available
at 0.4d from column therefore try 2 × 10 no. H10 = 1570 mm2.
By inspection of Figure 3.23 the equivalent of 18 locations are
available at 1.15d from column therefore try 18 no. H10 = 1413 mm2.
By inspection of Figure 3.23 the equivalent of 20 locations are available
at 1.90d from column therefore try 20 no. H10 = 1570 mm2.
By inspection of Figure 3.23 beyond u1 to uout grid of H10 at 175 x 175 OK.

‡Clause 6.4.5 provides Exp. (6.52), which by substituting vEd for vRd,c, allows Cl. 6.4.5
calculation of the area of required shear reinforcement, Asw, for the basic control Exp. 6.5.2
perimeter, u1.
§ The same area of shear reinforcement is required for all perimeters inside or
outside perimeter u1. See Commentary on design, Section 3.4.14. Punching shear
reinforcement is also subject to requirements for minimum reinforcement and
spacing of shear reinforcement (see Cl. 9.4.3). Cl. 9.4.3

84
3.4: Flat slab

e) Summary of punching shear refreshment required at column C2

uout
C
Punching shear reinforcement S = 112 H10 legs of links
no longer required
1.5d = 375
u1 at 2d
175 175 175 175 200 200 200 175 175 175 175

from column
716
100 400 100
2
716

uout 175 175 175 175 200 200 200 175 175 175 175

375 716 100 400 100 716

Figure 3.23 Punching shear links at column C2 (112 no. links)

(column D2 similar)

3.4.11 Punching shear, edge column

Assuming penultimate support,
VEd = 1.18 × 516.5 = 609.5 kN Table C3
a) Check at perimeter of column
vEd = b VEd/uid < vRd,max Cl. 6.4.3(2),
where 6.4.5(3)
b = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.4
VEd = applied shear force Fig. 6.21N & NA
ui = control perimeter under consideration. Cl. 6.4.5(3)
For punching shear adjacent to edge columns
u0 = c2 + 3d < c2 + 2c1
= 400 + 750 < 3 × 400 mm
= 1150 mm
d = as before 250 mm Exp. (6.32)
vEd = 1.4 × 609.5 × 103/1150 × 250 = 2.97 MPa
vRd,max, as before = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK Cl. 6.4.5(3) Note

85
b) Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column) Cl. 6.4.2
vEd = bVEd/u1d < vRd,c
where
b, VEd and d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. Fig. 6.15
For punching shear at 2d from edge column columns
u1 = c2 + 2c1+ π × 2d = 2771 mm
vEd = 1.4 × 609.5 × 103/2771 × 250 = 1.23 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18/ gC × k × (100 rlfck)0.333 Exp. (6.47) & NA
where
gC = 1.5
k = as before = 1 +(200/250)0.5 = 1.89
rl = (r lyr lz )0.5
where Cl. 6.4.4.1(1)
rly, rlz = Reinforcement ratio of bonded steel in the y and z direction
in a width of the column plus 3d each side of column.
r ly: (perpendicular to edge) 10 no. H20 T2 + 6 no. H12
T2 in 2 × 750 + 400, i.e. 3818 mm2 in 1900 mm
∴r ly = 3818/(250 × 1900) = 0.0080
r lz : (parallel to edge) 6 no. H20 T1 + 1 no. T12 T1 in 400 +
750 i.e. 1997 mm2 in 1150 mm.
∴r lz = 1997/(250 × 1150) = 0.0069
r l = (0.0080 × 0.0069)0.5 = 0.0074
fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18/1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0074 × 30)0.333 = 0.64 MPa Table C6‡
∴ Punching shear reinforcement required
C

3d = 750 400 3d = 750

H12 @ 200 U-bars 6H20T1 @175 10H20 U-bars in pairs @ 200 cc

400

1
3d = 750

H12 @ 175T1

Figure 3.24 Flexural tensile reinforcement adjacent to columns

C1 (and C3)

‡ vRd,c for various values of d and rl is available from Table C6.

86
3.4: Flat slab

c) Perimeter at which punching shear links no longer required

uout = 609.5 × 1.4 × 103/(250 × 0.64) = 5333 mm Exp. (6.54)
Length attributable to column faces = 3 × 400 = 1200 mm
∴ radius to uout from face of column
= say (5333 − 1200)/π = 1315 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1370 – 1.5 × 250 Cl. 6.4.5(4)
= 940 mm from face of column. & NA

d) Shear reinforcement
As before, sr,max = 175 mm; st,max = 350 mm and Cl. 9.4.3(1),
fywd,ef = 312 MPa 9.4.3(2)
For perimeter u1
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1/1.5fywd,ef Exp. (6.52)
= (1.23 – 0.75 × 0.64) × 175 × 2771/(1.5 × 312)
= 777 mm2 per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350)/(1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2 Exp. (9.11)
Asw/u1 ≥ 777/2771 = 0.28 mm2/mm
Using H8 max. spacing = 50/0.28 = 178 mm cc
∴Use min. H8 (50 mm2) legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeters:
perimeters at 175 mm centres

e) Check area of reinforcement > 777 mm2 in perimeters inside u1§ Fig. 9.10,
1st perimeter to be > 0.3d but < 0.5d from face of column. Say Cl. 9.4.3(4)
0.4d = 100 mm from face of column
By inspection of Figure 3.27 the equivalent of 6 locations are available
at 0.4d from column therefore try 2 × 6 no. H10 = 942 mm2

By inspection of Figure 3.27 the equivalent of 12 locations are

available at 1.15d from column therefore try 12 no. H10 = 942 mm2

By inspection of Figure 3.27 the equivalent of 14 locations are

available at 1.90d from column therefore try 14 no. H10 = 1099 mm2

By inspection of Figure 3.27 beyond u1 to uout grid of

H10 at 175 x 175 OK.

3.4.12 Punching shear, edge column with hole

Check columns D1 and D3 for 200 × 200 mm hole adjacent to column.
As previously described use 4 no. H20 U-bars each side of column for
transfer moment.
Assuming internal support, VEd = 516.5 kN

§ See Commentary on design Section 3.4.14. Punching shear reinforcement is

Cl. 9.4.3
also subject to requirements for minimum reinforcement and spacing of shear
reinforcement (see Cl. 9.4.3).

87
a) Check at perimeter of column
vEd = bVEd/uid < vRd,max Cl. 6.4.3(2),
where 6.4.5(3)
b = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.4 Fig. 6.21N & NA
VEd = applied shear force
ui = control perimeter under consideration. For punching shear
adjacent to edge columns u0 = c2 + 3d < c2 + 2c1 Cl. 6.4.5(3)
= 400 + 750 < 3 × 400 mm
= 1150 mm
Allowing for hole, u0 = 1150 – 200 = 950 mm
d = 250 mm as before Exp. (6.32)
vEd = 1.4 × 516.5 × 103/950 × 250 = 3.06 MPa
vRd,max as before = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK Cl. 6.4.5(3) Note

b) Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column) Cl. 6.4.2
vEd = bVEd/u1d < vRd,c
where
b, VEd and d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. For punching shear Fig. 6.15
at 2d from edge column columns
u1 = c2 + 2c1+ π × 2d = 2771 mm
Allowing for hole
200/(c1/2): x/(c1/2 + 2d) Fig. 6.14
200/200: x/( 200 + 500)
∴ x = 700 mm
u1 = 2771 – 700 = 2071 mm
vEd = 1.4 × 516.5 × 103/2071 × 250 = 1.40 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18/gC × k × (100 rlfck)0.333 Exp. (6.47) & NA
where
gC = 1.5
k = as before = 1 + (200/250)0.5 = 1.89
rl = (r ly r lz )0.5
where
rly, rlz = Reinforcement ratio of bonded steel in the y and
z direction in a width of the column plus 3d each
side of column Cl. 6.4.4.1(1)
rly: (perpendicular to edge) 8 no. H20 T2 + 6 no. H12
T2 in 2 × 720 + 400 − 200, i.e. 3190 mm2 in 1640 mm.
∴r ly = 3190/(240 × 1640) = 0.0081
rlz: (parallel to edge) 6 no. H20 T1 (5 no. are
effective) + 1 no. T12 T1 in 400 + 750 – 200, i.e.
1683 mm2 in 950 mm.
∴r lz = 1683/(260 × 950) = 0.0068

88
3.4: Flat slab

rl = (0.0081 × 0.0068)0.5 = 0.0074

fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18/1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0074 × 30)0.33 = 0.64 MPa Table C6‡
∴ punching shear reinforcement required

H12 @ 175T1

3d = 750
400
3

H12 @ 200 U-bars 6H20T @ 175 8H20 U-bars in pairs @ 200 cc

3d = 750 400 3d = 750

Figure 3.25 Flexural tensile reinforcement adjacent to columns

D1 and D3

c) Perimeter at which punching shear links no longer required Exp. (6.54)

uout = 516.5 × 1.4 × 103/(250 × 0.64) = 4519 mm
Length attributable to column faces = 3 × 400 = 1200 mm
Angle subtended by hole from centre of column D1 (See Figures 3.25
& 3.27) = 2
tan−1(100/200) = 2 × 26.5° = 0.927 rads.
∴ radius to uout from face of column
= say (4519 − 1200)/(π − 0.927) = 1498 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1498 – 1.5 × 250 Cl. 6.4.5(4)
= 1123 mm from face of column & NA

d) Shear reinforcement
As before, sr,max = 175 mm; st,max = 350 mm and fywd,ef = 312 MPa Cl. 9.4.3(1)
9.4.3(2)
For perimeter u1
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1/1.5fywd,ef) per perimeter Exp. (6.52)
= (1.40 – 0.75 × 0.64) × 175 × 2071/(1.5 × 312)
= 712 mm2 per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350)/(1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2
Asw/u1 ≥ 712/2071 = 0.34 mm2/mm

‡v
Rd,c for various values of d and rl is available from Table C6.

89
Using H8 (50 mm2) max. spacing = min[50/0.3; 1.5d]
= min[147; 375] = 147 mm cc No good
Try using H10, max. spacing = 78.5/0.34 = 231 mm cc, say 175 cc
∴ Use min. H10 (78.5 mm2) legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeters:
perimeters at 175 mm centres
Check min. 9 no. H10 legs of links (712 mm2) in perimeter u1, 2d from
column face.

e) Check area of reinforcement > 712 mm2 in perimeters inside u1‡

1st perimeter to be 100 mm from face of column as before. Fig. 9.10,
By inspection of Figure 3.27 the equivalent of 6 locations are available Cl. 9.4.3(4)
at 0.4d from column therefore try 2 × 6 no. H10 = 942 mm2.

By inspection of Figure 3.27 the equivalent of 10 locations are

available at 1.15d from column therefore try 10 H10 = 785 mm2.

By inspection of Figure 3.27 beyond 1.15d to uout grid:

H10 at 175 x 175 OK.

3.4.13 Summary of design

Grid C flexure
End supports:
Column strip: (max. 200 mm
from column) 10 no. H20 U-bars in pairs
(where 200 × 200 hole use 8 no. H20
T1 in U-bars in pairs)
Middle strip: H12 @ 200 T1

Spans 1–2 and 2–3:

Column strip and middle strip: H20 @ 200 B

Central support:
Column strip centre: for 750 mm
either side of support: H20 @ 100 T1
Column strip outer: H20 @ 250 T1
Middle strip: H16 @ 200 T1

Grid 1 (and 3) flexure

Spans:
Column strip: H16 @ 200 B2
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 B2

‡ See Commentary on design Section 3.4.14. Punching shear reinforcement is Cl. 9.4.3
also subject to requirements for minimum reinforcement and spacing of shear
reinforcement.

90
3.4: Flat slab

Interior support:
Column strip centre: 6 no. H20 @ 175 T2
Column strip outer: H12 @ 175 T2
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 T2

Grid 2 flexure
Spans:
Column strip: H16 @ 250 B2
Middle strip: H10 @ 200 B2

Interior support:
Column strip centre: H20 @ 200 T2
Column strip outer: H16 @ 250 T2
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 T2
See Figure 3.26

Punching shear
Internal (e.g. at C2):
Generally, use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm
centres, but double up on 1st perimeter
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st,max = 270 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 767 mm
See Figure 3.26

Edge (e.g. at C1, C3 assuming no holes):

Generally, use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm
centres but double up on 1st perimeter
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st,max = 175 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 940 mm

Edge (e.g. at D1, D3 assuming 200 × 200 hole on face of column):

Generally, use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm
centres but double up on 1st perimeter
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st,max = 175 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 1123 mm
See Figure 3.27

91
C D

10H20 T1 U-bars in pairs @ 200

H12 @ 200 T1 U-bars 6H20 - 175 T2
H12 - 200 T1 U-bars 8H20 T1
U-bars in pairs
@ 200

1
H20 @ 200 B1 H16 @ 175 B2*
5H12 @ 175 T2

H12 @ 300 B2
H10 @ 200 T2

4H16 @ 250 T2

3H20 @
250 T1 H16 @ 175 B2*
2
9H20 @ 175 T2*
16H20 @ 100 T1
3H20 @ 250 T1 3H20 @ 250 T1
H16 @ 200 T1 16H20 @ 100 T1
Note:* Spacing rationalised to suit punching shear links

3.4.14 Commentary on design

a) Method of analysis
The use of coefficients in the analysis would not usually be
advocated in the design of such a slab. Nonetheless, coefficients
may be used and, unsurprisingly, their use leads to higher design
moments and shears, as shown below.

Method Moment in Centre support Centre support

9.6 m span per moment per reaction VEd (kN)
6 m bay (kNm) 6 m bay (kNm)
Coefficients 842.7 952.8 1205
Continuous beam 747.0 885.6 1103
Plane frame columns 664.8 834.0 1060
below
Plane frame columns 616.8 798.0 1031
above and below

92
3.4: Flat slab

D
375 1123
6H20 @ 175 T2
8H20 T1 U-bars in pairs 6H16 @ 175 B2
uout H10 @ 200 T1 U-bars H10 @ 200 T1 U-bars

175
1 1
175 500
u1
175
175
175
1.5d
175 uout
175
175
175
175

Ineffective area
S = 152 H10 legs of links CL
@ 175 mm centres
175 175 175 175 175 175 200 200 175 175 175 175 175 175

100 100

Note: For internal column see Figure 3.23

Figure 3.27 Punching shear links at column D1 (and D3)
(penultimate support without hole similar)

These higher moments and shears result in rather more reinforcement

than when using other more refined methods. For instance, the finite
element analysis used in Guide to the design and construction of
reinforced concrete flat slabs[27] for this bay, leads to:
• H16 @ 200 B1 in spans 1–2 (cf. H20 @ 200 B1 using coefficients)
• H20 @ 125 T1 at support 2 (cf. H20 @ 100 T1 using coefficients)
• 3 perimeters of shear links at C2 for VEd = 1065 kN (cf. 5 perimeters
using coefficients)
• 2 perimeters of shear links at C3 (cf. 7 perimeters using coefficients)
b) Effective spans and face of support
In the analysis using coefficients, advantage was taken of using Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)
effective spans to calculate design moments. This had the effect of
reducing span moments.
At supports, one may base the design on the moment at the face of Cl. 5.3.2.2(3)
support. This is borne out by Guide to the design and construction of
reinforced concrete flat slabs[27] that states that hogging moments
greater than those at a distance hc/3 may be ignored (where hc is the
effective diameter of a column or column head). This is in line with BS
8110[7] and could have been used to reduce support moments.

93
c) Punching shear reinforcement
Arrangement of punching shear links
According to the literal definition of Asw in Exp. (6.52), the same Exp. 6.52
area of shear reinforcement is required for all perimeters inside or
outside perimeter u1 (rather than (Asw/u1)/sr being considered as the
required density of shear reinforcement on and within perimeter u1).
For perimeters inside u1, it might be argued that Exp. (6.50) Exp. 6.50
(enhancement close to supports) should apply. However, at the time
of writing, this expression is deemed applicable only to foundation
bases. Therefore, large concentrations of shear reinforcement
are required close to the columns – in this example, this included
doubling up shear links at the 1st perimeter.
BS 8110:
Similar to BS 8110[7] figure 3.17, it is apparent that the requirement
Fig. 3.17
for punching shear reinforcement is for a punching shear zone 1.5d
wide. However, in Eurocode 2, the requirement has been ‘simplified’ in
BS 8110:
Exp. (6.52) to make the requirement for a perimeter (up to 0.75d
Cl. 3.7.7.6
wide). It might appear reasonable to apply the same 40%:60% rule
(BS 8110 Cl. 3.7.7.6) to the first two perimeters to make doubling
of punching shear reinforcement at the first perimeter unnecessary:
in terms of Eurocode 2 this would mean 80% Asw on the first
perimeter and 120% Asw on the second. Using this arrangement it
would be possible to replace the designed H10 links in the first two
perimeters with single H12 links.
Outside u1, the numbers of links could have been reduced to Cl. 9.4.3(1)
maintain provision of the designed amount of reinforcement Asw.
A rectangular arrangement of H12 links would have been possible
(within perimeter u1, 350 × 175; outside u1, 500 × 175). However, as
the grid would need to change orientation around each column (to
maintain the 0.75d radial spacing) and as the reinforcement in B2
and T2 is essentially at 175 centres, it is considered better to leave
the arrangement as a regular square grid.
Use of shear reinforcement in a radial arrangement, e.g. using stud
rails, would have simplified the shear reinforcement requirements.

VEd/VRd,c
In late 2008, a proposal was made for the UK National Annex to
include a limit of 2.0 or 2.5 on VEd/VRd,c (or vEd/vRd,c) within punching
shear requirements. It is apparent that this limitation could have
major effects on flat slabs supported on relatively small columns. For
instance in Section 3.4.12, edge column with hole, VEd/VRd,c = 2.18.

Curtailment of reinforcement
In this design, the reinforcement would be curtailed and this would be
done either in line with previous examples or, more practically, in line
with other guidance[20, 21].

94
3.5: Stair flight

3.5 Stair flight

This example is for a typical stair flight.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Stair flight Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

1750

600 9 @250 600

3450

Figure 3.28 Stair flight

3.5.1 Loads
kN/m2
Permanent (worse case flight)
Assume 160 waist 0.160 × 305/250 × 25 = 4.88
Treads 4 × 0.25 × 0.175/2 × 25 = 2.19
50 mm screed 0.5 × 22 = 1.10
Finishing = 0.03
gk = 8.20

Variable action: crowd loading qk = 4.00 EC1-1-1: Table 6.1,

6.2 & NA.3
3.5.2 Moment
MEd = (8.20 × 1.25 + 4.00 × 1.5) × 3.452/8
= 24.2 kNm/m

3.5.3 Design
d = 160 – cnom – f/2 Concise: Table 4.2;
where BS 8500
cnom = 25 mm (for XC1)
f = 12 mm (assumed)
∴ d = 129 mm

95
K = MEd/bd2fck = 24.2 × 106/(1000 × 1292 × 30)
= 0.048
z/d = 0.95 Table C5
z = 0.95 × 129
= 122 mm
As = MEd/fydz
= 24.2 × 106/[(500/1.15) × 122]
= 456 mm2/m (r = 0.35%)
Try H12 @ 250 (452 mm2/m) ∴ OK)

3.5.4 Check deflection

Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7,
where Table C10
N = 32.7
K = 1.0 Table C11
F1 = 1.0
F2 = 1.0
F3 = 1.0 (say)
∴ Allowable l/d = 32.7
Actual l/d = 3450/129
= 26.7 ∴ OK
∴ Provide H12 @ 250 B.

96
4.1: Continuous beam on pin supports

4 Beams
4.0 General
The calculations in this Section are presented in the following parts:
4.1 Continuous beam on pin supports – a simply supported continuous beam showing what
might be deemed typical hand calculations.
4.2 A heavily loaded L-beam.
4.3 A continuous wide T-beam. This example is analysed and designed strictly in accordance
with the provisions of Eurocode 2.

They are intended to be illustrative of the Code and not necessarily best practice.

A general method of designing beams is shown below. In practice, several of these steps may
be combined.
■ Determine design life. EC0 & NA
Table NA.2.1
■ Assess actions on the beam. EC1 & NAs
■ Assess durability requirements and determine concrete Table 4.1
strength. BS 8500–1:
Tables A4, A5
■ Check cover requirements for appropriate fire EC2–1–2:
resistance period. Tables 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11
■ Calculate minimum cover for durability, fire and bond Cl. 4.4.1
requirements.
■ Determine which combinations of actions apply. EC0 & NA
Tables NA.A1.1, NA.A1.2 (B)
■ Determine loading arrangements. Cl. 5.1.3(1) & NA
■ Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear Cl. 5.4, 5.5, 5.6
forces.
■ Design flexural reinforcement. Cl. 6.1
■ Check deflection. Cl. 7.4
■ Check shear capacity. Cl. 6.2
■ Other design checks:
Check minimum reinforcement. Cl. 9.3.1.1(1), 9.2.1.1(1)
Check cracking (size or spacing of bars). Cl. 7.3, Tables 7.2N, 7.3N
Check effects of partial fixity. Cl. 9.3.1.2(2)
Check secondary reinforcement. Cl. 9.3.1.1(2), 9.3.1.4(1)
■ Check curtailment. Cl. 9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.3,
Fig. 9.2
■ Check anchorage. Cl. 9.3.1.2, 8.4.4, 9.3.1.1(4),
9.2.1.5(1), 9.2.1.5(2)
■ Check laps. Cl. 8.7.3

97
4.1 Continuous beam on pin supports
This calculation is intended to show a typical hand calculation for a continuous simply
supported beam using coefficients to determine moments and shears.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Continuous beam on pin Checked by web Sheet no. 1
supports Client TCC Date Oct 09

A 450 mm deep × 300 mm wide rectangular beam is required

to support office loads of gk = 30.2 kN/m and qk = 11.5 kN/m
over 2 no. 6 m spans. fck = 30 MPa, fyk = 500 MPa. Assume 300
mm wide supports, a 50-year design life and a requirement for a
2-hour resistance to fire in an external but sheltered environment.

qk = 11.5 kN/m
gk = 30.2 kN/m

6000 6000

Figure 4.1 Continuous rectangular beam

450

300 Figure 4.2 Section through beam

4.1.1 Actions
Permanent gk = 30.2 kN/m and variable qk = 11.5 kN/m

4.1.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom:
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= diameter of bar. Assume 25 mm main bars
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming XC3 (moderate humidity or cyclic wet
and dry) and secondarily XF1 (moderate water

98
4.1: Continuous beam on pin supports

saturation without de-icing salt) using C30/37 Table C3

concrete, BS 8500-1[14]:
cmin,dur = 25 mm Table A4;
How to: Building
structures[8]
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover, Dcdev= 10 mm Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
∴ cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm

Fire:
Check adequacy of section for 2 hours fire resistance (i.e. REI = 120) EC2-1-2:
For bmin = 300 mm, minimum axis distance, a = 35 mm ∴ OK 5.6.3(1),
cnom = 35 mm Table 5.6

4.1.3 Load combination (and arrangement)

Load combination:
By inspection, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs Fig. 2.5
∴ n = 1.25 × 30.2 + 1.5 × 11.5 = 50.8 kN/m EC0: Exp.(6.10b)
Arrangement: Cl. 5.1.3(1) & NA
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded load cases, i.e. use Table NA.1
coefficients. (option b)
Table C3
The coefficients used assume 15% redistribution at supports. As the Table C3
amount of redistribution is less than 20%, there are no restrictions
on reinforcement grade. The use of Table 5.6 in BS EN 1992–1–2 is Cl. 5.5(4) & NA
restricted to where redistribution does not exceed 15%. EC2-1-2:
5.6.3(1),
Table 5.6
4.1.4 Analysis
Design moments:
Spans
MEd = (1.25 × 30.2 × 0.090 + 1.5 × 11.5 × 0.100) × 6.02 Appendix C1,
= 122.3 + 62.1 = 184.4 kNm Table C3
Support
MEd = 50.8 × 0.106 × 6.02 = 193.8 kNm Table C3
Shear force:
VAB = 0.45 × 6.0 × 50.8 = 137.2 kN
VAB = 0.63 × 6.0 × 50.8 = 192.0 kN

4.1.5 Flexural design

Effective depth:
Assuming 10 mm links:
d = 450 − 35 − 10 − 25/2 = 392 mm

99
Flexure in span:
K = MEd/bd2fck = 184.4 × 106/(300 × 3922 × 30) = 0.133 Fig. 3.5
z/d = 0.864 Appendix A1
z = 0.864 × 392 = 338 mm Table C5
As = MEd/fydz = 184.4 × 106/(434.8 × 338) = 1255 mm2
Try 3 no. H25 B (1473 mm2)
(r = 1.25%)
Check spacing:
Spacing of outer bars = 300 – 2 × 35 − 2 × 10 – 25 = 185 mm
Assuming 10 mm diameter link,
∴ spacing = 98 mm
Steel stress under quasi-permanent loading:
ss = (fyk /gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d)
= fyd × (As,req/As,prov) × (gk + c2 qk)/(gGgk + gQqk) (1/d)
= (500/1.15) × (1255/1473) × [(30.2 + 0.3 × 11.5)/50.8] (1/1.03)
= 434.8 × 0.91 × 0.66 × 0.97 = 237 MPa Cl. 7.3.3(2)
As exposure is XC3, max. crack width wmax = 0.3 mm Cl. 7.3.1(5) & NA
∴ Maximum bar size = 16 mm or max. spacing = 200 mm ∴ OK Table 7.2N & NA
∴ Use 3 H25 B (1473 mm2)
Deflection:
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Basic span: effective depth ratio for r = 1.25%: Table 7.4N & NA
l/d = 18 + [(1.25 – 0.5)/(1.5/0.5)] × (26 – 18) = 24.0
Max. span = 24.0 × 392 = 9408 mm ∴ OK

Flexure, support:
MEd = 193.8 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where
d = 450 − 35 − 10 − 25/2 = 392 mm

K = 193.8 × 106/(300 × 3922 × 30) = 0.142

By inspection, K ≤ K' (0.142 × 0.168‡)
∴ no compression reinforcement required.
z = 0.85d Appendix A1
= 0.85 × 392 = 333 mm Table C5
As = MEd/fydz
= 193.8 × 106/434.8 × 333 = 1338 mm2
Try 3 no. H25 T (1473 mm2)
(r = 1.13%)

‡K' is limited to 0.208. However, if, as is usual practice in the UK, x/d is limited to
0.45, z/d is as a consequence limited to 0.82 and K' to 0.168.

100
4.1: Continuous beam on pin supports

4.1.6 Shear
a) Support B (critical)
Shear at central support = 192.0 kN
At d from face of support§
VEd = 192.0 − (0.300/2 + 0.392) × 50.8 = 164.50 kN Cl. 6.2.1(8)
vEd = VEd /bd
= 164.5 × 103/(392 × 300) = 1.40 MPa
Maximum shear capacity:
Assuming fck = 30 MPa and cot y = 2.5#
vRd,max* = 3.64 MPa Table C7
vRd,max > vEd ∴ OK
Shear reinforcement:
Assuming z = 0.9d Cl. 6.2.3(1)
Asw /s ≥ VEd /(0.9d × fywd × cot y) Cl. 6.2.3(3),
≥ 164.5 × 103/(0.9 × 392 × (500/1.15) × 2.5) = 0.429 Exp. (6.8)

More accurately,
Asw/s ≥ VEd/(z × fywd × cot y) Cl. 6.2.3(3),
≥ 164.5 × 103/(333 × 1087) = 0.454 Exp. (6.8)
Minimum shear links,
Asw,min/s = 0.08bwfck0.5/fyk Cl. 9.2.2(5)
= 0.08 × 300 × 300.5/500 = 0.263. Not critical
Max. spacing = 0.75d = 0.75 × 392 = 294 mm Cl. 9.2.2(6)
Use H8 @ 200 (Asw /s = 0.50)
b) Support A (and C)
Shear at end support = 137.2 kN
At face of support,
VEd = 137.2 − (0.150 + 0.392) × 50.8 = 109.7 kN Cl. 6.2.1(8)
By inspection, shear reinforcement required and cot y = 2.5 Fig. C1a)
Asw /s ≥ VEd/(z × fywd × cot y) Appendix C5.3
≥ 109.7 × 103/[353 × (500/1.15) × 2.5] = 0.285
Use H8 @ 200 (Asw /s = 0.50) throughout‡

§
Cl. 6.2.1(8)
Where applied actions are predominantly uniformly distributed, shear may be
checked at d from the face of support. See also Section 4.2.11.
# The absolute maximum for v
Rd,max (and therefore the maximum value of vEd)
would be 5.28 MPa when cot y would equal 1.0 and the variable strut angle would
be at a maximum of 45°.
* For determination of VRd,max see Section 4.2.10.
‡As maximum spacing of links is 294 mm, changing spacing of links would appear
to be of limited benefit.

101
4.1.7 Summary of design
H8 @ 200 centres in 2 legs
3H25

3H25B 3H25B
A B C

Figure 4.3 Continuous rectangular beam: Summary of design

Commentary
It is usually presumed that the detailer would take the design
summarised above and detail the beam to normal best practice[8,9].
The design would go no further where standard detailing is all that
is required. Where the element is non-standard (e.g. where there
are point loads), it should be incumbent on the designer to give
the detailer specific information about curtailment, laps, etc. as
illustrated below. The detailer’s responsibilities, standards and
timescales should be clearly defined but it would be usual for the
detailer to draw and schedule not only the designed reinforcement
but all the reinforcement required to provide a compliant and buildable
solution. The work would usually include the checking the following
aspects and providing appropriate detailing:
• Minimum areas
• Curtailment lengths
• Anchorages
• Laps
• U-bars
• Rationalisation
• Critical dimensions
• Details and sections
The determination of minimum reinforcement areas and curtailment
lengths, using the principles in Eurocode 2 is shown below. In practice
these would be determined from published tables of data or by using
reference texts[8,9]. Nonetheless, the designer should check the
drawing for design intent and compliance with the standards. It is
therefore necessary for the designer to understand and agree the
principles of the detailing used.

4.1.8 Detailing checks

a) Minimum areas
As,min = 0.26(fctm/fyk)btd ≥ 0.0013btd Cl. 9.2.1.1
where

102
4.1: Continuous beam on pin supports

bt = width of tension zone Table 3.1

fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 300 × 392/500 = 177 mm2

b) Curtailment of main bars How to: Detailing

Bottom: curtail
75% main bars 0.08l from end support = 480 mm say 450 mm from A
70% main bars 0.30l – al = 0.3 × 6000 − 1.125 × d
= 1800 − 1.125 × 392
= 1359 mm say 1350 from A
Top: curtail
40% main bars 0.15l + al = 900 + 441
= 1341 mm say 1350 from B
65% main bars 0.30l + al = 1800 + 441
= 2241 mm say 2250 from B
At supports: Cl. 9.2.1.2.(1),
25% of As to be anchored at supports 9.2.1.4(1) & NA
25% of 1225 mm2 = 314 mm2 Cl. 9.2.1.5(1)
Use min. 2 no. H16 (402 mm2) at supports A, B and C
In accordance with SMDSC[9] detail MB1 lap U-bars tension lap with
main steel
= 780 mm (in C30/37 concrete, H12, ‘poor’ bond condition) How to: Detailing
= say 800 mm

c) Summary of reinforcement details

2H12T 3H25 2H12T

100 100
800 1350 1350 800 1250

2H12 2H25 2H12 1H25 1H25 2H12 2H25 2H12

2H16 U-bars 2H16 U-bars
3H25 2H16 2H12 2H25 1H25 1H25 2H25 2H12 2H16 2H25

A B C
450 800 3H25B 800 450
800 600 750 750 600 800
2H16B 3H25B

Links omitted for clarity

Figure 4.4 Continuous rectangular beam: reinforcement details

Note Subsequent detailing checks may find issues with spacing rules especially if
the 'cage and splice bar' method of detailing were to be used. 2H32s T&B would be a
suitable alternative to 3H25s T&B.

103
4.2 Heavily loaded L-beam
Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041
Heavily loaded L-beam Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

Gk2 = 88.7
Qk2 = 138.7
gk1 = 46.0
qk1 = 63.3

A B C
2000
9000 8000

Figure 4.5 Heavily loaded L-beam

This edge beam supports heavy loads from storage loads. The
variable point load is independent of the variable uniformly
distributed load. The beam is supported on 350 mm square
columns 4000 mm long. fck = 30 MPa; fyk = 500 MPa. The
underside surface is subject to an external environment and a
2-hour fire resistance requirement. The top surface is internal
and subject to a 2-hour fire resistance requirement. Assume that
any partitions are liable to be damaged by excessive deflections.

beff

750

Figure 4.6 Section through L-beam

350

4.2.1 Actions
Permanent:
UDL from slab and cladding gk = 46.0 kN/m
Point load from storage area above = 88.7 kN
Variable:
From slab qk = 63.3 kN/m
Point load from storage area above = 138.7 kN

104
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

4.2.2 Cover
a) Nominal cover, cnom, underside and side of beam
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars and
10 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming primarily XC3/XC4 exposure (moderate Table 4.1
humidity or cyclic wet and dry); secondarily XF1 BS 8500-1:
exposure (moderate water saturation without Table A4
de-icing salt, vertical surfaces exposed to rain and
freezing) and C30/37 concrete,
cmin,dur = 25 mm
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
measurement of cover Dcdev = 10 mm

∴ cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars

or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to links
Use cnom = 35 mm to links (giving cnom = 45 mm to main bars)

b) Fire
Check adequacy of section for 2 hours fire resistance REI 120. EC2-1-2: 5.6.3
By inspection, web thickness OK. EC2-1-2:
Table 5.6
Axis distance, a, required = 35 mm OK by inspection. EC2-1-2:
Table 5.6
∴ Try 35 mm nominal cover bottom and sides to 10 mm link.

Nominal cover, cnom, top:

By inspection, Exp. (4.1)
cnom = cmin + Dcdev
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars and
10 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions. Table 4.1
Assuming primarily XC1 and C30/37 concrete, BS 8500-1:
cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4

105
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)

measurement of cover Dcdev = 10 mm
∴ cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars
or = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to links
Use cnom = 35 mm to links (giving cnom = 45 mm to main bars)

4.2.3 Idealisation, load combination and arrangement

Load combination: Table 2.5;
As loads are from storage, Exp. (6.10a) is critical. ECO: A1.2.2, NA
& Exp. (6.10a)
Idealisation:
This element is treated as a continuous beam framing into Cl. 5.3.1(3)
columns 350 × 350‡ × 4000 mm long columns below.
Arrangement: Cl. 5.1.3(1) &
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded. NA: Table NA.1
(option b)
4.2.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer (spreadsheet TCC 41 Continuous Beam (A+D).xls ECO:
in RC spreadsheets V.3[28] assuming frame action with 350 mm square A1.2.2 & NA;
columns 4 m long fixed at base. Beam inertia based on T-section, beff Cl. 5.3.1 (6)
wide) with 15% redistribution at central support, limited redistribution
of span moment and consistent redistribution of shear.
Table 4.2 Elastic and redistributed moments, kNm
Span number 1 2
Elastic M 1168 745
Redistributed M 1148 684
d 0.98 0.92
2000
1394 kNm
1500

1000

500
195 kNm 108 kNm
0
A B C
–500
– 684 kNm
–1000
–1148 kNm
– 1500

‡ Note:
350 × 350 is a minimum for columns requiring a fire resistance of 120 EC2-1-2:
minutes. Table 5.2a

106
1000
646 kN 794 kN
500

0
A B C

– 500
– 499 kN

– 1000
– 1098 kN

– 1500

Figure 4.8 Redistributed shears, kN

4.2.5 Flexural design, support A

MEd = 195 kNm in hogging Cl. 9.2.1.2(1),
MEd,min = 1148 × 0.25 in hogging and in sagging 9.2.1.4(1) & NA
= 287 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where Cl. 5.3.2.1,
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs/2
l0 = nominal: assume 0§
∴ beff1 = 0 mm = beff2 Fig. 5.2
∴b = bw = 350 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32/2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in support.
fck = 30 MPa
K = 287 × 106/(350 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.058
Restricting x/d to 0.45 Appendix A1
K' = 0.168
K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression reinforcement
required.
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1
= (689/2) (1 + 0.89) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 652 ≤ 654 ∴ z = 652 mm
As = MEd/fydz
Cl. 5.3.2.1(2)
§ The distance l0 is described as the distance between points of zero moment, Fig. 5.2
‘which may be obtained from Figure 5.2’. In this case l0 = 0. (see Figure 4.11). Fig. 4.11
107
where
fyd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 287 × 106/(434.8 × 652) = 1012 mm2
Try 2 no. H32 U-bars (1608 mm2)
Check anchorage of H32 U-bars.
Bars need to be anchored distance ‘A’ into column SMDSC: 6.4.2

U-bar

Figure 4.9 Distance A

Assuming column uses 35 mm cover, 10 mm links and 32 mm bars:

Distance A = 2 [350 − 2 (35 + 10) ] − 32/2 − 32/2 + 750 – [2 (35 SMDSC[9],
+ 10)] − 2 × 32/2 – (4 − π) (3.5 + 0.5) × 32 BS 8666[19]:
= 488 + 628 – 110 = 1006 mm Table 2
Anchorage length, Cl. 8.4.4,
lbd = alb,rqd ≥ lb,min Exp. (8.4)
where
a = conservatively 1.0
lb,rqd = (f/4) (ssd/fbd) Exp. (8.3)
where
f = 32
ssd = design stress in the bar at the ULS
= 434.8 × 1012/1608 = 274 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress
= 2.25 n1 n2 fct,d Cl. 8.4.2 (2)

108
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

where
n1 = 1.0 for good bond conditions
n2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm
fct,d = act fctk/ gC Cl. 3.1.6 (2),
= 1.0 × 2.0/1.5 Tables 3.1 & 2.1,
& NA
= 1.33 MPa
fbd = 2.25 × 1.33 = 3.0 MPa
lb,rqd = (32/4) (274/3.0) = 731 mm‡
lb,min = max[10f; 100 mm] = 250 mm
∴ lbd = 731 mm i.e. < 1006 mm ∴ OK
Use 2 no. H32 U-bars

4.2.6 Flexural design, span AB

a) Span AB – Flexure
MEd = 1148 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where Cl. 5.3.2.1,
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs/2
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc
= (7000 – 350)/2 = 3325 mm
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 9000 = 7650 mm§ Fig. 5.2

beff

beff,1 beff,2
bw

bw
b1 b1 b2 b2

beff Fig. 5.3

‡Anchorage lengths may be obtained from published tables. In this instance, a

figure of 900 mm may be obtained from Table 13 of Section 10 of How to design
concrete structures using Eurocode 2. How to:
§ Thedistance l0 is described as the distance between points of zero shear, which Detailing[8]
may be obtained from Figure 5.2’. From the analysis, l0 could have been taken as Cl. 5.3.2.1(2)
7200 mm. Figure 5.2

109
I0 = 0.85 I1 I0 = 0.15 (I1+I2) I0 = 0.7 I2 I0 = 0.15 (I2+I3)
I1 I2 I3

Figure 4.11 Elevation showing definition of l0 for calculation of

flange width Fig. 5.2
beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 7650 ≤ 0.2 × 7650 ≤ 3325
= 1430 ≤ 1530 ≤ 3325
= 1430 mm
bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = 0 mm
beff2 = 0 mm
b = 1430 + 350 + 0 = 1780 mm
d = effective depth
= 750 − 35 – 10 – 32/2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in span
fck = 30 MPa
K = 1148 × 106/(1780 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.045
Restricting x/d to 0.45, Appendix A1
K' = 0.168
K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required.
z = lever arm Appendix A1
= (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d
= (689/2) (1 + 0.917) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 661 ≤ 654 ∴ z = 654 mm
But z = d – 0.4x
Appendix A1
∴ by inspection, neutral axis is in flange and as x < 1.25 hf , design as
rectangular section.
As = MEd/fydz
where
fyd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 1148 × 106/(434.8 × 654) = 4037 mm2
Try 5 no. H32 B (4020 mm2) (say OK)
Check spacing of bars.
Spacing of bars = [350 – 2 × (35 + 10) – 32]/(5 – 1)
= 57
Clear spacing = 57 – 32 mm = 25 mm between bars

110
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

Minimum clear distance between bars Cl. 8.2(2) & NA

= max[bar diameter; aggregate size + 5 mm]
= max[32; 20 + 5]
= 32 mm i.e. > 25 mm
∴ 5 no. H32 B no good
For 4 bars in one layer, distance between bars = 44 mm so
Try 4 no. H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3

300

35 cover
400
32 bar
32 spacers
32 bar
10 link
35 cover
350

Figure 4.12 Span AB bottom reinforcement

d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32/2 – 0.333 × 2 × 32 = 668 mm

K = 1148 × 106/(1780 × 6682 × 30) = 0.048
K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression reinforcement
required. Appendix A1

z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1

= (668/2) (1 + 0.911) ≤ 0.95 × 668
= 639 ≤ 635 ∴ z = 635 mm

∴ by inspection, neutral axis in flange so design as rectangular Appendix A1

section.

As = MEd/fydz
= 1148 × 106/(434.8 × 635) = 4158 mm2
∴ 4 no. H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3 (4824 mm2) OK

b) Span AB – Deflection
Check end span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7
where
N = Basic l/d: check whether r > r0 and whether to use Exp. Cl. 7.4.2(2),
(7.16a) or (7.16b) Exp. (7.16a),
Exp. (7.16b)

111
r = As/Ac‡ = As,req/[bwd + (beff – bw)hf] PD 6687[6]
= 4158/[350 × 668 + (1780 – 350) × 300]
= 4158/662800
= 0.63%
r0 = fck0.5/1000 = 300.5/1000 = 0.55%
r > r0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16b)

N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5 r0/(r – r') + fck0.5(r' /r0)0.5/12 Exp. (7.16b)

= 11 + 1.5 (300.5 × 0.055/(0.063 – 0) + 300.5(0/0.55)1.5
= 11 + 7.2 + 0 = 18.2
K = (end span) = 1.3 Table 7.4N & NA
F1 = (beff/bw = 1780/350 = 5.1) = 0.80 Cl. 7.4.2(2),
Appendix C7
F2 = 7.0/leff (span > 7.0 m) Cl. 7.4.2(2)
where
leff = 9000 mm Cl. 5.3.2.2(1)
F2 = 7.0/9.0 = 0.77
F3 = 310/ss ≤ 1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp.
(7.17), Table 7.4N
& NA, Table NA.5
Note 5
where
ss in simple situations = (fyk/gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ Appendix B
ULS loads) (1/d). However in this case separate analysis
at SLS would be required to determine ss. Therefore as a
simplification use the conservative assumption:
310/ss = (500/fyk) (As,req/As,prov) Exp. (7.17)
= (500/500) × (4824/4158) = 1.16
∴ Permissible l/d = 18.2 × 1.3 × 0.80 × 0.77 × 1.16 = 16.9
Actual l/d = 9000/668 = 13.5
Permissible more than actual
∴ OK
∴ 4 no. H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3 (4824 mm2) OK

4.2.7 Flexural design, support B

At centreline of support B,
M = 1394 kNm

From analysis, at face of support Cl. 5.3.2.2(3)

MEdBA = 1209 kNm
MEdBC = 1315 kNm
K = MEd/bwd 2fck

‡ 2.18 of PD 6687[6] suggests that r in T sections should be based on the area

of concrete above the centroid of the tension steel.

112
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

where
bw = 350 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 12 – 32/2 = 687 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in support but allowing for
H12 T in slab
fck = 30 MPa
∴ K = 1315 × 106/(350 × 6872 × 30) = 0.265
for d = 0.85, K' = 0.168: to restrict x/d to 0.45, K' = 0.167 Appendix A1
∴ Compression steel required Table C4
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K')0.5]
= (687/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.167)0.5]
= (687/2) (1 + 0.64) < 0.95d
= 563 mm
As2 = (K – K')fckbd2/fsc(d − d2) Fig. 3.5,
where Appendix A1,
d2 = 35 + 10 + 32/2 = 61 mm How to: Beams
fsc = 700(x − d2)/x < fyd
where
x = 2.5 (d – z) = 2.5 (687 – 563) = 310 mm
fsc = 700 × (310 − 61)/310 < 500/1.15
= 562 MPa but limited to ≤ 434.8 MPa
∴As2 = (0.265 – 0.167) × 30 × 350 × 687 2/[434.8(687 − 61) ] = 1784 mm2
Try 4 no. H25 B (1964 mm2)
As = M'/fydz + As2 fsc/fyd Appendix A1
= K' fck bd 2 /(f yd z) + As2 fsc/fyd
= 0.167 × 30 × 350 × 6872/(434.8 × 563) + 1570 ×
434.8/434.8
= 3380 + 1784 = 5164 mm2
Try 4 no. H32 T + 4 no. H25 T (5180 mm2)
This reinforcement should be spread over beff. Cl. 9.2.1.2(2),
beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Fig. 9.1
Cl. 5.3.2.1,
Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs/2.
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc
= (7000 – 350)/2 = 3325 mm
l0 = 0.15 × (l1 + l2) Fig. 5.2
= 0.15 × (9000 + 8000) = 2550 mm

113
∴beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 2550 ≤ 0.2 × 2550 ≤ 3325
= 920 ≤ 510 ≤ 3325
= 510 mm
bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = 0 mm
beff2 = 0 mm
∴ beff = 510 + 350 + 0 = 860 mm
Use 4 no. H32 T + 4 no. H25 T (5180 mm2) @ approx 100 mm cc

beff = 860 mm

4H32 4H25

4H25

bw = 350 mm

Figure 4.13 Support

pp B reinforcement

4.2.8 Flexural design, span BC

a) Span BC – Flexure
MEd = 684 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Cl. 5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs/2.
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc
= (7000 – 350)/2 = 3325 mm Fig. 5.2
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 8000 = 6800 mm
beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 6800 ≤ 0.2 × 6800 ≤ 3325
= 1345 ≤ 1360 ≤ 3325
= 1360 mm

114
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = 0 mm
beff2 = 0 mm
∴ b = 1360 + 350 + 0 = 1710 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32/2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in span.
fck = 30 MPa
∴ K = 684 × 106/ (1710 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.028
By inspection, K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression Appendix A1
reinforcement required.
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1
= (689/2) (1 + 0.95) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 672 > 655 ∴ z = 655 mm
By inspection, x < 1.25 hf ; design as rectangular section Appendix A1

As = MEd/fydz
= 684 × 106/(434.8 × 655) = 2402 mm2
Try 2 no. H32 B + 2 no. H25 B (2590 mm2)
b) Span BC – Deflection
By inspection, compared with span AB OK

4.2.9 Flexural design, support C

By inspection, use 2 no. H25 U-bars as support A.
Use 2 no. H25 U-bars

4.2.10 Design for beam shear, support A

At d from face of support
VEd = 646 − (350/2 + 0.689) × (1.35 × 46.0 + 1.5 × 63.3) Cl. 6.2.1(8)
ECO: A1.2.2, NA
& Exp. (6.10a)
= 646 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 510.3 kN
Check maximum shear resistance.
VRd, max = acw bw zvfcd/(cot y + tan y) Exp. (6.9) & NA
where
acw = 1.0 Cl. 6.2.3 & NA
bw = 350 mm as before
z = 0.9d Cl. 6.2.3(1)

115
v = 0.6 (1 − fck/250) = 0.6 (1 − 30/250) = 0.528 Cl. 6.2.3(3)
Note 1, Exp.
(6.6N) & NA
fcd = 30/1.5 = 20.0 MPa Cl. 2.4.2.4(1) & NA
y = angle of inclination of strut. Exp. (6.9),
= 0.5 sin−1 {vEd,z /[0.20 fck (1 – fck /250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5 Appendix A2
where
vEd,z = VEd/bz = VEd /(b × 0.9d)
= 510.3 × 103/(350 × 0.9 × 689) = 2.35 MPa
y = 0.5 sin−1 {2.35/[0.20 × 30 (1 – 30/250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5
= 0.5 sin−1 (0.445) ≥ cot−12.5
= 0.5 × 26.4° ≥ 21.8°
= 21.8°
∴ VRd,max = 1.0 × 350 × 0.90 × 689 × 0.528 × 20.0/(2.5 + 0.4) = 790 kN
∴ OK
Shear reinforcement:
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw /s) z fywd cot y Exp. (6.8)
∴ Asw /s ≥ VEd/z fywd cot y
where
Asw/s = area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before Cl. 2.4.2.4(1)
fywd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 & NA
cot y = 2.5 as before
Asw/s ≥ 510.3 × 103/(0.9 × 689 × 434.8 × 2.5) = 0.76
Minimum Asw/s = rw,minbwsin a Cl. 9.2.2(5),
Exp. (9.4)
where
rw,min = 0.08 × fck0.5/fyk = 0.08 × 300.5/500 Exp. (9.5N) & NA
= 0.00088
bw = 350 mm as before
a = angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal
axis. For vertical reinforcement sin a = 1.0

∴ Minimum Asw/s = 0.00088 × 350 × 1 = 0.03

But,
maximum spacing of links longitudinally = 0.75d = 516 mm Cl. 9.2.2(6)
∴ Try H10 @ 200 cc in 2 legs (Asw /s = 0.78)

4.2.11 Design for high beam shear, support B

As uniformly distributed load predominates consider at d from
face of support. Cl. 6.2.1(8)

116
4.2: Heavily loaded L-beam

VEd = 1098 − (350/2 + 0.689) × (1.35 × 46.0 + 1.5 × 63.3)

= 1098 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 962.3 kN
By inspection, shear reinforcement required and cot y < 2.5.

Check VRd, max (to determine y)

Check maximum shear resistance.
As before,
VRd, max = acw bw zvfcd/(cot y + tan y). Exp. (6.9) & NA
where
acw, bw, z, v and fcd as before
y = 0.5 sin−1 {vEd,z/[0.20 fck (1 – fck/250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5 Exp. (6.9)
where
vEd,z = VEd/bz = VEd/(b0.9d) Cl. 6.2.3(1)
= 962.3 × 103/(350 × 0.9 × 687) = 4.45 MPa
y = 0.5 sin−1 {4.45/[0.20 × 30 (1 – 30/250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5 Exp. (6.9)
= 0.5 sin−1 (0.843) ≥ cot−12.5
= 0.5 × 57.5° ≥ 21.8°
= 28.7°
cot y = 1.824 i.e. > 1.0 ∴OK Cl. 6.2.3(2) & NA
tan y = 0.548
∴ VRd,max = 1.0 × 350 × 0.90 × 687 × 0.528 × 20.0/(1.824 + 0.548)
= 963.4 kN OK
(i.e. VRd,max ≈ VEd)
Shear reinforcement:
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw/s)zfywd cot y Exp. (6.8)
∴ Asw/s ≥ VEd/zfywd cot y
Asw/s ≥ 962.3 × 103/(0.9 × 687 × 434.8 × 1.824) = 1.96
∴ Use H10 @ 150 cc in 4 legs (Asw /s = 2.09)

4.2.12 Design for beam shear (using design chart),

support BC
At d from face of support, Cl. 6.2.1(8)
VEd = 794 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 658.3 kN
vEd,z = VEd/bz = VEd/(b0.9d)
= 658.3 × 103/ (350 × 0.9 × 687) = 3.04 MPa
From chart Asw /sreqd/m width = 2.75 Fig. C1b)
Asw /sreqd = 2.75 × 0.35 = 0.96
∴ Use H10 in 2 legs @ 150 mm cc (Asw/s = 1.05)

117
4.2.13 Check shear capacity for general case
In mid span use H10 in 2 legs @ 300 mm cc (Asw/s = 0.52)
≡ Asw/sreqd/m width = 1.48 and an allowable vEd,z = 1.60 MPa Fig. C1b)
≡ 1.60 × 350 × 0.90 × 687 = VEd = 346 kN

From analysis, VEd = 346.2 kN occurs at:

(646 − 346)/157.1 = 1900 mm from A,
(1098 – 346 − 1.25 × 88.7 – 1.5 × 138.7)/157.1 = 2755 mm from BA,
(794 − 346)/157.1 = 2850 mm from BC
and
(499 − 346)/157.1 = 970 mm from C

4.2.14 Summary of design

1

H10 links in 2 legs @ 150cc

2H32 U-bars 4H32 + 4H25T 2H25 U-bars
H10 links in 2 legs

@ 150 @ 300 @ 150 @ 150 @ 300 @ 150

4H32 B1 + 2H32 B3 4H25B 2H32 + 2H25B

A B C
1950 2850 2850 1050

Figure 4.14 Summary of L-beam design

4H32 4H25

H10 in 4 legs
@ 150

350 510

Figure 4.15 L-beam section 1–1

118
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

4.3 Continuous wide T-beam

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041
Continuous wide T-beam Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

qk = 45.8 kN/m
gk = 47.8 kN/m

A B C D E
7500 7500 7500 7500

Figure 4.16 Continuous wide T-beam

This central spine beam supports the ribbed slab in Example 3.3.
The 300 mm deep ribbed slab is required for an office to support
a variable action of 5 kN/m2. The beam is the same depth as the
slab and is supported on 400 mm square columns, see Figure
4.17. fck = 35 MPa; fyk = 500 MPa. A 1-hour fire resistance is
required in an internal environment. Assume that partitions are
liable to be damaged by excessive deflections.
CL

100
200

1000 200 800

Figure 4.17 Section through T-beam

4.3.1 Actions
Permanent, UDL‡:
From analysis of slab, gk = 47.8 kN/m
Variable:
From analysis of slab, qk = 45.8 kN/m

‡ The actions may also have been estimated assuming an elastic reaction factor
of 1.1 for the slab viz:
kN/m
Permanent: UDL
Loads from ribbed slab (7.50 + 9.0)/2 × 4.30 × 1.1 = 39.0
Self-weight/patch load extra over solid 2.0 × 4.17 = 8.3
47.3
Variable:
Imposed (7.50 + 9.0)/2 × 5.00 × 1.1 = 45.4

119
4.3.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom:
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= diameter of bar. Assume 25 mm main bars and
8 mm links Table 4.1
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions. BS 8500-1;
Assuming XC1 and C30/37 concrete, cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Dcdev = 10 mm Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
∴ cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to links
or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to main bars
Use 10 mm diameter links to give cnom = 35 mm to main bars
and 25 mm to links (as per ribbed slab design).
Fire: EC2-1-2: 5.6.3
Check adequacy of section for REI 60. EC2-1-2:
Table 5.6
Axis distance required:
Minimum width bmin = 120 mm with a = 25 mm EC2-1-2:
or bmin = 200 mm with a = 12 mm Table 5.6
∴ at 2000 mm wide (min.) a < 12 mm
By inspection, not critical.
Use 25 mm nominal cover to links

4.3.3 Idealisation, load combination and arrangement

Load combination:
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. Fig. 2.5
47.8 × 1.25 + 45.8 × 1.5 = 128.5 kN/m‡ EC0: Exp. (6.10b)
Idealisation:
This element is treated as a beam on pinned supports.
The beam will be provided with links to carry shear and to
accommodate the requirements of Cl. 9.2.5 – indirect support of
the ribbed slab described in Section 3.3.8.

Arrangement: Cl. 5.1.3(1) &

Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded. NA: Table NA.1
(option b)

‡ cf. 126.7 kN/m from analysis of slab (63.2 kN/m + 63.5 kN/m). See Figure 3.12.

120
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

4.3.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer, assuming simple supports and including EC0: A1.2.2 &
15% redistribution at supports (with in this instance consequent NA;
redistribution in span moments). Cl. 5.3.1 (6)
5.3.1(6)
Table 4.3 Elastic and redistributed moments, kNm
Span number 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 641.7 433.0 433.0 641.7
Redistributed M 606.4 393.2 393.2 606.4
d 0.945 0.908 0.908 0.945

800
657.4 kNm 657.4 kNm
600
516.0 kNm
400

200

A B C D E
– 200

– 400
– 393.2 kNm – 393.2 kNm
– 600
– 606.4 kNm – 606.4 kNm
– 800

Figure 4.18 Redistributed envelope, kNm

800

600 569.1 kN
517.9 kN
462.6 kN
394.6 kN
400

200

A B C D E
– 200

– 400
– 395.6 kN
– 462.6 kN
– 517.9 kN
– 600 – 569.1 kN

– 800

Figure 4.19 Redistributed shears, kN

121
4.3.5 Flexural design, span AB
a) Span AB (and DE) – Flexure
MEd = 606.4 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where Cl. 5.3.2.1,
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs/2
Referring to Figures 3.8 and 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 − 550)/2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 7500 = 6375 mm Fig. 5.2
beff1 = 0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 6375 ≤ 0.2 × 6375 ≤ 2975
= 1232 ≤ 1275 ≤ 2975
= 1232 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = distance between webs/2.
Referring to Figures 3.8 and 3.9
= (9000 – 1000 − 550)/2 = 3725 mm
l0 = 6375 mm as before
beff2 = 0.2 × 3725 + 0.1 × 6375 ≤ 0.2 × 6375 ≤ 3725
= 1382 ≤ 1275 ≤ 3725
= 1275 mm

b = 1232 + 2000 + 1275 = 4507 mm

d = 300 − 25 – 10 – 25/2 = 252 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H25 in span.

fck = 35 MPa
K = 606.4 × 106/(4507 × 2522 × 35)
= 0.061
K' = 0.207 Appendix A1
or restricting x/d to 0.45
K' = 0.168
K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required.
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1
= (252/2) (1 + 0.886) ≤ 0.95 × 252
= 238 ≤ 239 ∴ z =238 mm

122
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

But z = d – 0.4 x Appendix A1

∴ x = 2.5(d – z) = 2.5( 252 − 236) = 32 mm
∴ neutral axis in flange.
Asx < 1.25hf design as rectangular section.

As = MEd/fydz
where
fyd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 606.4 × 106/(434.8 × 239) = 5835 mm2
Try 12 no. H25 B (5892 mm2)
b) Span AB – Deflection
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7
where Cl. 7.4.2(2),
N = Basic l/d: check whether r > r0 and whether to use Exp. Exp. (7.16a),
(7.16a) or (7.16b) Exp. (7.16b)
r = As/Ac‡ = As,req/[bw d + (beff – bw)hf] PD 6687[6]
= 5835/[2000 × 252 + (4507 – 2000) × 100]
= 5835/754700
= 0.77%
r0 = fck0.5/1000 = 300.5/1000 = 0.59%
r > r0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16b)
N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5 r0/(r – r') + fck0.5(r'/r0)0.5/12 Exp. (7.16b)
= 11 + 1.5 (350.5 × 0.059/(0.077 – 0) + 350.5(0/0.59)1.5
= 11 + 6.8 + 0 = 17.8
K = (end span) = 1.3 Table 7.4N & NA
F1 = (beff/bw = 4057/2000 = 2.03) = 0.90 Cl. 7.4.2(2),
Appendix C7
F2 = 7.0/leff (span > 7.0 m) Cl. 7.4.2(2),
where 5.3.2.2(1)
leff = 7100 + 2 × 300/2 = 7400 mm
F2 = 7.0/7.4 = 0.95
F3 = 310/ss ≤1.5 Cl. 7.4.2, Exp.
(7.17), Table 7.4N
where§ & NA, Table NA.5
ss = (fyk/gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d) Note 5
= 434.8 × (5835/5892) [(47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8)/(1.25 ×
47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8)] × (1/0.945)
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.48 × 1.06
= 219 MPa

‡2.18 of PD 6687[6] suggests that r in T sections should be based on the area

of concrete above the centroid of the tension steel.
§ See Appendix B1.5

123
F3 = 310/ss
= 310/219 = 1.41
∴ Permissible l/d = 17.8 × 1.3 × 0.90 × 0.95 × 1.41 = 27.9
Actual l/d = 7500/252 = 29.8 ∴ no good
Try 13 no. H25 B (6383 mm2)
F3 = 310/ss
= 310/219 × 13/12 = 1.53‡ = say 1.50
∴ Permissible l/d = 17.8 × 1.3 × 0.90 × 0.95 × 1.50 = 29.7
Actual leff /d = 7400/252 = 29.4 Say OK
Use 13 no. H25 B (6383 mm2)

4.3.6 Flexural design, support B (and D)

At centreline of support:
M = 657.4 kNm
At face of support: Cl. 5.3.2.2(3)
MEd = 657.4 – 0.2 × 517.9 + 0.202 × 128.5/2
= 657.4 – 101.0
= 556.4 kNm
K = MEd/bwd2fck
where
bw = 2000 mm
d = 300 − 25 cover − 12 fabric − 8 link – 16 bar − 25/2 bar
= 226 mm

25 cover
12 fabric
8 link
16 bar

16 bar
20 bar 25 bar
8 link 8 link
25 cover 25 cover

Figure 4.20 Section at rib-beam interface

K = 556.4 × 106/(2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.156

By inspection, K < K'
K' = 0.167 maximum (or for d = 0.85, K' = 0.168) Appendix A1
∴ No compression steel required. Table C.4

‡ Both A
s,prov/As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or Exp.
NA, Table NA.5
(7.16b) is restricted to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA.

124
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

z = (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 K')0.5]

= (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.156)0.5]
= (226/2) (1 + 0.67) < 0.95d
= 189 mm
As = MEd/fydz
= 556.4 × 106/(434.8 × 189) = 6770 mm2
Try 14 no. H25 T (6874 mm2)
To be spread over beff Cl. 9.2.1.2(2),
Fig. 9.1
beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Cl. 5.3.2.1,
Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 referring to Figure 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 – 550)/2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.15 × (l1 + l2) = 0.15 × (7500 + 7500) = 2250 mm
beff1 = 0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 2250 ≤ 0.2 × 2250 ≤ 2975
= 820 ≤ 450 ≤ 2975 Fig. 5.2
= 450 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = 450 mm as before
∴ beff = 450 + 2000 + 450 = 2900 mm
Check cracking: Cl. 7.3.3
Spacing = 2900 – 2 × (25 – 10 – 25/2)/(14 − 1) = 216 mm
ss = (fyk/gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d)
= 434.8 × (6770/6874) [ (47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8)/
(1.25 × 47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8) × (1/0.85)
= 434.8 × 0.98 × 0.48 × 1.18 = 241 MPa
As loading is the cause of cracking satisfy either Table 7.2N or Table 7.3N Cl. 7.3.3(2) &
Note
For wk = 0.4 and ss = 240 MPa max. spacing = 250 mm ∴ OK Table 7.3N

4.3.7 Flexural design, span BC (and CD similar)

a) Flexure
MEd = 393.2 kNm
K = MEd/bd2fck
where Cl. 5.3.2.1,
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 Fig. 5.3
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2l0 ≤ b1

125
where
b1 referring to Figure 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 – 550)/2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.70 × l2 = 0.7 × 7500 = 5250 mm
beff1 = 0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 5250 ≤ 0.2 × 5250 ≤ 2975 Fig. 5.2
= 1120 ≤ 1050 ≤ 2975
= 1050 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2l0 ≤ b2

where
b2 = distance between webs/2
Referring to Figures 3.8 and 3.9
= (9000 – 1000 – 550)/2 = 3725 mm
l0 = 5250 mm as before

beff2 = 0.2 × 3725 + 0.1 × 5250 ≤ 0.2 × 5250 ≤ 3725

= 1270 ≤ 1050 ≤ 3725
= 1270 mm

b = 1050 + 2000 + 1270 = 4320 mm

d = 252 mm as before
assuming 10 mm link and H25 in span
fck = 30
K = 393.2 × 106/(4320 × 2522 × 35)
= 0.041
By inspection, K ≤ K' ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression Appendix A1
reinforcement required.
z = (d/2) [1 + (1 – 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d Appendix A1
= (252/2) (1 + 0.924) ≤ 0.95 × 252
= 242 > 239 ∴ z = 239 mm
By inspection, x < 1.25 hf ∴ design as rectangular section Appendix A1
As = MEd/fydz
= 393.2 × 106/(434.8 × 239) = 3783 mm2
Try 8 no. H25 B (3928 mm2)
b) Deflection
By inspection, compared to span AB OK
But for the purposes of illustration:
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio. Appendix B
Allowable l/d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 Appendix C7
where
N = Basic l/d: check whether to use Exp. (7.16a) or (7.16b) Cl. 7.4.2(2)

126
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

r0 = 0.59% (for fck = 35)

r = As/Ac‡ = As,req /[bwd + (beff – bw)hf]
where
bw = 2000 mm
r = 3783/(2000 × 252 + (4320 – 2000) × 100)
= 3783/736000
= 0.51%
r < r0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16a)
N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5 r0 /r + 3.2fck0.5(r0 /r – 1)1.5 Exp. (7.16a)
= 11 + 1.5 × 350.5 × 0.059/0.051 + 3.2 × 350.5(0.059/0.051 – 1)1.5
= 11 + 10.2 + 23.5 = 17.8
= 44.7
K = (internal span) = 1.5 Table 7.4N & NA
F1 = (beff/bw = 4320/2000 = 2.16) = 0.88 Cl. 7.4.2(2),
Appendix C7
F2 = 7.0/leff = 7.0/7.4 = (span > 7.0 m) = 0.95 Cl. 7.4.2(2)
F3 = 310/ss ≤1.5 Cl. 7.4.2,
Exp. (7.17)
Table 7.4N, &
NA, Table NA.5
Note 5
where§
ss = (fyk/gS) (As,req/As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1/d)
= 434.8 × (3783/3828) [(47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8)/(1.25 ×
47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8)] × (1/0.908)
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.48 × 1.10
= 227 MPa
F3 = 310/ ss
= 310/227 = 1.37
∴ Permissible l/d = 44.7 × 1.37 × 0.88 × 0.95 × 1.37 = 70.1
Actual l/d = 7500/252 = 29.8 ∴ OK
Use 8 no. H25 B (3928 mm2)#

c) Hogging
Assuming curtailment of top reinforcement at 0.30l + al, How to: Detailing
From analysis MEd
at 0.3l from BC (& DC) = 216.9 kNm
at 0.3l from CB (& CD) = 185.6 kNm
K = 216.9 × 106/(2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.061
By inspection, K < K'
‡ 2.18 of PD 6687[6] suggests that r in T sections should be based on the area

of concrete above the centroid of the tension steel.

§See Appendix B1.5
# 12 no. H20 B (3768 mm2) used to suit final arrangement of links.

127
z = (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 K')0.5]
= (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.061)0.5]
= (226/2) (1 + 0.89) < 0.95d
= 214 mm < 215 mm
As = MEd/fydz
= 216.9 × 106/(434.8 × 214) = 2948 mm2
Use 12 no. H20 T (3748 mm2)
(to suit links and bottom steel)
Top steel at supports may be curtailed down to 12 no. H20 T at Cl. 9.2.1.3(2)
0.3l + al = 0.3 × 7500 + 1.25 × 214 = 2518 say 2600 mm from
centreline of support.

4.3.8 Flexural design, support C

At centreline of support,
M = 516.0 kNm
At face of support, Cl. 5.3.2.2(3)
MEd = 516.0 – 0.2 × 462.6 + 0.202 × 128.5/2
= 516.0 – 90.0
= 426.0 kNm
K = MEd/bwd2fck
where
bw = 2000 mm
d = 226 mm as before

K = 426.0 × 106/(2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.119

By inspection, K < K'

z = (226/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5]
= (226/2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.119)0.5]
= (226/2) (1 + 0.76) < 0.95d
= 199 mm

As = MEd/fydz
= 426.0 × 106/(434.8 × 199) = 4923 mm2
Try 10 no. H25 T (4910 mm2)‡

4.3.9 Design for beam shear

a) Support A (and E)
At d from face of support,
VEd = 394.6 − (0.400/2 + 0·252) × 128.5 = 336.5 kN Cl. 6.2.1(8)
Maximum shear resistance:
By inspection, VRd,max OK and cot y = 2.5

‡ 12 no. H25 used to suit final arrangement of links.

128
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

However, for the purpose of illustration: check shear capacity,

VRd,max = acw bw zvfcd/ (cot y + tan y)

where Exp. (6.9) & NA

acw = 1.0
bw = 2000 mm as before
z = 0.9d
v = 0.6 [1 − fck/250] = 0.516 Cl. 6.2.3(1)
fcd = 35/1.5 = 23.3 MPa
y = angle of inclination of strut.
By inspection, cot−1 y << 21.8. But cot y restricted to Cl. 6.2.3(2)
2.5 and ∴ tan y = 0.4. & NA
VRd,max = 1.0 × 2000 × 0.90 × 252 × 0.516 × 23.3/(2.5 + 0·4)
= 2089.5 kN
∴ OK
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw/s) z fywd cot y ≥ VEd Exp. (6.8)
∴ for VEd ≤ VRd,s
Asw /s ≥ VEd/z fywd cot y
where
Asw /s = area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before
fywd = 500/1.15 = 434.8
cot y = 2.5 as before
Asw /s ≥ 336.5 × 103/(0.9 × 252 × 434.8 × 2.5) = 1.36 Cl. 9.2.2(5),
Minimum Asw /s = rw,minbwsin a Exp. (9.4)
where
rw,min = 0.08 × fck0.5/fyk = 0.08 × 350.5/500 = 0.00095 Exp. (9.5N) & NA
bw = 2000 mm as before
a = angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis.
For vertical reinforcement sin a = 1.0
Minimum Asw /s = 0.00095 × 2000 × 1 = 1.90
But,
maximum spacing of links longitudinally = 0.75d = 183 mm Cl. 9.2.2(6)
Maximum spacing of links laterally = 0.75d ≤ 600 mm = 183 mm Cl. 9.2.2(8)
H10s required to maintain 35 mm cover to H25
∴ Use H10 @ 175 cc both ways
i.e. H10 in 12§ legs @ 175 mm cc (Asw /s = 5.38)

§ (2000 mm – 2 × 25 mm cover − 10 mm diameter)/175 = 11 spaces, ∴ 12 legs.

129
b) Support B (and C and D)
By inspection, the requirement for minimum reinforcement and, in
this instance, for H10 legs of links will outweigh design requirements.
Nonetheless check capacity of Asw/s = 5.38
VRd,s = (Asw/s) z fywd cot y Exp. (6.8)
= 5.38 × 0.9 × 252 × 434.8 × 2.5 = 1326.3 kN
Maximum shear at support = 517.9 kN
i.e. capacity of minimum links not exceeded.
By inspection, the requirement for indirect support of the ribs of the Cl. 9.2.5,
slab using 87 mm2/rib within 150 mm of centreline of ribs (at 900 mm Section 3.4.8
centres) and within 50 mm of rib/solid interface is adequately catered
for and will not unduly effect the shear capacity of the beam.
Use 150 mm centres to tie in with 900 mm centres of ribs
∴ Use H10 in 12 legs @ 150 mm cc (Asw/s = 6.28) throughout beam

4.3.10 Check for punching shear, column B

As the beam is wide and shallow it should be checked for punching shear.
At B, applied shear force, VEd = 569.1 + 517.9 = 1087.0 kN.
Check at perimeter of 400 × 400 mm column: Cl. 6.4.3(2),
vEd = bVEd/uid < vRd,max 6.4.5(3)
where
b = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.15
VEd = applied shear force Fig. 6.21N & NA
ui = control perimeter under consideration. For punching shear Cl. 6.4.5(3)
adjacent to interior columns u0 = 2(cx + cy) = 1600 mm
d = mean d = (245 + 226)/2 = 235 mm Exp. (6.32)
vEd = 1.15 × 1087.0 × 103/1600 × 235 = 3.32 MPa
vRd,max = 0.5vfcd Cl. 6.4.5(3) Note
where
v = 0.6(1 − fck/250) = 0.516 Exp. (6.6) & NA
fcd = acclfck/gC = 1.0 × 1.0 × 35/1.5 = 23.3
vRd,max = 0.5 × 0.516 × 23.3 = 6.02 MPa ∴ OK Table C7‡
Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column): Cl. 6.4.2
vEd = bVEd /u1d < vRd,c
where
b, VEd and d as before Fig. 6.13

‡ In this case, at the perimeter of the column, it is assumed that the strut angle
is 45°, i.e. that cot y = 1.0. In other cases, where cot y < 1.0, vRd,max is available
from Table C7.

130
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

u1 = control perimeter under consideration. For punching shear

at 2d from interior columns
= 2(cx + cy) + 2π × 2d
= 1600 + 2π × 2 × 235 = 4553 mm
vEd = 1.15 × 1087.0 × 103/4553 × 235 = 1.17 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18/ gC × k × (100 rlfck)0.333 Exp. (6.47) & NA
where
gC = 1.5
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2
= 1 +(200/235)0.5 = 1.92
rl = (rly, rlz)0.5 Cl. 6.4.4.1(1)
where
rly, rlz = Reinforcement ratio of bonded steel in the y and
z direction in a width of the column plus 3d each
side of column.
= 6874/(2000 × 226) = 0.0152
rlz = 741/(900 × 245) = 0.0036
rl = (0.0152 × 0.0036)0.5 = 0.0074
fck = 35
vRd,c = 0.18/1.5 × 1.92 × (100 × 0.0074 × 35)0.333 = 0.68 MPa§ Table C6#
∴ punching shear reinforcement required
Shear reinforcement (assuming rectangular arrangement of links):
At the basic control perimeter, u1, 2d from the column:
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1 /1.5fywd,ef) Exp. (6.52)
where
sr = 175 mm Cl. 9.4.3(1)
fywd,ef = effective design strength of reinforcement
= (250 + 0.25d) < fyd = 309 MPa Cl. 6.4.5(1)
For perimeter u1
Asw = (1.17 – 0.75 × 0.68) × 175 × 4553/(1.5 × 309) = 1135 mm2 per
perimeter
Try 15 no. H10 (1177 mm2)

§ See Section 3.4.14 with respect to possible limit of 2.0 or 2.5 on V /V

Ed Rd,c
within punching shear requirements.
# vRd,c for various values of d and rl is available from Table C6.

131
Check availability of reinforcement‡:
1st perimeter to be > 0.3d but < 0.5d, i.e between 70 mm and 117 Fig. 9.10,
mm from face of column. Say 0.4d = 100 mm from face of column. 9.4.3(4)

By inspection of Figure 4.21. the equivalent of 14 locations are

available between 70 mm and 117 mm from face of column therefore
say OK.
CL
900
470 200 200 470
150 150 150 150 150 150
H10 legs
of links
175 175 175 175 175 175

s = 150 mm

600 u1
70
CL

24 H10 legs
in u1 perimeter

58

Figure 4.21 Shear links and punching shear perimeter u1

Perimeter at which no punching shear links are required:

uout = VEd × b/(d × vRd,c)
uout = 1087 × 1.15 × 103/(235 × 0.68) = 7826 mm
Length of column faces = 4 × 400 = 1600 mm
Radius to uout = (7823 – 1600)/2π = 990 mm
from face of column i.e. in ribs, therefore beam shear governs

‡The same area of shear reinforcement is required for all perimeters inside or
outside perimeter u1. See Section 3.4.13.
Punching shear reinforcement is also subject to requirements for minimum
reinforcement and spacing of shear reinforcement (see Cl. 9.4.3). The centre of
links from the centreline of the column shown in Figure 4.21 have been adjusted to
accommodate a perimeter of links at between 0.3d and 0.5d from the column face.

132
4.3: Continuous wide T-beam

4.3.11 Summary of design

X

H10 links in 12H20T 12H20T

12 legs @ 150 cc 14H25T 12H25T 14H25T

A B C D E
13H25B 12H20B 12H20B 13H25B

Figure 4.22 Summary of design

Figure 4.23 Section X–X

133
5 Columns
5.0 General
The calculations in this section illustrate:
5.1 Design of a non-slender edge column using hand calculation.
5.2 Design of a perimeter column using iteration of equations to determine reinforcement
requirements.
5.3 Design of an internal column with high axial load.
5.4 Design of a slender column requiring a two-hour fire resistance.

In general, axial loads and first order moments are assumed to be available. The designs consider
slenderness in order to determine design moments, MEd. The columns are designed and checked
for biaxial bending. The effects of allowing for imperfections are illustrated.

A general method of designing columns is as follows. In practice, several of these steps may be
combined.
■ Determine design life. EC0 & NA Table NA 2.1
■ Assess actions on the column. EC1 (10 parts) & UK NAs
■ Determine which combinations of actions apply. EC0 & NA Tables NA A1.1
& NA A1.2(B)
■ Assess durability requirements and determine concrete BS 8500–1
strength.
■ Check cover requirements for appropriate fire Approved Document B,
resistance period. EC2–1–2
■ Determine cover for fire, durability and bond. Cl. 4.4.1
■ Analyse structure for critical combination moments Section 5
and axial forces.
■ Check slenderness and determine design moments. Section 5.8
■ Determine area of reinforcement required. Section 6.1
■ Check spacing of bars and links. Sections 8 & 9

134
Columns

5.1 Edge column

The intention of this calculation is to show a typical hand calculation that makes reference
to design charts.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Edge column Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

A 300 mm square column on the edge of a flat slab structure

supports an axial load of 1620 kN and first order moments of
38.5 kNm top and −38.5 kNm bottom in one direction only‡. The
concrete is grade C30/37, fck = 30 MPa and cover, cnom, = 25 mm.
The 250 mm thick flat slabs are at 4000 mm vertical centres.

38.5 kNm

NEd = 1620 kN

– 38.5 kNm

Figure 5.1 Forces in edge column

5.1.1 Check slenderness, l

Effective length§, l0 = factor × l Cl. 5.8.3.2
where
factor = from Table C16, condition 2 each end Table C16,
= 0.85 PD 6687: 2.10
l = clear height = 3750 mm
∴ l0 = 0.85 × 3750 = 3187 mm
Slenderness l = l0/i Exp. (5.14)

‡For examples of load take-downs and 1st order moment analysis see Section
5.3.2
§ Effective lengths are covered in Eurocode 2 Cl. 5.8.3.2 and Exp. (5.15). The Fig. 5.7
effective length of most columns will be l /2< l0 < l (see Eurocode 2 Figure 5.7f). PD 6687[6]:
PD 6687[6] Cl. 2.10 suggests that using the procedure outlined in Eurocode 2
Cl. 2.10
(5.8.3.2(3) and 5.8.3.2(5)) leads to similar effective lengths to those tabulated
in BS 8110[7] and reproduced in Table 5.1 of Concise Eurocode 2[5] and in this Cl. 5.8.3.2(3)
publication as Table C16. For simplicity, tabular values are used in this example. 5.8.3.2(5)
However, experience suggests that these tabulated values are conservative. Table C16

135
where
i = radius of gyration
= h/120.5 for rectangular sections
l = 3187 × 3.46/300 = 36.8

5.1.2 Limiting slenderness, llim

llim = 20 ABC/n0.5 Exp. (5.13N)
where
A = 0.7 (default) Cl. 5.8.3.1(1)
B = 1.1 (default)
C = 1.7 − rm = 1.7 − M01/M02
= 1.7 − 38.5/(−38.5) = 2.7
n = NEd/Acfcd = 1620 × 103/(3002 × 0.85 × 30/1.5)
= 1.06
llim = 20 ABC/n0.5
= 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 2.7/1.060.5
In this example llim = 40.4 i.e. > 36.8 ∴ Column not slender

5.1.3 Design moments

MEd = max[M02; M0Ed + M2; M01 + 0.5M2] Cl. 5.8.8.2(1)
where
M02 = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd Cl. 5.8.8.2, 6.1.4
where
M = 38.5 kNm
ei = l0/400 Cl. 5.2.7, 5.2.9
e0 = max[h/30; 20] = max[300/30; 20] = 20 mm Cl. 6.1.4
M02 = 38.5 + 1620 × 3.187/400 ≥ 0.02 × 1620
= 38.5 + 12.9 ≥ 32.4 kNm
= 51.4 kNm
M0Ed = 0.6M02 + 0.4M01 ≥ 0.4M02
= 0.6 × 51.4 + 0.4 × (−38.5 + 12.9) ≥ 0.4 × 51.4
= 20.6 ≥ 20.6
= 20.6
M2 = 0 (column is not slender)
M01 = M02
∴ max[M02 ; M0Ed + M2 ; M01 + 0.5M2] = 51.4 kNm ∴ MEd = 51.4 kNm

5.1.4 Design using charts (see Appendix C)

d2 = cnom + link + f/2 = 25 + 8 + 16 = 49
d2/h = 49/300 = 0.163
∴ interpolating between d2/h = 0.15 and 0.20 Figs. C5c), C5d)
for
NEd/bhfck = 1620 × 103/(3002 × 30) = 0.60

136
5.1: Edge column

MEd/bh2fck = 51.4 × 106/(3003 × 30) = 0.063

Asfyk/bhfck = 0.24
As = 0.24 × 3002 × 30/500 = 1296 mm2
Try 4 no. H25 (1964 mm2)

5.1.5 Check for biaxial bending

ly /lz ≈ 1.0 Cl. 5.8.9
i.e. ly /lz ≤ 2.0 ∴ OK but check Exp. (5.38b) Exp. (5.38a)
As a worst case MEdy may coexist with e0NEd about the orthogonal axis: Cl. 6.1(4)
ey/heq (MEdz/NEd)/h MEdz
= =
ez/beq (MEdy/NEd)/b MEdy Exp. (5.38b)
Imperfections need to be taken into account in one direction only. Cl. 5.8.9(2)
∴ As a worst case for biaxial bending
MEdz = M + 0 = 38.5 kNm
MEdy = e0NEd = 32.4 kNm
MEdz 38.5
= = 1.19 i.e. > 0.2 and < 5.0 Exp. (5.38b)
MEdy 32.4
∴ Biaxial check required Cl. 5.8.9(4)
Check whether
(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 Exp. (5.39)
where
MEdz = 38.5 kNm
MEdy = 32.4 kNm
MRdz = MRdy Figs. C5c), C5d)
To determine MRdz, find MEd/bh2fck (and therefore
moment capacity) by interpolating between d2/h = 0.15
(Figure C5c) and 0.20 (Figure C5d) for the proposed
arrangement and co-existent axial load.

Assuming 4 no. H25,

Asfyk/bhfck = 1964 × 500/(3002× 30) = 0.36

Interpolating for NEd/bhfck = 0.6,

MEd/bh2fck = 0.094
∴ MRdz = MRdy = 0.094 × 3003 × 30 = 76.1 kNm
a is dependent on NEd/NRd Cl. 5.8.9(4),
where Notes to Exp.
NEd = 1620 kN as before (5.39)

137
NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 3002 × 0.85 × 30/1.5 + 1964 × 500/1.15
= 1530.0 + 853.9
= 2383.9 kN
NEd/NRd = 1620/2383.9 = 0.68
∴ a = 1.48 by interpolating between values given for NEd/NRd =
0.1, (1.0) and NEd/NRd = 0.7, (1.5)

(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a = (38.5/76.1)1.48 + (32.4/76.1)1.48 Exp. (5.39)

= 0.36 + 0.28
= 0.64 ∴ OK.
∴ 4 no. H25 OK

5.1.6 Links
Diameter min. f/4 = 25/4 = 8 mm Cl. 9.5.3 & NA
Max. spacing = 0.6 × 300 = 180 mm Cl. 9.5.3(3),
Cl. 9.5.3(4)
Links at say 175 mm cc

5.1.7 Design summary

4 H25
H8 links @ 175 cc
25 mm cover
fck = 30 MPa

Figure 5.2 Design summary: edge column

138
5.2: Perimeter column

5.2 Perimeter column (internal environment)

This example is intended to show a hand calculation for a non-slender perimeter column
using iteration (of x) to determine the reinforcement required.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Perimeter column Checked by web Sheet no. 1
(internal environment) Client TCC Date Oct 09

This 300 × 300 mm perimeter column is in an internal environment

and supports three suspended floors and the roof of an office block.
It is to be designed at ground floor level where the storey height
is 3.45 m and the clear height in the N–S direction (z direction) is
3.0 m and 3.325 m in the E–W direction (y direction). One-hour fire
resistance is required and fck = 30 MPa.

250
325
M02yy
300 × 300
3575 Column under
consideration

Figure 5.3 Perimeter column

(internal environment)

From first order analysis, load case 1:

NEd = 1129.6 kN; M02yy = 89.6 kNm; M02zz = 0
Load case 2:
NEd = 1072.1 kN; M02yy = 68.7 kNm; M02zz = 6.0 kNm

5.2.1 Cover
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm bars and 8 mm links Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= 32 mm to main bars, 32 − 8 = 24 mm to links
= say 25 mm
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assume XC1.
cmin,dur = 15 mm
cmin = 25 mm
Dcdev = 10 mm Cl. 4.4.1.3(3)
Therefore cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to links cnom = 35 mm to links.

139
5.2.2 Fire resistance
Check validity of using Method A and Table 5.2a of BS EN 1992–1–2: EC2-1-2: 5.3.2,
Table 5.2a
l0,fi ≈ 0.7 × 3.325 i.e. < 3.0 m ∴ OK. EC2-1-2:
5.3.3(3)
e = M02yy /NEd = 89.6 × 106/1129.6 × 103 = 79 mm EC2-1-2:
5.3.2 & NA
emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 300 = 45 mm ∴ no good.
Check validity of using Method B and Table 5.2b: EC2-1-2:
emax = 0.25b = 75 mm ∴ no good. 5.3.3

Use BS EN 1992–1–2 Annex C Tables C1–C9. EC2-1-2:

Annex C
Assume min. 4 no. H25 = 1964 mm2 (≡ 2.2%)‡ EC2-1-2: 5.3.3(2)
w = Asfyd/Acfcd = 0.022 × (500/1.15)/(0.85 × 30/1.5)
= 0.56
e ≈ 0.25b and ≤ 100 mm
l = l0 /i
where EC2-1-2:
l0 = 0.7 × 3.325 = 2327 mm 5.3.3(2),
i = radius of gyration = (I/A)0.5 = h/120.5 5.3.3(3)
where
I = inertia = bh3/12
A = area = bh
h = height of section
b = breadth of section
= 300/120.5 = 87 mm
l = 2327/87 = 276
n = N0Ed,fi/0.7(Acfcd + Asfyd) EC2-1-2: 5.3.3(2)
= 0.7 × 1129.6/0.7(3002× 0.85 × 30/1.5 + 1964 × 500/1.15)
= 1129.6/2383.9
= 0.47
∴ interpolate for l = 30 and n = 0.47 between EC2-1-2:
from Table C.5 of BS EN 1992–1–2 (w = 0.5, e = 0.25b): Table C.5
minimum dimension, bmin = 235, and axis distance, a = 35 mm
and EC2-1-2:
from Table C.8 of BS EN 1992–1–2 (w = 1.0, e = 0.25b): Table C.8

‡ Using 4 no. H20 gives w = 0.34, n = 0.54 and bmin = 310 mm ∴ no good.

140
5.2: Perimeter column

bmin = 185, and

a = 30 mm
∴ for w = 0.56,
bmin = 228, and
a = 35 mm
OK to use Method B but use min. 4 no. H25

5.2.3 Structural design: check slenderness

Effective length, l0:
l0 = 0.5l [1 + k1 /(0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k2/(0.45 + k2) ]0.5 Exp. (5.15)
where
k1, k2 = relative stiffnesses top and bottom
But conservatively, choose to use tabular method§. For critical Table C16
direction, the column is in condition 2 at top and condition 3 at
bottom (pinned support).
l0 = 0.95 × 3325 = 3158 mm
Slenderness ratio, l: Cl. 5.8.3.2(1)
l = l0/i
where
i = radius of gyration = (I/A)0.5 = h/120.5
l = 3158 × 120.5/300 = 36.5 l = 36.5

Limiting slenderness ratio, llim Cl. 5.8.3.1(1)

llim = 20 ABC/n0.5 & NA
where
A = 1/(1 + 0.2 fef). Assume 0.7 Cl. 5.8.4
B = (1 + 2 Asfyd/Acfcd)0.5 Cl. 5.8.3.1(1)
= (1 + 2w)0.5
Assuming min. 4 no. H25 (for fire)
w = 0.56 as before
B = (1 + 2 × 0.56)0.5 = 1.46
C = 1.7 – rm Cl. 5.8.3.1(1)
where
rm = M01/M2
Assuming conservatively that M01 = 0
rm = 0
C = 1.7
n = NEd/Acfcd
= 1129.6 × 103/(3002 × 0.85 × 30/1.5)
= 0.74

§ See footnote to Section 5.1.1.

141
llim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.46 × 1.7/0.740.5
= 40.4 llim = 40.4
∴ as l < llim column is not slender and 2nd order moments are not
required.
Column is not slender

5.2.4 Design moments, MEd

MEd = MOEd + M2 ≥ e0NEd Cl. 5.8.8.2(1),
5.8.8.2(3)
But as column is not slender, M2 = 0, ∴ Cl. 6.1.4
MEd = MOed = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd
where
M = moment from 1st order analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections‡
where
ei = l0 /400 Cl. 5.2(7), 5.2.9,
5.8.8.2(1)
e0 = h/30 > 20 mm Cl. 6.1.4
Load case 1:
MEdy = 89.6 + (3158/400) × 1129.6 × 10−3 > 0.02 × 1129.6
= 89.6 + 8.9 > 22.6 = 98.5 kNm
Load case 2:
MEdy = 68.7 kNm
MEdz = 6.0 + (l0/400) × 1072.1 × 10−3 > 0.02 × 1072.1
where Table C16
l0 = 0.9 × 3000
= 13.2 > 21.4 = 21.4 kNm

5.2.5 Design using iteration of x

For axial load: Concise:
AsN/2 = (NEd – accnfckbdc /gC)/(ssc – sst) Section 6.2.2,
Appendix A3
For moment:
[MEd – accnfckbdc (h/2 – dc/2)/ gC] Appendices A3,
AsM/2 =
(h/2 – d2) (ssc – sst) C9.2,
where
MEd = 98.5 × 106
NEd = 1129.6 × 103
acc = 0.85 Cl. 3.1.6(1) & NA
n = 1.0 for fck ≤ 50 MPa Exp. (3.21)

‡The effects of imperfections need only be taken into account in the most
unfavourable direction. Cl. 5.8.9(2)

142
5.2: Perimeter column

fck = 30
b = 300
h = 300
dc = depth of compression zone
= lx Exp. (3.19)
= 0.8x < h
where
x = depth to neutral axis
d2 = 35 + 8 + 25/2 = 55 mm assuming H25
gC = 1.5
ssc, (sst) = stress in reinforcement in compression (tension) Table 2.1N
fcd = accnfck/gC d2
o o
ecu2
ssc
esc As2

dc
x
h

n. axis

ey As1
sst d2
o o

a) Strain diagram b) Stress diagram

Figure 5.4 Section in axial compression and bending Fig. 6.1

Try x = 200 mm
ecu = ecu2 = 0.0035
0.0035 × (x – d2) 0.0035 × (200 – 55)
esc = =
x 200
= 0.0025
ssc = 0.0025 × 200000 ≤ fyk/gS
= 500 ≤ 500/1.15
= 434.8 MPa
est = 0.0035(h – x – d2)/x = 0.0035(300 – 200 – 55)/200
= 0.0008
sst = 0.0008 × 200000 ≤ 500/1.15
= 160 MPa
1129.6 × 103 – 0.85 × 1.0 × 30 × 300 × 200 × 0.8/(1.5 × 103)
AsN/2 =
434.8 – 160
= (1129.6 – 816.0) × 103
= 1141 mm2
274.8

143
98.5 × 106 – 0.85 × 1.0 × 30 × 300 × 200 × 0.8 (300/2 – 200 × 0.8/2)/(1.5 × 103)
AsM/2 =
(300/2 – 55) (434.8 + 160)
(98.5 – 57.1) × 10 6
= = 733 mm2
95 × 594.8

Similarly for x = 210 mm

ecu = 0.0035
esc = 0.0026 ∴ ssc = 434.8
est = 0.0006 ∴ sst = 120 MPa

(1129.6 – 856.8) × 103

AsN/2 = = 866 mm2
434.8 – 120
(98.5 – 56.5) × 106
AsM/2 = = 796 mm2
95 × 554.8

Similarly for x = 212 mm

ssc = 434.8
est = 0.00054 ∴est = 109 MPa
(1129.6 – 865.0) × 103
AsN/2 = = 812 mm2
434.8 – 109
(98.5 – 56.3) × 106
AsM/2 = = 816 mm2
95 × 543.8
∴ as AsN/2 ≈ AsM/2, x = 212 mm is approximately correct and
AsN ≈ AsM, ≈ 1628 mm2
∴ Try 4 no. H25 (1964 mm2)

5.2.6 Check for biaxial bending

By inspection, not critical. Cl. 5.8.9(3)
[Proof:
Section is symmetrical and MRdz > 98.5 kNm.
Assuming ey/ez > 0.2 and biaxial bending is critical, and assuming
exponent a = 1 as a worst case for load case 2: Exp. (5.39)
(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a = (21.4/98.5)1 + (68.7/98.5)1
= 0.91 i.e. < 1.0 ∴ OK.]

5.2.7 Links
Minimum size links = 25/4 = 6.25, say 8 mm
Spacing: minimum of
a) 0.6 × 20 × 25 = 300 mm, Cl. 9.5.3(3),
b) 0.6 × 300 = 180 mm or 9.5.3(4)
c) 0.6 × 400 = 240 mm
Use H8 @ 175 mm cc

144
5.2: Perimeter column

5.2.8 Design summary

4 H25
H8 links @ 175 cc
cnom = 35 mm to links

Figure 5.5 Design summary: perimeter column

145
5.3 Internal column
The flat slab shown in Example 3.4 (reproduced as Figure 5.6) is part of an 8-storey structure
above ground with a basement below ground. The problem is to design column C2 between
ground floor and 1st floor.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Internal column Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

The design forces need to be determined. This will include the

judgement of whether to use Exp. (6.10) or the worse case of
Exp. (6.10a) and (6.10b) for the design of this column.

The suspended slabs (including the ground floor slab) are 300
mm thick flat slabs at 4500 mm vertical centres. Between ground
and 5th floors the columns at C2 are 500 mm square; above 5th
floor they are 465 mm circular. Assume an internal environment,
1-hour fire resistance and fck = 50 MPa.

A B Bb C
4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 D
1 E

200 x 200
hole
8.0

2 9.6

300 mm flat slabs

8.0 All columns 400 mm sq.

3 8.6
200 x 200
hole

Figure 5.6 Part plan of flat slab

5.3.1 Design forces

In order to determine design forces for this column it is first
necessary to determine vertical loads and 1st order moments.

5.3.2 Load take-down

Actions:
Roof: EC1-1-1:
gk = 8.5, qk = 0.6 6.3.4, NA &
Table NA.7

146
5.3: Internal column

Floors:
gk = 8.5, qk = 4.0 Section 3.4
In keeping with Section 3.4 use coefficients to determine loads in Section 3.4
take-down.
Consider spans adjacent to column C2: Table C3
Along grid C, consider spans to be 9.6 m and 8.6 m and C2 to be
the internal of 2 - span element.
Therefore elastic reaction factor = 0.63 + 0.63 = 1.26
Along grid 2 consider spans to be 6.0 m and 6.2 m and internal of
multiple span.
Elastic reaction factor = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.00

Load take-down for column C2.

Item Calculation Gk Qk
From Cumulative From Cumulative
item total item total
Roof = [erfy × (lz1 + lz2)/2 ] × [erfz × (l y1 + ly2)/2 ] ×
(gk + qk)
= [1.0 × (6.0 + 6.2)/2 ] × [1.26 × (9.6
+ 8.6)/2 ] × (8.5 + 0.6)
= 69.9 × (8.5 + 0.6) = 594.5 42.0
Col 8 – R = π (0.465/2)2 × (4.5 − 0.3) × 25 = 17.9 612.4 42.0
8th = 1.0 × (6.0 + 6.2)/2 × 1.26 × (9.6 + 594.5 279.7
8.6)/2 × (8.5 + 4.0) =
Col 7 – 8 as before 17.9 1224.8 321.7
7th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 6 – 7 a.b. 17.9 1837.2 601.4
6th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 5 – 6 a.b. 17.9 2449.6 881.1
5th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 4 – 5 = 0.5 × 0.5 × (4.5 − 0.3) × 25 = 26.3 3070.4 1160.8
4th as before 594.5 279.7
Col 3 – 4 a.b. 26.3 3691.2 1440.5
3rd a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 2 – 3 a.b. 26.3 4312.0 1720.2
2nd a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 1 – 2 a.b. 26.3 4932.8 1999.7
1st a.b. 594.5 279.8
Col G – 1 a.b. 26.3 5553.6 2279.5
At above ground floor — 5553.6 — 2279.5

147
5.3.3 Design axial load, ground– 1st floor, NEd
a) Axial load to Exp. (6.10)
NEd = gGGk + gQQk1 + c0gQQki EC0:
Exp. (6.10) & NA
where EC0:
gG = 1.35 A1.2.2 & NA
gQ = 1.50
c0,1 = 0.7 (offices)
Qk1 = leading variable action (subject to reduction factor aA or an)
Qki = accompanying action (subject to aA or an) EC1-1-1:
6.3.1.2 (10),
6.3.1.2 (11), & NA
where
aA = 1 – A/1000 ≥ 0.75
= 1 – 9 × 69.9/1000 = 0.37 ≥ 0.75
= 0.75
an = 1.1 – n/10 for 1 ≤ n ≤ 5
= 0.6 for 5 ≤ n ≤ 10 and
= 0.5 for n > 10
where
n = number of storeys supported
an= 0.6 for 8‡ storeys supported
∴ as an < aA, use an = 0.6

Assuming the variable action of the roof is an independent variable

action:
NEd = 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × (2279.5 − 42.0) × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × 2237.5 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 7497.4 + 2013.8 + 44.1
= 9555.3 kN
To Exp. (6.10), NEd = 9555.3 kN

b) Axial load to Exp. (6.10a)

NEd = gGGk + c0,1gQQk1 + c0,1gQQki EC0:
= 1.35 × 5553.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 0.6 ( 279.8 + 1999.7) Exp. (6.10a)
= 7497.4 + 1436.1 & NA
= 8933.4 kN
To Exp. (6.10a), NEd = 8933.4 kN

c) Axial load to Exp. (6.10b)

NEd = jgGGk + gQQk1 + c0,1gQQki EC0:
Exp. (6.10)
& NA
‡ According to BS EN 1991–1–1 6.3.1.2[11] the imposed load on the roof is category

H and therefore does not qualify for reduction factor an.

148
5.3: Internal column

assuming the variable action of the roof is an independent variable

action:
= 0.925 × 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × (2279.5 − 42.0) × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 1.25 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × 2237.5 × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 6942.1 + 2013.8+ 44.1
= 9000.0 kN
To Exp. (6.10b), NEd = 9000.0 kN

5.3.4 First order design moments, M

a) Grid C
Consider grid C to determine Myy in column (about grid 2)

gk = 6.1 x 8.5 = 51.9 kN/m qk = 6.1 x 4.0 = 24.4 kN/m

4500

3 2 1
4500
300 thick ave 6100 wide 500 sq

8600 9600

Figure 5.7 Subframe on column C2 along grid C

Actions:
gk = (6.0 + 6.2)/2 × 8.5 = 51.9 kN/m
qk = (6.0 + 6.2)/2 × 4.0 = 24.4 kN/m
Relative stiffness of lower column:
Assuming remote ends of slabs are pinned, relative stiffness
blcdlc3/Llc
=
blcdlc3/Llc + bucduc3/Luc + 0.75b23d233/L23 + 0.75b21d213/L21

where
b = breadth
d = depth
L = length
lc = lower column, uc = upper column
23 = beam 23, similarly 21 = beam 21
0.54/4.5
=
2 × 0.5 /4.5 + 0.75 × 6.1 × 0.33/8.6 + 0.75 × 6.1 × 0.33/9.6
4

= 0.0139/(0.0278 + 0.0144 + 0.0129) = 0.252

149
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10)
FEM 23‡ = 1.35 × 51.9 × 8.62/12 = 431.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.35 × 51.9 + 1.5 × 24.4) × 9.62/12
= 106.7 × 9.62/12 = 819.5 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × [819.5 – 431.8] = 97.7 kNm

1st order moment using Exp. (6.10a)

FEM 23 = 1.25 × 51.9 × 8.62/12 = 399.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.25 × 51.9 + 1.5 × 24.4) × 9.62/12
= 101.5 × 9.62/12 = 779.5 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × (779.5 – 399.8) = 95.7 kNm

1st order moment using Exp. (6.10b)

FEM 23 = 1.35 × 51.9 × 8.62/12 = 431.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.35 × 51.9 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 24.4 ) × 9.62/12
= 95.7 × 9.62/12 = 735.0 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × (735.0 – 431.8) = 76.4 kNm
∴ Exp. (6.10a) critical

b) Grid 2
Consider grid 2 to determine Mzz in column (about grid C)

qk = 45.9 kN/m gk = 97.5 kN/m

4500

B C D 4500

300 thick ave 11470 wide 500 sq

6200 6000

Figure 5.8 Subframe on column C2 along grid 2

Actions:
gk = 0.63 × (8.6 + 9.6) × 8.5
= 11.47 × 8.5 = 97.5 kN/m
qk = 11.47 × 4.0 = 45.9 kN/m

Relative stiffness of lower column: Cl. 5.8.3.2(4)

Assuming remote ends of slabs are fixed, relative stiffness PD 6687

‡ FEM 23 = Fixed end moment in span 23 at grid 2.

150
5.3: Internal column

0.54/4.5
=
2× 0.54/4.5 + 11.47 × 0.33/6.2 +11.47 × 0.33/6.0
= 0.0139/(0.0278 + 0.0500 + 0.0516) = 0.107
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10)
FEM CB = (1.35 × 97.5 + 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22/12
= 200.5 × 6.22/12 = 642.3 kNm
FEM CD = 1.35 × 97.5 × 6.02/12 = 394.9 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (642.3 – 394.9) = 26.5 kNm
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10a)
FEM CB = 1.25 × 97.5 × 6.02/12 = 365.6 kNm
FEM CD = (1.25 × 97.5 + 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22/12
= 190.7 × 6.22/12 = 611.0 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (611.0 – 365.6) = 26.3 kNm
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10b)
FEM CB = (1.35 × 97.5 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22/12
= 190.7 × 6.22/12 = 576.0 kNm
FEM CD = 1.35 × 97.5 × 6.02/12 = 394.9 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (576.0 – 394.9) = 19.4 kNm
∴ Exp. (6.10a) critical again

5.3.5 Summary of design forces in column C2 ground–1st

Design forces
Method NEd Myy Mzz
about grid 2 about grid C
Using Exp. (6.10) 9555.3 kN 97.7 kNm 26.5 kNm
Using Exp. (6.10a) 8933.4 kN 95.7 kNm 26.3 kNm
Using Exp. (6.10b) 9000.0 kN 76.4 kNm 19.4 kNm
Notes:
1) To determine maximum 1st order moments in the column, maximum out-of-
balance moments have been determined using variable actions to one side of
the column only. The effect on axial load has, conservatively, been ignored.
2) It may be argued that using coefficients for the design of the slab and
reactions to the columns does not warrant the sophistication of using Exps
(6.10a) and (6.10b). Nevertheless, there would appear to be some economy
in designing the column to Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) rather than Exp.
(6.10). The use of Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) is perfectly valid and will be
followed here.

To avoid duplicate designs for both Exps (6.10a) and (6.10b), a worse
case of their design forces will be used, thus:
NEd = 9000 kN, Myy = 95.7 kNm, Mzz = 26.3 kNm

151
5.3.6 Design: cover
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm bars and 8 mm links. Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
= 32 – 8 = 24 mm to link
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assume XC1.
cmin,dur = 15 mm BS 8500-1:
Table A4
cmin = 24 mm, say 25 mm to link
Dcdev = 10 mm
∴ cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm Cl. 4.4.1.3 & NA

5.3.7 Design: fire resistance

Check validity of using Method A and Table 5.2a EC2-1-2:
5.3.2, Table 5.2a
a) Check l0,fi ≤ 3.0 m
where
l0 = effective length of column in fire
= 0.5 × clear height
= 0.5 × (4500 – 300)
= 2100 mm OK
b) Check e ≤ emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 500 = 75 mm
e = M0Ed,fi/N0Ed,fi
= M0/NEd EC2-1-2: 5.3.2(2)
= 99.5 × 106/8933 × 103 = 11 mm OK

c) Check amount of reinforcement ≤ 4% OK

Assuming mfi = 0.7
bmin = 350 with EC2-1-2:
amin = 40 mm OK Table 5.2a
For fire using Method A and Table 5.2a is valid

5.3.8 Structural design: check slenderness

Effective length, l0:
l0 = 0.5l [1 + k1/(0.45 + k1)]0.5 [1 + k2/(0.45 + k2)]0.5 Exp. (5.15)
where
k1 and k2 are relative flexibilities at top and bottom of the
column.
ki = (EIcol/lcol)/S(2EIbeam/lbeam) ≥ 0.1 PD 6687[6]‡
‡PD 6687 states that to allow for cracking, the contribution of each beam
should be taken as 2EI/lbeam

152
5.3: Internal column

Critical direction is where k1 and k2 are greatest i.e. where slab spans How to[8]:
are greater Columns
blcdlc3/Llc
k 1 = k2 =
2b23d233/L23 + 2b21d213/L21
= (0.54/4.5)/(2 × 6.1 × 0.33/8.6 + 2 × 6.1 × 0.33/9.6)
= (0.0625)/(0.0383 + 0.0343)
= 0.86
l0 = 0.5 (4500 – 300) [1 + 0.86/(0.45 + 0.86)]0.5 [1 + 0.86/(0.45
+ 0.86)]0.5
l0 = 0.5 × 4200 × 1.66
= 0.828 × 4200 = 3478 mm

Slenderness ratio, l: Cl. 5.8.3.2(1)

l = l0/i
where
i = radius of gyration = (I/A)0.5 = h/120.5
∴ l = 3478 × 120.5/500 = 24.1

Limiting slenderness ratio, llim: Cl. 5.8.3.1(1) & NA

llim = 20 ABC/n0.5 Exp. (5.13N)
where
A = 1/(1 + 0.2 fef). Assume 0.7 as per default
B = (1 + 200)0.5. Assume 1.1 as per default
C = 1.7 – rm
where
rm = M01/M2 = –84.9/109.3 = –0.78
C = 1.7 + 0.78 = 2.48
n = NEd /Acfcd
= 8933 × 103/(5002 × 0.85 × 50/1.5)
= 1.26
∴ llim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 2.48/1.260.5 = 34.0
∴ as l < llim column is not slender
and 2nd order moments are not required

5.3.9 Design moments, MEd

MEd = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd Cl. 5.8.8.2(1),
6.1(4)
where
M = moment from 1st order analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections Cl. 5.8.8.2(1)

153
where
ei = l0/400 Cl. 5.2.7
e0NEd = minimum eccentricity Cl. 6.1(4)
where
e0 = h/30 ≥ 20 mm
MEdyy = 95.7 + (3570/400) × 8933 × 10−3 ≥ 0.02 × 8933
= 95.7 + 79.7 ≥ 178.7
= 175.4 < 178.7 kNm
MEdzz = 18.8 + 79.7 ≥ 178.7
= 178.7 kNm ∴ Both critical.

However, imperfections need only be taken in one direction – where

they have the most unfavourable effect
∴ Use MEdzz = 178.7 with MEdyy = 95.7 kNm Cl. 5.8.9(2)

5.3.10 Design using charts

MEdyy /bh2fck = 178.9 × 106/(5003 × 50) = 0.03 Figs C5a) to C5e)
NEd/bhfck = 9000 × 103/(5002 × 50) = 0.72
Choice of chart based on d2/h
where
d2 = depth to centroid of reinforcement in half section assuming
12 bar arrangement with H32s
d2 = 35 + 8 + (32/2) + (2/6) [500 + 2 × (35 + 8 + 32/2 )/3]
= 59 + (1/3) × 127
= 101
∴ d2/h = 101/500 = 0.2 Use Figure C5d)

d2

CL

Figure 5.9 Depth, d2, to centroid of reinforcement in half section

From Figure C5d) Fig. C5d)

Asfyk/bhfck = 0.30
As = 0.29 × 500 × 500 × 50/500
= 7500 mm2
Try 12 no. H32 (9648 mm2)‡

‡Using design actions to Exp. (6.10) would have resulted in a requirement for
8500 mm2.

154
5.3: Internal column

5.3.11 Check biaxial bending Cl. 5.8.9

Slenderness: ly ≈ lz ∴ OK. Cl. 5.8.9(3)
Eccentricities: as h = b check ey/ez
MEdz critical. (Imperfections act in z direction.)
95.7 × 106/9000 × 103
ey/ez =
178.7 × 106/9000 × 103
= 0.54 i.e. > 0.2 and < 5 Cl. 5.9.3(3),
∴ Design for biaxial bending. Exp. (5.38b)

C
z

ey Centre of
reaction

MEdy

b
* ez
y 2

MEdz

Figure 5.10 Eccentricities

5.3.12 Design for biaxial bending

Check (MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 Cl. 5.9.3(4),
Exp. (5.39)
For load case 2
where
MEdz = 178.7 kNm
MEdy = 95.7 kNm
MRdz = MRdy = moment resistance. Using charts:
From Figure C4d), for d2/h = 0.20 and
Asfyk/bhfck = 9648 × 500/500 × 500 × 50
= 0.39
NEd/bhfck = 9000 x 103/(5002 x 50)
= 0.72
2
MRd/bh fck = 0.057 Fig. C5d)

∴ MRd ≈ 0.057 × 5003 × 50

= 356.3 kNm

155
a = exponent dependent upon NEd/NRd Cl. 5.8.3(4)
where
NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 500 × 500 × 0.85 × 50/1.5 + 9648 × 500/1.15
= 7083 + 3216
= 10299 kN
NEd/NRd = 9000/10299 = 0.87.
Interpolating between values given for NEd/NRd = 0.7 Notes to
(1.5) and for NEd/NRd = 1.0 (2.0) Exp. (5.39)
∴ a = 1.67

Check (MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a ≤ 1.0

(178.7/356.3)1.67 + (95.7/356.3)1.67 = 0.32 + 0.11
= 0.43 i.e. < 1.0 ∴ OK
Use 12 no. H32

5.3.13 Links
Minimum diameter of links: = f/4 = 32/4 Cl. 9.5.3 & NA
= 8 mm
Spacing, either:
a) 0.6 × 20 × f = 12 × 32 = 384 mm, Cl. 9.5.3(3),
b) 0.6 × h = 0.6 × 500 = 300 mm or 9.5.3(4)
c) 0.6 × 400 = 240 mm.
∴ Use H8 links at 225 mm cc
Number of legs:
Bars at 127 mm cc i.e. < 150 mm ∴ no need to restrain bars in face Cl. 9.5.3(6)
but good practice suggests alternate bars should be restrained. SMDSC: 6.4.2
∴ Use single leg on face bars both ways @ 225 mm cc

5.3.14 Design summary

12 H32
H8 links @ 225 cc
35 mm to link
500 mm sq
fck = 50 MPa

Figure 5.11 Design summary: internal column

156
5.4: Small perimeter column

5.4 Small perimeter column subject to two-hour fire

resistance
This calculation is intended to show a small slender column subject to a requirement for
2-hour fire resistance. It is based on the example shown in Section 4.2.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Small perimeter column Checked by web Sheet no. 1
subject to two-hour fire resistance Client TCC Date Oct 09

The middle column, B, in Figure 4.5, supports two levels of storage

loads and is subject to an ultimate axial load of 1824.1 kN‡. From
analysis it has moments of 114.5 kNm in the plane of the beam and
146.1 kNm perpendicular to the beam (i.e. about the z axis).

The column is 350 mm square, 4000 mm long, measured from top

of foundation to centre of slab. It is supporting storage loads, in
an external environment (but not subject to de-icing salts) and is
subject to a 2-hour fire resistance requirement on three exposed
sides. Assume the base is pinned.
Slab

300
450

350 x 350
column
4000

Paving

Foundation

Figure 5.12 Perimeter column

5.4.1 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom
cnom = cmin + Dcdev Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]

‡ Gk = 562.1; Qk = 789.1; as column supports loads from 2 levels an = 0.9; as

imposed loads are from storage c0 = 1.0 ∴ gQ = 1.50 and gQ= 1.35. ∴ Ultimate
axial load, NEd = 1.35 × 562.1 + 1.5 × 0.9 × 789.1 = 1824.1 kN.

157
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars and
10 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming primarily XC3/XC4, secondarily XF1,
cmin,dur = 25 mm Cl. 4.4.1.2(3)
Dcdev = allowance in design for deviation BS 8500-1[14] :
= 10 mm Table A4
∴ Try cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars
or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to 8 mm links
Try cnom = 35 mm to 8 mm links.

5.4.2 Fire resistance

a) Check adequacy of section for R120 to Method A
Axis distance available = 43 mm + f/2
Required axis distance to main bars, a for 350 mm square column EC1-1-2: 5.3.1(1) &
For mfi = 0.5, a = 45 mm; and NA 5.3.2,
for mfi = 0.7, a = 57 mm, providing: Table 5.2a
• 8 bars used – OK but check later
• l0,fi ≤ 3 m – OK but check
• e ≤ emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 350 = 52 mm
but e = M0Ed,fi/N0Ed,fi
= 0.7 × 146.1 × 106/0.7 × 1824.1 × 103
= 80 mm ∴ no good
Try Method B

b) Check adequacy of section for R120 to Method B EC2-1-2: 5.3.3,

Determine parameters n, w, and e, and check lfi. Table 5.2b
Assume 4 no. H32 + 4 no. H25 = (5180 mm2: 4.2%)
(say 4.2% OK – integrity OK) Cl. 9.5.2(3)
n = N0Ed,fi/0.7(Acfcd + Asfyd) EC2-1-2: Exp.
(5.8a)
= 0.7 × 1824.1 × 103/0.7 (350 × 350 × acc × fck/ gC + 5180 × 500/gS)
= 1276.9 × 103/0.7 (350 × 350 × 0.85 × 30/1.5 + 5180 × 500/1.15)
= 1276.9 × 103/0.7 (2082.5 + 2252.0)
= 0.42 OK
w = mechanical ratio EC2-1-2: 5.3.3(2)
= Asfyd/Acfcd ≤ 1.0
= 2252/2082
= 1.08 ≥ 1
But say within acceptable engineering tolerance ∴use w = 1.0 OK
e = first order eccentricity EC2-1-2: Exp.
= M0Ed,fi/N0Ed,fi (5.8b)

158
5.4: Small perimeter column

= 0.7 × 146.1 × 106/0.7 × 1824.1 × 103 EC2-1-2: 2.4.2(3)

= 80 mm as before ≡ 0.23h. OK
lfi = slenderness in fire
= l0,fi/i
where EC2-1-2: 5.3.2(2)
l0,fi = effective length of column in fire
= 0.7l = 0.7 × 4000 = 2800 mm Note 2
i = radius of gyration
= h/3.46 for a rectangular section
∴ lfi = 2800/(350/3.46)
= 27.7 < 30 ∴ OK
Table 5.2b valid for use in this case.
Interpolating from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.2b for n = 0.42 and
w = 1.0, column width = 350 mm and axis distance = say, 48 mm
∴ Axis distance = 43 mm + f/2 is OK

c) As additional check, check adequacy of section to Annex B3 and EC2-1-2:

Annex C 5.3.3(1), Annex C
Using BS EN 1992–1–2 Table C.8 & NA
For w = 1.0, e = 0.25b, R120, l = 30 EC2-1-2:
and interpolating between n = 0.3 and n = 0.5, Annex C(2)
bmin = 350 mm, amin = 48 mm.
∴ Axis distance = 43 mm + f/2 is OK
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. H25 with 35 mm cover to 8 mm links
(a = 55 mm min.) OK

5.4.3 Structural design: check slenderness about z axis

Effective length, l0, about z axis:
l0z = 0.5l [1 + k1/(0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k2/(0.45 + k2) ]0.5 Exp. (5.15)
where PD 6687: 2.10
l = clear height between restraints
= 4000 – 300/2 = 3850 mm
k1, k2 = relative flexibilities of rotational restraints at ends 1
and 2 respectively
k1 = [EIcol/lcol]/[2EIbeam1/lbeam1 + 2EIbeam2/lbeam2] ≥ 0.1 Cl. 5.8.3.2(3)
where PD 6687
Treating beams as rectangular and cancelling E throughout:
Icol/lcol = 3504/(12 × 3850) = 3.25 × 105
Ibeam1/lbeam1 = 8500 × 3003/12 × 6000
= 31.8 × 105
Ibeam2/lbeam2 = 0
k1 = 3.25/(2 × 31.8) = 0.051 ≥ 0.1
k1 = 0.1
k2 = by inspection (pinned end assumed) = ∞

159
∴ l0z = 0.5 × 3850 × [1 + 0.1/(0.45 + 0.1) ]0.5 [1 + ∞/(0.45 + ∞)]0.5
= 0.5 × 3850 × 1.087 × 1.41
= 0.77 × 3850 = 2965 mm

Slenderness ratio, lz: Cl. 5.8.3.2(1)

lz = l0z/i
where
i = radius of gyration = h/3.46
lz = 3.46l0z/h = 3.46 × 2965/350 = 29.3

Limiting slenderness ratio, llim: Cl. 5.8.3.1(1)

llim,z = 20 ABC/n0.5 Exp. (5.13N)
where
A = 0.7
B = 1.1‡
C = 1.7 – rm
where
rm = M01/M02
say M01 = 0 (pinned end) ∴ rm = 0
C = 1.7 – 0 = 1.7
n = relative normal force = NEd/Acfcd
= 1824.1 × 103/(3502 × 0.85 × 30/1.5)
= 0.88
∴ llim,z = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 1.7/0.880.5
= 27.9
∴ As lz > llim,z column is slender about z axis.

5.4.4 Check slenderness on y axis

Effective length, l0, about z axis:
l0y = 0.5ly [1 + k1/(0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k2/(0.45 + k2) ]0.5 Exp. (5.15)
where
ly = clear height between restraints
= 4000 + 300/2 – 750 = 3400 mm
k1 = relative column flexibility at end 1
= (Icol/Icol)/[S2(Ibeam/Ibeam)]
where
Icol /Icol = 3504/12 × 3400 = 3.68 × 105

‡On first pass the default value for B is used. It should be noted that in the
final design w = Asfyd/Acfcd = 6432 × (500/1.15) / (3502 × 30 × 0.85/1.5) = Cl. 5.8.3.1(1),
2796/2082 = 1.34. So B = (1 + 2 w)0.5 = (1 + 1.34)0.5 = 1.92 and the column
& NA,
would not have been deemed ‘slender’. B = 1.1 relates approximately to a column
with fck = 30 MPa and r = 0.4%. EC2-1-2: 5.3.3(2)
* PD 6687 states that to allow for cracking, the contribution of each beam
should be taken as 2EI/lbeam PD 6687*

160
5.4: Small perimeter column

Treating beams as rectangular

IbeamAB/lbeamAB = 350 × 7503/[12 × (9000 – 350)]
= 14.2 × 105
IbeamBC/lbeamBC = 350 × 7503/[12 × (8000 – 350)]
= 16.1 × 105
k1 = 3.68/(2 × (16.1 + 14.2) = 0.060 ≥ 0.1
k1 = 0.1
k2 = ∞ (pinned end assumed)
∴l0y = 0.5 × 3400 [1 + 0.1/(0.45 + 0.1) ]0.5 [1 + ∞/(0.45 + ∞) ]0.5 Exp. (5.15)
= 0.5 × 3400 × 1.087 × 1.41
= 0.77 × 3400 = 2620 mm

Slenderness ratio, ly:

ly = 3.46l0y/h = 3.46 × 2620/350 = 25.9

Limiting slenderness ratio, llim:

llim,y = llim,z = 27.9
As ly < llim,y, column not slender in y axis.

5.4.5 Design moments: MEdz about z axis

MEdz = max[M02; M0Ed + M2; M01 + 0.5M2] Cl. 5.8.8.2
where
M02 = Mz + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd Cl. 5.8.8.2(1),
6.1.4
where
Mz = 146.1 kNm from analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections
where
ei = l0/400 Cl. 5.2.7
e0 = 20 mm
∴ M02 = 146.1 + (2965/400) × 1824.1 ≥ 0.02 × 1824.1
= 146.1 + 13.4 > 36.5
= 159.5 kNm
M0Ed = equivalent 1st order moment at about z axis at about
mid-height may be taken as M0ez where
M0ez = (0.6M02 + 0.4M01) ≥ 0.4M02 Cl. 5.8.8.2(2)
= 0.6 × 159.5 + 0.4 × 0 ≥ 0.4 × 159.5 = 95.7 kNm
M2 = nominal 2nd order moment = NEde2 Cl. 5.8.8.2(3)
where
e2 = (1/r) l02/10 Cl. 5.8.8. 3
where
1/r = curvature = KvKh[fyd/(Es × 0.45d)] Exp. (5.34)
where
Kv = a correction factor for axial load
= (nu – n)/(nu – nbal)

161
where
nu = 1 + w
where
w = mechanical ratio
= Asfyd/Acfd
= 1.08 as before
nu = 2.08
n = NEd/Acfcd
= 1824.1/2082 = 0.88
nbal = the value of n at maximum moment
resistance
= 0.40 (default)
Kv = (2.08 – 0.88)/(2.08 – 0.40)
= 1.20/1.68 = 0.71
Kh = a correction factor for creep
= 1 + bhef
where
b = 0.35 + (fck/200) – (l/150)
= 0.35 + 30/200 – 29.3/150
= 0.35 + 0.15 – 0.195
= 0.305
hef = effective creep coefficient‡ Cl. 5.8.4(2)
= h(∞,t0) M0,Eqp/M0Ed
where
h(∞,t0) = final creep coefficient Cl. 3.1.4(2)
= from Figure 3.1 for inside conditions Fig. 3.1a
h = 350 mm, C30/37, t0 = 15
≈ 2.4
M0,Eqp = 1st order moment due to quasi-
permanent loads
Gk + h2 Qk
≈ × Mz + eiNEd
jgGGk + h0gQQk

63.3 + 0.8 × 46.0

= × Mz + eiNEd
1.35 × 63.3 + 1.5 × 46.0
100.1
= × 146.1 + 13.4
154.5
= 108.1 kNm
M0Ed = M02 = 159.5 kNm

‡ With reference to Exp. (5.13N), h may be taken as equal to 2.0. However, for the
ef
purpose of illustration the full derivation is shown here. Exp. (5.1.3N)

162
5.4: Small perimeter column

Kh = 1 + 0.305 × 2.4 × 108.1/159.5

= 1.50
fyd = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
Es = 200000 MPa Cl. 3.2.7(3)
d = effective depth
= 350 – 35 – 8 – 16 = 291 mm
1/r = 0.71 × 1.50 × 434.8/(200000 × 0.45 × 291)
= 0.0000177
l0 = 2965 mm as before
e2 = (1/r) l02/10
= 0.0000177 × 29652/10 = 15.6 mm
∴M2 = NEde2 = 1824.1 × 103 × 15.6 = 28.4 kNm
M01 =0
∴ MEdz = max[M02z; M0Edz + M2; M01 + 0.5M2]
= max[159.5; 95.7 + 28.4; 0 + 28.4/2] = 159.5 kNm

Mz = 146.1 kNm eiNEd = 13.4 kNm MEdz = 159.5 kNm

M2 = 28.4 kNm
MOEdz = 95.8 kNm
+ =
Mz = 0 M2/2 = 14.2 kNm Mz = 0

a) 1st order moments b) Including 2nd order moments: c) Design moments: MEdz
from analysis MEdz = max [M02, MOEd + M2, M01 = 0.5M2] about z axis

Figure 5.13 Design moments MEdz

5.4.6 Design moments: MEdy about y axis

MEdy = max[ M02y ; M0Edy + M2 ; M01 + 0.5M2]
where
M02y = My + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd
= 114.5 + 13.4§ ≥ 36.7 kNm
= 127.9 kNm
M0Edy = (0.6M02y + 0.4 M01y) ≥ 0.4M02y
= 0.6 × 114.5 + 0.4 × 0

§ Imperfections need to be taken into account in one direction only. Cl. 5.8.9(2)

163
= 68.7 kNm
M2 = 0 (as column is not slender not slender about y axis).
∴ MEdy = 127.9 kNm

5.4.7 Design in each direction using charts

= 1824.1 × 103/(3502 × 30)
In z direction: NEd/bhfck
= 0.50
MEd/bh2fck = 159.5 × 106/(3503 × 30)
= 0.124
Assuming 8 bar arrangement, centroid of bars in half section:
d2 ≥ 35 + 8 + 16 + (350/2 – 35 –8 – 16) × 1/4 Fig. C4e)
≥ 59 + 29 = 88 mm
d2/h = 0.25
From Figure C4e) Fig. C4e)
Asfyk/bhfck = 0.50
As = 0.50 × 3502 × 30/500 = 3675 mm2
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. T25 (5180 mm2) OK.
In y direction: MEd/bh2fck = 127.9 × 106/(3503 × 30)
= 0.10
NEd/bhfck = 0.50

From Figure C4e)

Asfyk/bhfck = 0.34
As = 0.34 × 3502 × 30/500 = 2499 mm2
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. T25 (5180 mm2) OK.

5.4.8 Check biaxial bending

ly ≈ lz ∴ OK. Exp. (5.38a)
ez = MEdy/NEd
ey = MEdz/NEd
ey/heq MEdz 159.5 Exp. (5.38b)
= = = 1.25
ez/beq MEdy 127.9
∴ need to check biaxial bending
(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 Exp. (5.39)
where
MRdz = MRdy = moment resistance∴
Using Figure C4e) Fig. C4e)
Asfyk/bhfck = 5180 × 500/(3502 × 30)
= 0.70
for NEd/bhfck = 0.50
MEd/bh2fck = 0.160
∴ MRd = 0.160 × 3503 × 30

164
5.4: Small perimeter column

= 205.8 kNm
a depends on NEd/NRd
where
NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 3502 × 0.85 × 30/1.5 + 5180 × 500/1.15
= 2082.5 + 2252.2
= 4332.7 kN
NEd/NRd = 1824.1/4332.7 = 0.42
∴ a = 1.27
(159.5/205.8)1.27 + (114.5/205.8)1.27 = 0.72 + 0.47 Cl. 5.8.9(4)
= 1.19
∴ No good
∴ Try 8 no. T32 (6432 mm2)
For Asfyk/bhfck = 6432 × 500/(3502 × 30)
= 0.88
for NEd/bhfck = 0.50
MEd/bh2fck = 0.187 Fig. C4e)
∴ MRd = 240.5 kNm
Check biaxial bending
(159.5/245.7)1.27 + (114.5/245.7)1.27 = 0.59 + 0.39 = 0.98 OK

5.4.9 Check maximum area of reinforcement

As/bd = 6432/3502 = 5.2% > 4% Cl. 9.5.2(3) & NA
However, if laps can be avoided in this single lift column then the
integrity of the concrete is unlikely to be affected and 5.2% is
considered OK. OK PD 6687: 2.19

5.4.10 Design of links

Diameter min. = 32/4 = 8 mm Cl. 9.5.3 & NA
Spacing max. = 0.6 × 350 = 210 mm Cl. 9.5.3(3),
9.5.3(4)
∴ Use H8 @ 200 mm cc
5.4.11 Design summary

8 H32
H8 links @ 200 cc
35 mm cover to link
No laps in column section

Note
The beam should be checked for torsion.

Figure 5.14 Design summary: small perimeter column

165
6 Walls
6.0 General
Walls are defined as being vertical elements whose lengths are four times greater than their
thicknesses. Their design does not differ significantly from the design of columns in that axial
loads and moments about each axis are assessed and designed for.

The calculations in this section illustrate the design of a single shear wall.

Generally, the method of designing walls is as follows. In practice, several of these steps may be
combined.
■ Determine design life. EC0 & NA Table NA 2.1
■ Assess actions on the wall. EC1 (10 parts) & UK NAs
■ Determine which combinations of actions apply. EC0 & NA: Tables NA A1.1 &
NA: A1.2(B)
■ Assess durability requirements and determine concrete BS 8500–1
strength.
■ Check cover requirements for appropriate fire Approved Document B
resistance period. EC2–1–2
■ Determine cover for fire, durability and bond. Cl. 4.4.1
■ Analyse structure for critical combination moments Section 5
and axial forces.
■ Check slenderness and determine design moments. Section 5.8
■ Determine area of reinforcement required. Section 6.1
■ Check spacing of bars. Sections 8 & 9

166
Columns
Walls

6.1 Shear wall

Example 6.1 shows the design of a simple linear shear wall as typically used in medium-
rise buildings. Similar principles may be applied to walls that are shaped as C, L, T, Z and
rectangles in-plan, but issues of limiting flange dimensions and shear at corners need to be
addressed. The example shows only ULS design as, apart from minimum areas of steel to
control cracking, SLS issues are generally non-critical in medium-rise structures. For shear
walls in high-rise structures, reference should be made to specialist literature[29].

The example is intended to show how a shear wall providing part of the lateral stability in one
direction in a medium rise structure might be designed by hand.

Axial loads and first order moments are determined. The design considers slenderness in order
to determine design moments, MEd, in the plane perpendicular to the wall. The effects of
allowing for imperfections are also illustrated.

Project details Calculated by chg Job no. CCIP – 041

Shear wall Checked by web Sheet no. 1
Client TCC Date Oct 09

Wall A is 200 mm thick and, in addition to providing vertical support

to 200 mm flat slabs at roof level and floors 1 to 3, it helps to
provide lateral stability to the four-storey office block. Assuming the
stair itself provides no lateral stability, the wall is to be designed for
the critical section at ground and first floor level using BS EN 1990
Exp. (6.10). The concrete is C30/37. The wall is supported on pad
foundations and the ground floor is ground bearing.
X
300
1300
4800 4400
Wall A
1500
4800

7200
4800
300

300 3600 6000 6000 6000 6000 2500 300

30700 N
X
Figure 6
6.11 Typical floor plan

900 Roof

3rd
4@3300
2nd

1st

Gnd
600 Figure 6.2 Section X–X
900

167
6.1.1 Actions
Permanent Variable
actions actions
gk qk
kN/m2 Section 2.8
Roof Paving 40 mm 1.00
Waterproofing 0.50
Insulation 0.10
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Services 0.30
Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
Section 2.4.2
7.05
Imposed load 0.60

Floor Carpet 0.03 Section 2.8

slabs Raised floor 0.30
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Services 0.30
Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
5.78
Imposed load 2.50 Section 2.4.2

Ground Carpet 0.03

floor Raised floor 0.30
slab Services 0.15
(ground Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
bearing) 5.48
Imposed load 3.00 Section 2.4.2

Stairs 150 waist @ 30 4.40 Section 2.8

Treads 0.15 × 0.25 × 25 × 4/2 = 1.88
Screed 0.05 × 22 = 1.10
Plaster 0.21
Tiles and bedding 1.00
8.59
Imposed load 2.50 Section 2.4.2

Cavity 102 mm brickwork 2.37 Section 2.8

wall 50 mm insulation 0.02
100 mm blockwork 1.40
Plaster 0.21
4.00
RC wall 200 mm wall 5.00
Section 2.8
Plaster both sides 0.42
5.42
Wind wk = 1.10 EC1-1-4 & NA

168
6.1: Shear Wall

6.1.2 Load take-down

Consider whole wall. Gk Qk
Item Calculation From item Cum. total From item Cum. total
Roof (6.0/2 + 2.5/2) × (4.4 + 1.5/2) × (7.05
+ 0.6) = 154.3 13.1
Roof (6.0/2) × (1.3/2) × (7.05 + 0.6) = 13.7 1.2
Wall 3.3 × 4.4 × 5.42 = 78.7
246.7 14.3
At above 3rd floor 246.7 14.3
3rd floor (6.0/2) × (1.3/2 + 4.4 + 1.5/2) ×
(5.78 + 2.5) = 100.6 43.5
Landing (2.5/2 × 1.5/2) × (5.78 + 2.5) 11.6 5.0
Wall a. b. 78.7
Stair say 1.1 × 4.4 (8.59 + 2.5) 41.6 12.1
232.5 60.6
At above 2nd floor 479.2 74.9
2nd floor, landing, wall and stair a. b. 232.5 60.6
At above 1st floor 711.7 135.5
1st floor, landing, wall and stair a. b. 232.5 60.6
At above ground floor 944.2 196.1
Ground floor assume 1 m all round =
2 × (1.3/2 + 4.40 + 1.5/2) × (5.48 + 3.0) = 63.6 34.8
250 mm wall to foundation 4.4 × 0.2 × 0.6 × 25 = 13.2
76.8
At above foundation 1021.0 230.9

6.1.3 Design actions due to vertical load at ground–1st

Gk = 944.2 Gk/m = 944.2/4.4 = 214.6 kN/m
Qk = an × 196.1
where
an = 1.1 – n/10
where
n = no. of storeys qualifying for reduction‡ EC1-1-1:
=3 6.3.1.2(11) & NA
= 1.1 – 3/10 = 0.8
∴ Qk = 0.8 × 196.1 = 156.9 kN Qk/m = 156.9/4.4 = 35.7 kN/m

‡ Includes storeys supporting Categories A (residential and domestic), B (office),

C (areas of congregation) and D (shopping), but excludes E (storage and
industrial), F (traffic), G (traffic) and H (roofs).

169
6.1.4 Vertical loads from wind action: moments in plane
Consider wind loads, N–S
300 3600 6000 6000 6000 6000 2500 300

30700

2400 o/a
Wall A 4400

2400

Lift shaft
200 thick
walls
N
wk = 1.10 kN/m2

Figure 6.3 Lateral stability against wind loads N–S

Check relative stiffness of lift shaft and wall A to determine share

of load on wall A.
Lift shaft: ILS = 2.44/12 – 2.04/12 – 0.2 × 1.63/12
= 1.36 m4
Wall A: IWallA = 0.2 × 4.43/12
= 1.41 m4
where I = inertia
∴ Wall A takes 1.41/(1.41 + 1.36) = 51% of wind load.
Check shear centre to resolve the effects of torsion.
Determine centre of gravity, CoGL of the lift shaft.

Area, A Lever arm, x Ax

2.4 × 2.4 = 5.76 1.2 6.912
–2.0 × 2.0 = –4.00 1.2 –4.800
–1.6 × 0.2 = –0.32 2.3 –0.732
1.44 1.38
2400
1600 200 200

CoGL
2400

x Figure 6.4 Lift shaft

170
6.1: Shear wall

x = Ax/A = 1.38/1.44 = 0.956 m

i.e. from face of lift shaft to CoG of shaft
= 2.40 – 0.956 = 1.444 m
Shear centre, Cw of walls, from centreline of wall A
ILS × (1.44 + 24.00 + 0.05‡) 1.36 × 25.49
= = = 12.56 m from wall A
ILS + IWallA 1.36 + 1.41
or = 12.56 + 2.80 – 0.05 = 15.31 from east end of building.

CL Wall A‡
1.45 24.00 2.80
15.31

Wall A

* Cw
* CoGL

Wk
15.35
Figure 6.5 Shear centre, Cw and centre of action, Wk

Centre of action (30.7/2 = 15.35 m from end of building) and shear

centre (almost) coincide. ∴ there is no torsion to resolve in the
stability system for wind in a N–S direction.#

900 Roof

3300
3rd
14100

3300
2nd
wk = 17.2 kN/m
3300
1st

3300
Gnd
600 Figure 6.6 Wall A
900
– wind loads N–S
300 4400 300

∴ Wall A takes 51% of wind load, so characteristic wind load on wall A,

wk, wall A = 51% × wk × Lx = 51% × 1.1 × 30.7 = 17.2 kN/m
‡ Assuming centreline of wall A is 50 mm to right hand side of grid.
#Had there been significant torsion this would have been resolved into +/– forces
in a couple based on the shear walls.

171
∴ at just above ground floor, characteristic in-plane moment
in wall A, Mk, due in this case to wind
= 17.2 × 14.12/2 = 1709.8 kNm
Resolving into couple using 1 m either end of wall‡, characteristic wind
load in each end, Wk
= 1709.8/3.4 = ±502.9 kN

6.1.5 Effects of global imperfections in plane of wall A

Roof HIR
yI

3rd HI3

2nd HI2

1st
HI1

Gnd
HIG

Figure 6.7 Global imperfections

Global imperfections can be represented by forces Hi at floor level

where
Hi = yi(Nb – Na) Exp. (5.4)
where
yi = (1/200) aham Cl. 5.2(1), 5.2(5),
where 5.2(8) & NA
ah = 0.67 ≤ 2/l 0.5 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67 ≤ 2/14.70.5 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67 ≤ 0.52 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67
am = [0.5(1 + 1/m)]0.5
where
m = no. of members contributing to the total effect
= 25 vertical elements on 4 floors
= 100

‡ For medium-rise shear walls there are a number of methods of design. Cl. 9.6.1
suggests strut-and-tie. Another method[26] is to determine elastic tensile and
compression stresses from NEd/bL +/– 6MEd/bL2 and determine reinforcement
requirements based on those maxima. The method used here assumes a couple,
consisting of 1.0 m of wall either end of the wall. The reinforcement in tension is Vol. 2
assumed to act at the centre of one end and the concrete in compression (with a
rectangular stress distribution) acts at the centre of the other end. The forces
generated by the couple add or subtract from the axial load in the 1 m ends of
the walls. The method is useful for typical straight shear walls of say 2.5 to 5.0 m
in length.

172
6.1: Shear wall

∴ am = 0.71
∴ yi = 0.67 × 0.71/200
= 0.0024
Nb, Na = axial forces in members below and above
(Nb – Na) = axial load from each level
At roof level
Area = 30.4 × 14.5 – 1.3 × 2.5 – 3.6 × 4.8 = 420.3 m3
Perimeter = 2 × (30.4 + 14.5) = 89.8 m
(Na – Nb) = axial load from roof level
= 420.3 × (7.05 + 0.6) + 89.8 × 0.9 × 4.0 = 3286.4 + 252.2 kN
At 3rd floor
(Na – Nb) = 420.3 × (5.78 + 2.5) + 89.8 × 3.3 × 4.0 = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN
At 2nd floor
(Na – Nb) = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN
At 1st floor
(Na – Nb) = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN
HiR = 0.0024 × (3286.4 + 252.2) = 7.9 + 0.6 = 8.5 kN
Hi3 = Hi2 = Hi1 = 0.0024 × (3615.7 + 1050.8) = 8.7 + 2.5 = 11.2 kN
Characteristic design moment at ground floor,
Mk = 8.5 × 13.2 + 11.2 × (9.90 + 6.60 + 3.30)
= 112.2 + 221.8 = 334.0 kNm
As before, wall A resists 51% of this moment. Resolving into couple
using 1 m either end of wall,
∴ GkH§ = 0.51 × 334.0/3.4 = ± 50.1 kN
i.e. GkH = ±50.1 kN/m

6.1.6 Check for global second order effects

To check whether the building might act as a sway frame check Cl. 5.8.3.3(1)
ns SEcd Ic Exp. (5.18)
FV,Ed ≤ kl =
ns + 1.6 L2
where
FV,Ed = Total vertical load (on braced and bracing members)
where
Floor area = (30.7 – 2 × 0.15) × 14.4 – (2 × 0.15) – 3.6
× 4.8 – 1.3 × 2.5
= 428.6 – 20.5 = 408.1

§As Hi derives mainly from permanent actions its resulting effects are
considered as being a permanent action too.

173
Loads Gk Qk
from roof: 408 (7.05 + 0.6) = 2876 245
3–1 floors: 3 × 408 (5.78 + 2.5) = 7075 3060
Allow cavity wall at 1st floor and above
(3 × 3.30 + 0.9) × 2 × (30.4 + 14.1) × 4.0 = 3845
13705 3305
Imposed load reduction 20% (see 6.2.3) 661
13705 2644
∴FV,Ed ≈ 13705 × 1.35 + 1.5 × 2644
= 22468 kN
kl = 0.31 Cl. 5.8.2(6) & NA
ns = number of storeys
= 4 (including roof) Table 3.1,
Ecd = Ecm/gCE = 33/1.2 = 27.5 GPa 5.8.6(3) & NA
Ic = Inertia of bracing members
in N–S direction
Ic = 1.36 + 1.41 = 2.77 m4 (See Section 6.1.4)
in E–W direction
ILS, with reference to Figure 6.4

h×d Area, A × Ax Ax 2 I
2.4 × 2.4 = 5.76 1.2 6.912 8.294 2.765
–2.0 × 2.0 = –4.00 1.2 –4.800 –5.760 –1.333
–1.6 × 0.2 = –0.32 2.3 –0.732 –1.683 –0.001
1.44 1.38 0.851 1.431
as before (6.1.4), x = 1.38/1.44
= 0.956 m
ILS = INU = Ax + I – Ax 2
2

= 0.851 + 1.431 – 1.44 × 0.956

= 0.965 m4
L = total height of building above level of moment restraint
= 14.7 (see Figure 6.6)
Check
ns SEcdIc
kl × on weak E–W axis:
ns + 1.6 L2
= 0.31 × [4/(4 + 1.6)] × 27500 × 103 × (0.965/14.72)
= 27200 kN
i.e. > FV,Ed ∴ no need to design for 2nd order effects.

174
6.1: Shear wall

6.1.7 Design moments – perpendicular to plane of wall

CL

150
CL
650

B B

1350
200 1st
4400

A A
Gnd
750

up
CL

Figure 6.8 Plan of wall A and location Figure 6.9 Section A–A
of sections A–A and B–B

Section A–A @ 1st floor

The slab frames into the wall. For the purposes of assessing fixed
end moments, the width of slab contributing to the moments in the
wall is assumed to be the length of the wall plus distances half way
to adjacent supports either end. Therefore, consider the fixed end
moment for 1.50/2 + 4.40 + 1.30/2 = 5.8 m width of adjoining slab
framing into the 4.4 m long shear wall (see Figure 6.8).

kw
n

ks
kw

Figure 6.10 Subframe section A–A @ 1st floor

FEM‡: assuming imposed load is a leading variable action: EC0: Exp. (6.10)
= nl2/8 & NA
= 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 1.5 × 2.5) × 6.02/8
= 5.8 × 11.6 × 62/8 = 302.8 kNm
‡ FEM: fixed end moment

175
kw = EI/l = E × 4400 × 2003/(12 × 3300)
= E × 8.88 × 105
ks = EI/2l = E × 5800 × 2003/(2 × 12 × 6000)
= E × 3.22 × 105
M = 302.8 × 8.88/(2 × 8.8 + 3.22)
= 302.8 × 0.42 = 121.2 kNm
i.e. 121.2/4.40 = 27.5 kNm/m @ ULS

Similarly, assuming imposed load is an accompanying action:

FEM = 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 2.5) × 62/8
= 5.8 × 10.4 × 62/8 = 271.4 kNm
∴M = 271.4 × 0.42/4.40 = 25.9 kNm/m @ ULS

Section A–A @ ground floor

By inspection not critical – nominal moment.

Section B–B @ 1st

Consider the landing influences half of wall (2.2 m long) and that
this section of wall is subject to supporting half the slab considered
before at 1st floor level at Section A–A.

1st
1650

Landing

Gnd

Figure 6.11 Section B–B

FEM = 302.8/2 = 151.4 kNm

kw = I/l
= 2200 × 2003/(12 × 1650) = 8.88 × 105
ks = 3.22 × 105/2 = 1.61 × 105
M = 151.4 × 8.88/(2 × 8.88 + 1.61)
= 151.4 × 0.46
= 69.6 kNm
i.e. 63.8/2.2 = 31.6 kNm/m @ ULS

176
6.1: Shear wall

Similarly, assuming imposed load is an accompanying action:

FEM = 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 2.5) × 62/8
= 5.8 × 10.4 × 62/8 = 271.4 kNm
∴M = 271.4 × 0.46/(2 × 2.2) = 28.4 kNm/m @ ULS
Section B–B @ landing level and ground floor
By inspection not critical

6.1.8 Consider slenderness of wall at ground floor

To derive maximum slenderness (at south end of wall), ignore effect
of landing.
Effective length, l0 = 0.75 × (3300 – 200) = 2325 Table C16
l = 3.46 × l0/h = 3.46 × 2325/200 = 40.2 Cl. 5.8.3.2(1)
Cl. 5.8.3.1(1),
Limiting slenderness, llim = 20 ABC/n0.5
where Exp. (5.13N)
A = 0.7
B = 1.1
C = 1.7 – rm
where
rm = M01/M02
= say = –0.25
C = 1.95
n = NEd/Acfd
where
NEd = 214.6 × 1.25 + 31.2 × 1.5 × 0.7 + 502.9 × 1.5 +
98.2 × 1.5 × 0.7‡
= 268.3 + 32.8 + 754.4 + 103.1
= 1158.6 kN
Acfd = 200 × 1000 × 0.85 × 30/1.5 = 3400 kN
∴ n = 0.34
∴ llim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 1.95/0.340.5 = 51.5
∴ As l < llim wall is not slender and ∴ no secondary moments

6.1.9 Summary: design forces on wall, ground–1st floor

At ground to 1st consider maxima.
Vertical loads Gk = 214.6 kN/m
Qk = 35.7 kN/m

Vertical load due to in-plane bending and wind Wk = ±502.9 kN/m

Vertical load due to in-plane bending and imperfections
GkH = ±50.1 kN/m

Maximum moment out of plane, floor imposed load as leading action

M = 31.6 kN/m @ ULS
Maximum moment out of plane, floor imposed load as accompanying action
M = 28.4 kN/m @ ULS
‡ Assuming wind load is lead variable action.

177
6.1.10 Combinations of actions at ground–1st floor
a) At ULS, for maximum axial load, Wk is leading variable action
NEd = 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk1 + 1.5c0Qki
= 1.35 (214.6 + 50.1) + 1.5 × 502.9 + 1.5 × 0.7 × 35.7
= 357.3 + 754.4 + 37.5
= 1149.2 kN/m
Cl. 5.8.8.2(1),
MEd = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd 6.1.4
where
M = moment from 1st order analysis
= 28.4 kNm/m
ei = l0 /400 = 2325/400 = 5.8 mm Cl. 5.2(7), 5.2(9)
e0 = h/30 ≥ 20 mm = 20 mm Cl. 6.1.4
MEd = 28.4 + 0.0058 × 1149.2.1 ≥ 0.020 × 1149.2
= 28.4 + 6.7 ≥ 23.0 = 35.1 kNm/m
b) At ULS, for minimum axial load, Wk is leading variable action
NEd = 1.0 × 214.6 – 1.35 × 50.1 – 1.5 × 502.9 + 0 × 35.7
= –607.4 kN/m (tension)
MEd = 28.4‡ + 0.0058 × 607.4 ≥ 0.020 × 602.4
= 28.4 + 3.5 ≥ 23.0
= 31.9 kNm/m

c) At ULS, for maximum out of plane bending assuming Qk is leading

variable action
NEd = 1.35 (214.6 + 50.1) + 1.5 × 35.7 + 1.5 × 0.5 × 502.9
= 357.3 + 53.6 + 377.2
= 788.1 kN/m
MEd = 31.6 + 0.0058 × 788.1 ≥ 0.020 × 788.1
= 31.6 + 4.6 ≥ 15.8
= 36.2 kNm/m
or
NEd = 1.0 × 214.6 – 1.35 × 50.1 – 0 × 31.2 – 1.5 × 0.5 × 502.9
= 214.6 – 67.6 – 0 – 377.2
= –230.2 kN/m (tension)
MEd = 31.6 + 0.0058 × 230.2
= 33.0 kNm/m
d) Design load cases
Consolidate c) into a) and b) to consider two load cases:
NEd = 1149.4 kN/m,
MEd = 36.2 kN/m (out of plane)
and NEd = –607.4 kN/m,
MEd = 36.2 kN/m (out of plane)

‡ Strictly incompatible with Qk = 0. However, allow Qk = 0.

178
6.1: Shear wall

6.1.11 Design: cover above ground

cnom = cmin + Dcdev
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur] Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar = 20 mm vertical or 10 mm lacers
cmin,dur = for XC1 = 15 mm
Dcdev = 10 mm
∴cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to lacers
(35 mm to vertical bars)

6.1.12 Fire resistance

Assuming 1-hour fire resistance required for, as a worst case, μfi = 0.7
and fire on both sides.
Min. thickness = 140 mm, min. axis distance = 10 mm i.e. not critical EC2-1-2: Table 5.4

6.1.13 Design using charts

For compressive load:
d 2/h = (25 + 10 + 16/2)/200 = 0.215
∴ interpolate between charts C5d) and C5e) for Figs C5d), C5e)
NEd/bhfck = 1149.4 × 103/(200 × 1000 × 30) = 0.192
MEd/bh2fck = 36.2 × 106/(2002 × 1000 × 30) = 0.030
Gives:
Asfyk/bhfck = 0 ∴ minimum area of reinforcement required
= 0.002 Ac Cl. 9.6.2 & NA
= 0.002 × 200 × 1000
= 400 mm2/m
= 200 mm2/m each face
max. 400 mm cc, min. 12 mm diameter Cl. 9.6.2(3);
Try T12 @ 400 SMDSC

e + e = e › s

As /2 sst2

+ = ›

sst1
As /2

0 0 0 0

Moment Tension Combined Combined

Figure 6.12 Stresses and strains in wall subject to tension and

out of p
plane moment

179
For tensile load and moment:
Working from first principles, referring to Figure 6.12 and ignoring
contribution from concrete in tension,
NEd = (sst1 + sst2) × As/2
and MEd = (sst1 – sst2) × As/2 × (d – d2)

so sst1 + sst2 = 2NEd/As

and sst1 – sst2 = 2MEd/[(d – d2)As]

∴ 2sst1 = 2NEd/As + 2MEd/[(d – d2)As]

∴ As = (NEd/sst1) + MEd/(d – d2)sst1
sst1 = fyk/gS = 500/1.15 = 434.8
∴ As = 607.4 × 103/434.8 + 36.2 × 106/[(157 – 43) × 434.8]
= 1397 + 730
= 2127 mm2
sst2 = 2NEd/As – sst1 = 571.7 – 434.8 = 136 MPa
By inspection all concrete is in tension zone and may be ignored.
Use 6 no. H16 @ 200 cc both sides for at least
1 m each end of wall (2412 mm2).

6.1.14 Horizontal reinforcement

As, hmin = 0.001As or 25% As vert Cl. 9.6.3(1) & NA
= 200 mm2 or 0.25 × 2036 = 509 mm2/m
∴ requires 254 mm2/m each side
Spacing ≤ 400 mm Cl. 9.6.3(2)
Links not required. Cl. 9.6.4(1)
Use H10 @ 300 (262 mm2/m) both sides.

6.1.15 Check for tension at top of foundation

Permanent and variable: Section 6.1.2
Gk = 1021.0/4.4 = 232.0 kN/m
Qk = 230.9/4.4 = 52.5 kN/m
Wind: Section 6.1.4
Mk = 17.2 × 14.1 × [14.1/2 + 0.6] = 1855.3 kN/m
Resolved into couple 1 m either end of wall
Wkw = 1855.3/3.4 = ±545.7 kN/m
Global imperfections: Section 6.1.5
Mk = 8.5 × 13.8 + 11.2 × (10.5 + 7.2 + 3.9 + 0.6)
= 365.9 kNm
GkH = 365.9 × 0.51/3.4 = 54.9 kN/m

180
6.1: Shear wall

At ULS for maximum axial tension Wk is lead imposed load:

NEd = 1.0 × 232.0 – 1.35 × 54.9 – 1.5 × 545.7 + 0 × 52.5
= –660.7 kN/m
MEd = nominal = e2NEd = 0.02 × 660.7 Cl. 6.1.4
= 13.2 kNm/m
As before
NEd MEd
As = +
fyk/gM (d – d2)fyk/gM
= 660.7 × 103/434.8 + 13.2 × 106/[(157 – 43) × 434.8]
= 1520 + 266
= 1786 mm2 i.e. not critical
∴ Use 6 no. H16 @ 200 cc b.s. for at least 1 m either end of wall
(2412 mm2).

6.1.16 Check for axial compression at top of foundation

At ULS for maximum axial compression Wk is lead imposed load:
NEd = 1.35 × 232.0 + 1.35 × 54.9 + 1.5 × 545.7 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 52.5
= 1261.0 kN/m
MEd = nominal = e2NEd = 0.02 × 1261.0 Cl. 6.1.4
= 25.2 kNm/m
By inspection not critical (minimum reinforcement required). Section 6.1.13
∴ tension critical as above.

6.1.17 Design: cover below ground

cnom = cmin + Dcdev
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur] Exp. (4.1)
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar = 16 mm vertical or 10 mm lacers
cmin,dur = for assumed Aggressive Chemical Environment for BS 8500-1
Concrete (ACEC) class AC1 ground conditions Annex A[14],
= 25 mm How to: Building
structures[8]
Dcdev = 10 mm
cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to lacers
(45 mm to vertical bars)
In order to align vertical bars from foundation into Gnd–1st floor lift
as starter bars, locally increase thickness of wall to say
250 mm thick with cnom = 50 mm

181
6.1.18 Check stability
Assume base extends 0.3 m beyond either end of wall A, i.e. is 5.0 m long
and is 1.2 m wide by 0.9 m deep.
EC0: Table
Overturning moments A1.2(A) & NA
Wind (see Figure 6.6) Fig. 6.6
Mk = 17.2 × 14.1 × [14.1/2 + 1.5]
= 2073.5 kNm
Global imperfections (see Section 6.1.5) Fig. 6.7
Mk = 0.51 x [8.5 × 14.7 + 11.2 × (11.4 + 8.1 + 4.8 + 1.5)]
= 0.51 x [125.0 + 11.2 × 25.8]
= 0.51 x 414.0
= 211 kNm
Restoring moment
Mk = (1021.0 + 5.0 x 1.2 x 0.9 x 25 + 0 x 230.9 ) x (0.3 + 2.2)
= 2890 kNm
At ULS of EQU,
Overturning moment
= fn(gQ,1Qk1 + gG,supGk) EC0: Table
= 1.5 x 2073.5 + 1.1 x 211.0 = 3342.4 kNm A1.2(A) & NA
Restoring moment
= fn(gG,infGk) EC0:
= 0.9 x 2890 = 2601 kNm i.e. > 1818.4 kNm Table A1.2(A)
∴ no good & NA
Try 1.05 m outstand
Restoring moment
Mk = 2890 (1.05 + 2.2) / (0.3 + 2.2)
= 3757.0 kNm
At ULS, restoring moment = 0.9 x 357.0
= 3381.3 kNm
∴OK. Use 1.05 m outstand to wall.
6.1.19 Design summary

1st
Lacers H10 @
300 m outside
25 mm cover to 200 mm
wall above ground floor
12 12 24H16 @ 200
H12 @ 400 b.s
Gnd (12NF, 12FF)
50 mm cover
to 250 wall
below ground floor

1050 1050

182
7: References and further reading

7 References and further reading

References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–1: Design of
concrete structures – General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
1a National Annex to Eurocode 2 – Part 1–1. BSI, 2005.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–2: Design of
concrete structures – General rules – Structural fire design. BSI, 2004.
2a National Annex to Eurocode 2 – Part 1–2. BSI, 2005.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–2, Eurocode 2 – Part 2: Design of
concrete structures – Bridges. BSI, 2005.
3a National Annex to Eurocode 2 – Part 2. BSI, 2007.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–3, Eurocode 2 – Part 3: Design of
concrete structures – Liquid-retaining and containment structures. BSI, 2006.
4a National Annex to Eurocode 2 – Part 3. BSI, 2007.
5 R S NARAYANAN & C H GOODCHILD. The Concrete Centre. Concise Eurocode 2.
CCIP-005. TCC, 2006.
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. PD 6687 Background paper to the UK National
Annexes BS EN 1992–1. BSI, 2006.
7 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110 Structural use of concrete – Part 1: Code of
practice for design and construction. BSI,1997.
8 BROOKER, O et al. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2. CCIP-006.
The Concrete Centre, 2006. Updated for download only 2009.
9 THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE CONCRETE SOCIETY/DTI. Standard
method of detailing structural concrete, Third Edition. IStructE, 2006.
10 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design.
BSI, 2002.
10a National Annex to Eurocode. BSI, 2004.
11 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures
(10 parts). BSI, 2002–2006.
11a National Annexes to Eurocode 1. BSI, 2005–2008 and in preparation.
12 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1997–1, Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design.
General rules. BSI, 2004.
12a National Annex to Eurocode 7 BS EN 1997–1. BSI, 2007.
13 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1998–1, Eurocode 8. Design of structures for
earthquake resistance. General rules. Seismic actions for buildings. BSI, 2004.
13a National Annex to Eurocode 8 BS EN 1998–1. BSI, 2008.
14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8500–1: Concrete – Complementary British
Standard to BS EN 206–1: Method of specifying and guidance to the specifier. BSI, 2002.
15 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 4449: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete –
Weldable reinforcing steel – Bar, coil and decoiled product – Specification. BSI, 2005.
16 CONSTRUCT. National structural concrete specification for building construction, Third
Edition, CS 152. The Concrete Society on behalf of Construct, 2004.
17 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 13670: Execution of concrete structures – Part 1:
Common. BSI, in preparation, due 2010.
18 CONSTRUCT. National structural concrete specification for building construction, Fourth
edition, in preparation.

183
19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8666: 2005, Scheduling, dimensioning, bending
and cutting of steel for reinforcement: Specification. BSI, 2005.
20 THE QUEEN'S PRINTER OF ACTS OF PARLIAMENT, The Building Regulations 2000. The
Stationery Office Limited, 2000.
21 THE STATIONERY OFFICE LIMITED (TSO), Building (Amendment) (No 2) Regulations 2002
and the Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) (Amendment) Regulations 2002. TSO, 2002.
22 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. DD ENV 13670–1: 2000: Execution of concrete
structures: Common. BSI, 2000.
23 COOK, N. Designers guide to EN 1991–4 Actions on structures. Wind actions. Thomas
Telford, London, 2007.
24 DCLG. Guide to the use of EN 1991–1–4 – Wind actions. DCLG Publications, 2006.
www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningbuilding/
buildingregulationsresearch/buildingdivisionresearch/
25 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991–1–4: Eurocode 1. Actions on structures.
General actions. Wind actions. BSI, 2005.
25a National Annex to Eurocode 1 – Part 1–4. BSI, 2008.
26 BROOKER, O. Concrete buildings scheme design manual, (EC2 edition). CCIP-051. The
Concrete Centre, 2009.
27 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical Report 64, Guide to the design and construction of RC
flat slabs, CCIP-022. The Concrete Society, 2007.
28 GOODCHILD, C H & WEBSTER, R M. RC spreadsheets v3, CCIP-008CD. User guide to RC
spreadsheets V3, CCIP-008. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
29 IRWIN, A W. Design of shear wall buildings, Report R102. CIRIA, 1984.
30 THE CONCRETE CENTRE. Worked examples to Eurocode 2, Volume 2. CCIP-042. In
preparation.
31 MOSELEY, B, BUNGEY, J & HULSE, R. Reinforced concrete design to Eurocode 2, Sixth
Edition. Palgrave McMillan, 2007.
32 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Deflections in concrete slabs and beams. TR 58. The Concrete
Society, 2005.
33 BEEBY, A. Modified proposals for controlling deflections by means of ratios of span to effective
depth, Technical Report 456, Cement and Concrete Association, Wexham Springs, 1971.
34 ALLEN, A H. Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110 simply explained. Spon, London, 1988.
35 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of concrete building
structures to Eurocode 2. IStructE, 2006.

Further reading
■ BEEBY A W & NARAYANAN R S. Designers guide to the Eurocodes – EN 1992–1–1
and EN 1992–1–2 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings and structural fire design. Thomas Telford, 2005.
■ BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. PP 1990:2007. Structural Eurocodes, Extracts from
the structural Eurocodes for students of structural design, second edition. BSI, London,
2007.
■ HENDY C R & SMITH D A., Designers guide to the Eurocodes – EN 1992–2 Eurocode 2:
Design of concrete structures. Part 2: Concrete bridges, Thomas Telford, 2007.
■ THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical Report 64, Guide to the design and construction of RC
flat slabs, CCIP-022. The Concrete Society, 2007.

184
Appendix A: Derived formulae

Appendix A: Derived formulae

A1 Flexure: beams and slabs
A1.1 Singly reinforced sections
The rectangular stress block shown below in Figure A1 may be used.

d2 ec nfcd
esc Fc
As2 lx Fsc
x
neutral axis
h d z
As Fst Fig. 3.5
es
a) Section b) Strain c) Forces

Figure A1
Strains and forces in a section

For grades of concrete up to C50/60, ecu = 0.0035, n = 1 and l = 0.8

3.1.6(1), 2.4.2.4(1)
fcd = acc fck /gC = 0.85 fck /1.5 & NA

fyd = fyk / gS = fyk /1.15 = 0.87fyk

2.4.2.4(1) & NA

For singly reinforced sections, the design equations can be derived as follows:
Lever arm, z

Fc
0.8x

z = d – 0.4x

Fst
Figure A2
Beam lever arm

Fc = (0.85 fck /1.5) b (0.8x) = 0.453fck bx

Fst = 0.87As fyk

Consider moment‡, M, about the centre of the tension force:

M = 0.453fckbxz
Now z = d – 0.4x
∴ x = 2.5(d – z)
M = 0.453fck b2.5(d – z)z
= 1.1333 (fck bzd – fck b z2)
Let K = M/bd 2fck
= 1.1333 (fck bzd – fck bz2)/bd2fck
= 1.1333(zd – z2)/d 2
∴0 = 1.1333[(z/d)2 – (z/d)] + K
= (z/d)2 – (z/d) + 0.88235K
‡ In practice the design moment, MEd would be used. 185
Solving the quadratic equation:
z/d = [1 + (1 – 3.529K)0.5]/2
z = d[1 + [1 – 3.529K)0.5]/2

It is considered good practice in the UK to limit z/d to a maximum of 0.95d. (This guards against
Table C5 relying on very thin sections of concrete which at the extreme top of a section may be of
questionable strength.) Tables giving values of z/d and x/d for values of K may be used.

Area of reinforcement, As
Taking moments about the centre of the compression force:
M = 0.87As fykz
As = M/(0.87fyk z)

Limiting value of relative flexural compressive stress, K'

Assuming no redistribution takes place, a limiting value (on the strength of concrete in
compression) for K can be calculated (denoted K') as follows.
ecu3 = concrete strain = 0.0035
Table 3.1 es = reinforcement strain
= 500/(1.15 × 200 × 103) = 0.0022
From strain diagram, Figure A1
x = 0.0035d/(0.0035 + 0.0022)
= 0.6d
From equations above:
M = 0.453fck bxz
M' = 0.453fck b 0.6d (d – 0.4 × 0.6 d)
= 0.207fck b d2
∴ K' = 0.207

It is often considered good practice to limit the depth of the neutral axis to avoid ‘over-
reinforcement’ (i.e. to ensure that the reinforcement is yielding at failure, thus avoiding brittle
failure of the concrete). Often x/d is limited to 0.45. This is referred to as the balanced section
because at the ultimate limit state the concrete and steel reach their ultimate strains at the
same time[31]. This is not a Eurocode 2 requirement and is not accepted by all engineers.
Nonetheless for x = 0.45d
From equations above:
M = 0.453fck bxz
M' = 0.453fck b 0.45d (d – 0.4 × 0.45d)
= 0.167fck bd2
∴ K' = 0.167
x/d is also restricted by the amount of redistribution carried out. For fck ≤ 50 MPa
Cl. 5.5(4)
d ≥ 0.4 + (0.6 + 0.0014ecu)xu/d
where
d = redistributed moment/elastic bending moment before redistribution
xu = depth of the neutral axis at ULS after redistribution
ecu = compressive strain in the concrete at ULS

This gives the values in Table A1.

186
Appendix A: Derived formulae

Table A1
Limits on K' with respect to redistribution ratio, d

d 1 0.95 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7

% redistribution 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
K' 0.208 0.195 0.182 0.168 0.153 0.137 0.120

If K > K' the section should be resized or compression reinforcement is required. In line with
consideration of good practice outlined above, this publication adopts a maximum value
of K' = 0.167.

A1.2 Compression reinforcement, As2

The majority of beams used in practice are singly reinforced, and these beams can be designed using
the formula derived above. In some cases, compression reinforcement is added in order to:
■ Increase section strength where section dimensions are restricted, i.e. where K > K'
■ To reduce long term deflection
■ To decrease curvature/deformation at ultimate limit state

As2

As

Figure A3
Beam with compression reinforcement

With reference to Figure A1, there is now an extra force

Fsc = 0.87As2 fyk

The area of tension reinforcement can now be considered in two parts, the first part to balance
the compressive force in the concrete, the second part to balance the force in the compression
steel. The area of tension reinforcement required is therefore:
As = K' fcu bd 2/(0.87fyk z) + As2
where
z is calculated using K' instead of K
As2 can be calculated by taking moments about the centre of the tension force:
M = M' + 0.87fyk As2 (d – d2)
M = K' fcu bd 2 + 0.87fyk As2 (d – d2)

Rearranging:
As2 = (K – K')fck bd 2/[0.87 fyk (d – d2)]

A2 Shear
A2.1 Shear resistance (without shear reinforcement), VRd,c
VRd,c = [CRd,c k(100r1 fck )1/3 + k1 scp] bwd ≥ (vmin + k1 scp ) bwd Exp. (6.2)

where
NA
CRd,c = 0.18/gC = 0.18/1.5 = 0.12

k = 1+ (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2.0 187

r1 = As /(bwd) ≤ 0.02
k1 = 0.15
scp = 0 for non-prestressed concrete
vmin = 0.035k1.5 fck0.5
∴VRd,c = 0.12k(100 r1 fck)1/3 bwd ≥ 0.035k1.5 fck0.5 bwd

A2.2 Shear capacity

The capacity of a concrete section with vertical shear reinforcement to act
as a strut, VRd,max:
Exp. (6.9) VRd,max = acwbwZv1 fcd /(cot y + tan y)
where
acw = 1.0
Cl. 6.2.3(3) Note 1, v1 = v = 0.6 [1 – fck /250]
Exp. (6.6N) & NA
fcd = acc fck /gC = 1.00 × fck /1.5
∴VRd,max = 0.40 bwz fck [1 – fck /250]/(cot y + tan y)

Rearranging this equation gives:

y = 0.5 sin–1 [vEdz /(0.20fck [1 – fck /250])] ≥ cot–12.5
where
vEdz = VEd /bz = VEd /(b0.9d)
In most cases, where cot y = 2.5, y = 21.8°
vRd,max,cot y = 2.5 = 0.138bwz fck [1 – fck /250]
or
vRd,max,cot y = 2.5 = 0.138fck [1 – fck /250]
where
vRd,max,cot y = 2.5 = VRd,max,cot y = 2.5 /(bz)
= VRd,max,cot y = 2.5 /(0.9bd)
Where cot y > 2.5, the angle of the strut and vRd,max should be calculated, or vRd,max may be
looked up in tables or charts (e.g. Table C7 or Figure C1).

A2.3 Shear reinforcement

Exp. (6.13) VRd,s = (Asw/s)zfywd(cot y + cot a)sin a ≥ VEd
where
Asw = cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement
s = spacing
z = lever arm (approximate value of 0.9d may normally be used)
fywd = fywk /gS = design yield strength of the shear reinforcement
a = angle of the links to the longitudinal axis. For vertical links,
cot a = 0 and sin a = 1.0
Rearranging for vertical links:
Asw/s ≥ VEd /zfywd cot y
or
Asw/s ≥ vEd,z bw/ fywd cot y

Minimum area of shear reinforcement

Exp. (9.5N) & NA Asw,min /(sbw sin a) ≥ 0.08fck0.5/fyk
where
s = longitudinal spacing of the shear reinforcement
bw = breadth of the web

188
Appendix A: Derived formulae

a = angle of the shear reinforcement to the longitudinal axis of the member. For vertical
links sin a = 1.0.
Rearranging for vertical links:
Asw,min /s ≥ 0.08bw sin a fck0.5/fyk

A3 Columns

_\]6a\\n_\d(g<
e\n+ sl\ ]
el\ :l+
+
]\
q
a
g'Zqbl Fig. 6.1

er :l*
]+
slm
e\ Figure A4
Section in axial
a) Strain diagram b) Stress diagram compression and
bending

For axial load

NEd = fcd bdc + As2ssc – As1sst

But as As2 = As1 = AsN/2

NEd = fcd bdc + AsN(ssc – sst)/2
NEd – fcd bdc = AsN(ssc – sst)/2
(NEd – fcd bdc)/(ssc – sst)= AsN/2
AsN/2 = (NEd – fcd bdc)/(ssc – sst)

∴ AsN/2 = (NEd – accnfckbdc /gC)/(ssc – sst)

For moment about centre of column

MEd = fcd bdc(h/2 – dc /2) + As2ssc(h/2 – d2) + As1sst(h/2 – d2)
But as As2 = As1 = AsM/2
MEd = fcd bdc(h/2 – dc /2) + AsM (ssc + sst)(h/2 – d2)/2
MEd – fcd bdc(h/2 – dc /2) = AsM (ssc + sst)(h/2 – d2)/2
[MEd – fcd bdc(h/2 – dc /2)]/(ssc + sst)(h/2 – d2) = AsM/2

∴ AsM/2 = [MEd – accnfck bdc(h/2 – dc /2)/gC]/[(ssc + sst)(h/2 – d2)]

Solution
Iterate x such that AsN = AsM

Note
Cl. 6.1(6), Fig. 6.1,
For sections wholly in compression, the strain is limited such that average strain
Table 3.1
≤ ecs = 0.00175 (assuming bilinear stress–strain relationship).

189
Appendix B: Serviceability limit state
B1 Deflection
In many cases, particularly with slabs, deflection is critical to design.
Eurocode 2, Cl. 7.4 allows for deflection to be controlled by using span:depth ratio (L/d) checks
in accordance with Cl. 7.4.2 or by calculation in accordance with Cl. 7.4.3. It is important to
differentiate between the various methods used in checking deformation as they will each give
different answers. Three popular methods are discussed below. Only that described in Section
B1.1 below is suitable for hand calculation.

B1.1 TCC method[5,19]

The in-service stress of reinforcement, ss, is used to determine a factor, 310/ss , which is used
to modify the basic span : effective depth ratio as allowed in Cl. 7.4.2(2) of Eurocode 2[2] and
moderated by the National Annex[2a]. This method, highlighted as factor F3 in Concise Eurocode
2[5], is intended to be used in hand calculations to derive (conservative) values of ss from
available ULS moments. In accordance with Note 5 of Table NA.5 of the UK NA[2a], the ratio for
As,prov /As,req is restricted to 1.5: in effect this limits the factor 310/ss to 1.5.
where‡
ss = (fyk /gS) (wqp /wult) (As,req /As,prov) /d ≤ 310/1.5
where
fyk = characteristic strength of reinforcement = 500 MPa
gS = partial factor for reinforcement = 1.15
wqp = quasi-permanent load (UDL assumed)
wperm = ultimate load (UDL assumed)
As,req = area of reinforcement required
As,prov = area of reinforcement provided
d = redistribution ratio

B1.2 RC Spreadsheets method[28]

The RC spreadsheets TCCxx.xls [28] use the span : depth method of checking deformation but use
an accurate method for determining ss (see B3.2 below), which again is used to determine the
moderating factor = 310/ss. Again, in accordance with Note 5 of Table NA.5 of the UK NA[2a],
the ratio for As,prov/As,req is restricted to 1.5: in effect this limits the factor 310/ss to 1.5.

Separate analyses using quasi-permanent loads need to be carried out. For each span, an SLS
neutral axis depth is determined, then sc and ss are derived for the quasi-permanent load
conditions. The factor ss is used in accordance with Eurocode 2[2] and the current National
Annex[2a], to modify the basic span : effective depth ratio.

Whilst this method gives a more accurate and less conservative assessment of ss, it is only
suitable for computer spreadsheet applications. See also Appendix B5.

In the analysis of slabs and beams, supports are usually assumed to be pinned. In reality supports
have some continuity, especially at end supports. Usually, nominal top steel is assumed and
provided in the top of spans and is used in the determination of section properties.

B1.3 Rigorous analysis

Rigorous analysis, such as that used in the series of RC Spreadsheets TCCxxR.xls may be used to
assess deformation in accordance with Eurocode 2, Cl. 7.4.3.
‡ See Appendix B1.5

190
Appendix B: Serviceability limit state

In the spreadsheets, sections at 1/20th points along the length of a span are checked to
determine whether the flexural tensile stress in the section is likely to exceed the tensile strength
of the concrete during either construction or service life: separate analyses are undertaken using
frequent loads, quasi-permanent and temporary loads. If the flexural tensile strength is exceeded
under frequent loads, then the section is assumed to be cracked and remain cracked: cracked
section properties are used to determine the radius of curvature for that 1/20th of span. If
flexural tensile strength is not exceeded, un-cracked section properties are used.

Radii of curvature are calculated for each 1/20th span increment of the element using the relevant
properties and moments derived from analysis of quasi-permanent actions. Deformation is calculated
from the increments’ curvatures via numerical integration over the length of each span.

The method is in accordance with The Concrete Society’s publication TR58[32]. Again the method
is suitable only for computer applications and not for hand calculation.

B1.4 Differing results

During 2008, it became increasingly apparent that there are inconsistencies between the results
given by the rigorous calculation method and span:depth methods described in Eurocode 2.
Using the rigorous method gives deflections that are greater than would be expected from
the assumptions stated for L/d methods i.e. deflection limits of L/250 overall (see Cl. 7.4.1(4))
or L/500 after construction (see Cl. 7.4.1(5)). It is suspected that this disparity is the same as
that experienced between span:depth and calculation methods in BS 8110: a disparity that
was recognised as long ago as 1971[33]. The rigorous method described above relies on many
assumptions and is largely uncalibrated against real structures. As noted in TR58, there is an
urgent need for data from actual structures so that methods may be calibrated. It should be
noted that the rigorous analysis method observations were made using frequent loads where, in
accordance with Eurocode 2, quasi-permanent loads are called for.

End spans are usually critical. With respect to the rigorous analysis method, it has been suggested that
for end-spans, the TCC and RC-spreadsheet methods result in deflections close to the limits stated
in Eurocode 2, provided that a nominal end-support restraining moment is present where none is
assumed in analysis. Caution is therefore necessary in true pinned end-support situations but where
some continuity exists, this disparity may be addressed by ensuring that appropriate amounts of
reinforcement, in accordance with the Code and National Annex, are provided at end supports.

The NDP for Cl. 9.2.1.2(1) in the UK NA[2a] to BS EN 1992–1–2 stipulates that 25% of end span
moment should be used to determine end support reinforcement. This is usually accommodated
by providing 25% of end span bottom steel as top steel at end supports. It is on this basis that
the calculations in this publication are considered as being further substantiated.

B1.5 Note regarding factor 310/ss (factor F3)

At the time of publication (December 2009) the authors were aware of a probable change to
UK NA[2a] Table NA.5 which, in effect, would mean that the factor 310/ss (F3) = As,prov/As,req
≤ 1.5, thus disallowing the accurate method outlined in Sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.3 and
Appendices B1.1, B1.2 and C7.

B2 Neutral axis at SLS

To find x, neutral axis, and services stresses sc and ss for a concrete section, at SLS, consider the
cracked section in Figure B1

191
Relative modulus
E/Ec
ae – 1 d2
As2
x
1
d

As
ae

Where ae = modular ratio Es/Ec Figure B1

Cracked concrete section at SLS

From first principles, for a fully cracked transformed section,

Total area of section, A = bx + Asae + As2(ae − 1)

1st moment of area, Ay = bx2/2 + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)

For a slab, b = 1000, therefore

A = 1000x + Asae + As2(ae − 1)
Ay = 500x2 + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)

Neutral axis depth, x

x = Ay /A
= [500x2 + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)]/[1000x + Asae + As2(ae − 1)]

Therefore
x[1000x + Asae + As2(ae − 1)] = [500x2 + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)]
0 = [500x2 + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)] − x[1000x + Asae + As2(ae− 1)]
= 500x2 − x[1000x] + Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)] − x[Asae + As2(ae − 1)]
= − 500x2 − x[Asae + As2(ae − 1)] + [Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)]

Solving the quadratic

x = −b ± b2 − 4ac)0.5]/2a
−[Asae + As2(ae − 1) ± {[Asae + As2(ae − 1)]2 + 4 × 500 × [Asdae + As2d2(ae − 1)]} 0.5]
x=
(2 x 500)

or transposing,
[–(ae − 1)As2 − aeAs + {[(ae − 1)As2 + aeAs]2 + 2000[(ae −1)As2d2 + aeAsd]} 0.5]
x=
1000
or
[−(ae − 1)As2 − aeAs + {[(ae − 1)As2 + aeAs]2 + 2b[(ae − 1)As2d2 + aeAsd]} 0.5]
x=
b

This expression is used in the RC spreadsheets[28].

192
Appendix B: Serviceability limit state

B3 SLS stresses in concrete, sc, and reinforcement, ss

B3.1 Singly reinforced section
Consider the singly reinforced section in Figure B2.

b
Fc x/3

x
Mqp
z

As Fs
Figure B2
a) Section b) Dimensions and forces SLS stresses: singly
reinforced section

Consider moments about Fc:

Mqp = Fs z = Fs(d − x/3)
Fs = Mqp /(d − x/3)
ss = Mqp /[As(d − x/3)]
ss As = Mqp /(d − x/3) = xbsc /2
sc = 2ss As /xb

B3.2 Doubly reinforced section

Consider the singly reinforced section in Figure B3.

E/Ec = ae – 1 E/Ec = ae
s = sc(ae – 1)(x – d2)/x s = sc
b d2

As2
x
d
Mqp

As

E/Ec = ae
s = ss
a) Section b) Dimensions, modular
ratios and stresses Figure B3
SLS stresses

Consider moment, Mqp, about bottom reinforcement, As[34].

Mqp = As2(d − d2)(ae − 1){(x – d2)/x} sc + sc b(x/2)(d − x/3)
Therefore
sc = Mqp / [As2(d − d2)(ae − 1) ){(x − d2)/x} + b(x/2)(d − x/3)]
And from stress diagram
ss = sc ae(d − x)/x

193
Appendix C: Design aids
The following tables, text and figures have been derived from Eurocode 2 and are provided
as design aids for designers in the UK. These design aids have been referenced in the text and
generally have been taken from Section 15 of Concise Eurocode 2[5].

C1 Design values of actions

For the ULS of strength (STR) where there is a single variable action use either:

■ 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk Exp. (6.10) from BS EN 1990[10]

or the worse case of
■ 1.35Gk + c01.5Qk Exp. (6.10a)
and
■ 1.25Gk + 1.5Qk Exp. (6.10b)
where c0 = 1.0 for storage, 0.5 for snow but otherwise 0.7, see Table 2.2.

In most cases Exp. (6.10b) will be appropriate, except for storage where the use of Exp. (6.10a)
is likely to be more onerous.

For the SLS of deformation, quasi-permanent loads should be applied. These are 1.0Gk + c2Qk
where c2 is dependent on use, e.g. 0.3 for offices and residential and 0.7 for storage.

C2 Values of actions
The values of actions (i.e. loads) are defined in Eurocode 1[11]. The parts of Eurocode 1 are given
in Table C1. These values are taken as characteristic values. At the time of publication, the UK
National Annexes to these parts are in various states of readiness.

As PD 6687[6] makes clear, until the appropriate European standards become available, designers
may consider using current practice or current British Standards in conjunction with Eurocode 2,
provided they are compatible with Eurocode 2 and that the resulting reliability is acceptable.

BS EN 1991–1–1 states that the density of concrete is 24 kN/m3, reinforced concrete, 25 kN/m3
and wet reinforced concrete, 26 kN/m3.

Table C1
The parts of Eurocode 1[11]

Reference Title
BS EN 1991-1-1 Densities, self-weight and imposed loads
BS EN 1991-1-2 Actions on structures exposed to fire
BS EN 1991-1-3 Snow loads
BS EN 1991-1-4 Wind actions
BS EN 1991-1-5 Thermal actions
BS EN 1991-1-6 Actions during execution
BS EN 1991-1-7 Accidental actions due to impact and explosions
BS EN 1991-2 Traffic loads on bridges
BS EN 1991-3 Actions induced by cranes and machinery
BS EN 1991-4 Actions in silos and tanks

194
Appendix C: Design aids

C3 Analysis
Analysis is dealt with in Section 5 of Concise Eurocode 2. Where appropriate the coefficients
given in Tables C2 and C3 can be used to determine design moments and shear for slabs and
beams at ULS.

Table C2
Coefficients for use with one-way spanning slabs to Eurocode 2

Coefficient Location
End support/slab connection Internal supports and spans
Pinned end support Continuous
Outer Near Outer Near At 1st At At
support middle of support middle of interior middle of interior
end span end span support interior supports
spans
Moment 0.0 0.086 – 0.04 0.075 – 0.086 0.063 – 0.063
Shear 0.40 — 0.46 — 0.60:0.60 — 0.50:0.50
Notes
1 Applicable to one-way spanning slabs where the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2, Qk ≤ 1.25Gk and qk ≤ 5
kN/m2, substantially uniform loading (at least 3 spans, minimum span ≥ 0.85 maximum (design) span.
2 Design moment = coeff x n x span2 and design shear = coeff x n x span where n is a UDL with a single variable
action = gG gk + cgQqk where gk and qk are characteristic permanent and variable actions in kN/m.
3 Basis: Yield line design (assumed 20% redistribution[7])

Table C3
Coefficients for use with beams (and one-way spanning slabs) to Eurocode 2

Coefficient Location
Outer support Near middle At 1st interior At middle of At interior
of end span support interior spans supports
Moment gk 25% spana — 0.094 — 0.075
and qk
Moment gk — 0.090 — 0.066 —
Moment qk — 0.100 — 0.086 —
Shear 0.45 — 0.63:0.55 — 0.50:0.50b
Notes
1 For beams and slabs, 3 or more spans. (They may also be used for 2-span beams but support
moment coefficient = 0.106 and internal shear coefficient = 0.63 both sides).
2 Generally Qk ≤ Gk, and the loading should be substantially uniformly distributed. Otherwise special
curtailment of reinforcement is required.
3 Minimum span ≥ 0.85 x maximum (and design) span.
4 Design moment at supports = coeff x n x span2
or in spans = (coeff gk x gGgk + coeff qk x cgQqk) x span2.
5 Design shear at centreline of supports = coeff x n x span where n is a UDL with a single variable action
= gGgk + cgQqk where gk and qk are characteristic permanent and variable actions in kN/m.
gG and cgQ are dependent on use of BS EN 1990, Expressions (6.10), (6.10a) or (6.10b). See Section C1.
6 Basis: All- and alternate-spans-loaded cases as UK National Annex and 15% redistribution at
supports.
Key
a At outer support ‘25% span’ relates to the UK Nationally Determined Parameter for Eurocode 2, Cl. 9.2.1.2
Cl. 9.2.1.2(1) for minimum percentage of span bending moment to be assumed at supports in beams
in monolithic construction. 15% may be appropriate for slabs (see Eurocode 2, Cl. 9.3.1.2).
Cl. 9.3.1.2
b For beams of five spans, 0.55 applies to centre span.

195
C4 Design for bending
■ Determine whether K ≤ K' or not (i.e. whether under-reinforced or not).
where
K = MEd /(bd2fck)
where
d = effective depth = h – cover – f/2
b = width of section in compression
K' may be determined from Table C4 and is dependent on the redistribution ratio used.
Table C4
Values for K'

Redistribution ratio, d z/d for K' a K' a 1–d

1.00 0.76 (0.82) 0.208 (0.168) 0%

0.95 0.78 (0.82) 0.195 (0.168) 5%
0.90 0.80 (0.82) 0.182 (0.168) 10%
0.85 0.82 0.168 15%
0.80 0.84 0.153 20%
0.75 0.86 0.137 25%
0.70 0.88 0.120 30%
Note
Class A reinforcement is restricted to a redistribution ratio, d ≤ 0.8
Key
a It is recommended that x/d is limited to 0.45[35]. As a consequence z/d is limited to a minimum of
0.820 and K' to a minimum of 0.168.

■ If K ≤ K', section is under-reinforced.

For rectangular sections:
As1 = MEd /fydz
where
As1 = area of tensile reinforcement
MEd = design moment
fyd = fyk /gS = 500/1.15 = 434.8 MPa
z = d[0.5 + 0.5(1 – 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d
Values of z/d (and x/d) may be taken from Table C5

For flanged beams where x < 1.25hf,

As1 = MEd /fyd z
where x = depth to neutral axis. Values of x/d may be taken from Table C5
hf = thickness of flange

For flanged beams where x ≥ 1.25hf, refer to How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2[8].
How to: Beams[8]

■ If K > K', section is over-reinforced and requires compression reinforcement.

As2 = (MEd – M')/fsc(d – d2)
where
As2 = compression reinforcement
If d2/x > 0.375 then the term As2 should be replaced by the term
1.6(1 – d2/x) As2
M' = K'bd2fck
fsc = 700(xu– d2)/xu ≤ fyd
where
d2 = effective depth to compression reinforcement

196
Appendix C: Design aids

xu = (d – 0.4)d
where
d = redistribution ratio
Total area of steel As1 = M'/(fydz) + As2 fsc /fyd

Table C5
Values of z/d and x/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections

K z/d x/d (1 – d)maxa

0.04 0.950b 0.125 30%
0.05 0.950b 0.125 30%
0.06 0.944 0.140 30%
0.07 0.934 0.165 30%
0.08 0.924 0.191 30%
0.09 0.913 0.217 30%
0.10 0.902 0.245 30%
0.11 0.891 0.272 30%
0.12 0.880 0.301 30%
0.13 0.868 0.331 27%
0.14 0.856 0.361 24%
0.15 0.843 0.393 21%
0.16 0.830 0.425 18%
0.17 0.816c 0.460c 14%
0.18 0.802c 0.495c 11%
0.19 0.787c 0.533c 7%
0.20 0.771c 0.572c 3%
0.208 0.758c 0.606c 0%
Note
fck ≤ 50 MPa

Key
a Maximum allowable redistribution
b Practical limit
c It is recommended that x/d is limited to 0.450[35]. As a consequence z/d is limited to a minimum of
0.820 and K' to 0.168.

C5 Design for beam shear

C5.1 Requirement for shear reinforcement
If vEd > vRd,c then shear reinforcement is required
where
vEd = VEd /bwd, for sections without shear reinforcement (i.e. slabs)
vRd,c = shear resistance without shear reinforcement, from Table C6.

197
Table C6
Shear resistance without shear reinforcement, vRd,c (MPa)

rl = Asl/ Effective depth d (mm)

bwd
) 200 225 250 275 300 350 400 450 500 600 750
≤ 0.25% 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.43 0.41 0.40 0.38 0.36
0.50% 0.59 0.57 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.45
0.75% 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.53 0.51
1.00% 0.75 0.72 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.61 0.59 0.57
1.25% 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.63 0.61
1.50% 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67 0.65
1.75% 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.68
≥ 2.00% 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.74 0.71
Notes
1 Table derived from Eurocode 2 and UK National Annex.
2 Table created for fck = 30 MPa assuming vertical links.
3 For r l ≥ 0.4% and
fck = 25 MPa, apply factor of 0.94 fck = 40 MPa, apply factor of 1.10 fck = 50 MPa, apply factor of 1.19
fck = 35 MPa, apply factor of 1.05 fck = 45 MPa, apply factor of 1.14 Not applicable for fck > 50 MPa

C5.2 Section capacity check

If vEd,z > vRd,max then section size is inadequate
where
vEd,z = VEd /bwz = VEd /bw0.9d, for sections with shear reinforcement
vRd,max = capacity of concrete struts expressed as a stress in the vertical plane
= VRd,max /bwz
= VRd,max /bw0.9d
vRd,max can be determined from Table C7, initially checking at cot y = 2.5. Should it be required,
a greater resistance may be assumed by using a larger strut angle, y.

Table C7
Capacity of concrete struts expressed as a stress, vRd,max

fck vRd,max (MPa) Strength

reduction
cot y 2.50 2.14 1.73 1.43 1.19 1.00 factor, v
y 2.18° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45°
20 2.54 2.82 3.19 3.46 3.62 3.68 0.552
25 3.10 3.45 3.90 4.23 4.43 4.50 0.540
30 3.64 4.04 4.57 4.96 5.20 5.28 0.528
35 4.15 4.61 5.21 5.66 5.93 6.02 0.516
40 4.63 5.15 5.82 6.31 6.62 6.72 0.504
45 5.09 5.65 6.39 6.93 7.27 7.38 0.492
50 5.52 6.13 6.93 7.52 7.88 8.00 0.480
Notes
1 Table derived from Eurocode 2 and UK National Annex assuming vertical links, i.e. cot a = 0
2 v = 0.6[1 – (fck /250)]
3 vRd,max = vfcd(cot y + cot a)/(1 + cot2 y)

198
Appendix C: Design aids

C5.3 Shear reinforcement design

Asw/s ≥ vEd,zbw/fywd cot y
where
Asw = area of shear reinforcement (vertical links assumed)
s = spacing of shear reinforcement
vEd,z = VEd /bwz, as before
bw = breadth of the web
fywd = fywk /gS = design yield strength of shear reinforcement
Generally Asw/s ≥ vEd,zbw /1087
where fywk = 500 MPa, gS = 1.15 and cot y = 2.5

Alternatively, Asw/s per metre width of bw may be determined from Figure C1a) or C1b) as
indicated by the blue arrows in Figure C1a). These figures may also be used to estimate the
value of cot y.

Beams are subject to a minimum shear link provision. Assuming vertical links,
Asw,min /sbw ≥ 0.08 fck0.5/fyk (see Table C8).

Table C8
Values of Asw,min/sbw for beams for vertical links and fyk = 500 MPa and compatible resistance, vRd

Concrete class C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60

Asw,min/sbw for beams (x 103) 0.72 0.80 0.88 0.95 1.01 1.07 1.13
vRd for Asw,min /sbw (MPa) 0.78 0.87 0.95 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.23

vRd,max for cot y = 2.5 2.14 1.73 1.43

8.0
1.19
C50/60
C45/55
7.0
fywk = 500 MPa C40/50
1.00
C35/45
6.0
C30/37
5.0
C25/30
vEd,z (MPa)

4.0
C20/25
See Fig. C1b)

3.0

2.0

1.0

0.0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Asw/s required per metre width of bw

Figure C1a)
Diagram to determine Asw/s required (for beams with high shear stress)

199
4.0
C30/37

0
fywk = 500 MPa C25/3

3.0 C20/25
vEd,z (MPa)

2.0
Range of vRd,c for range
d = 200 mm, r = 2.0%
to d = 750 mm, r = 0.5% C20/25
C25/30
1.0 C30/37
C35/45
Asw,min/s
C40/50
for beams
C45/55
C50/60

0.0
0 1 2 3 4
Asw/s required per metre width of bw

Figure C1b)
Diagram to determine Asw/s required (for slabs and beams with low shear stress)

C6 Design for punching shear

Determine if punching shear reinforcement is required, initially at u1, then if necessary at
subsequent perimeters, ui. If vEd > vRd,c then punching shear reinforcement is required
where
vEd = bVEd /uid
where
b = factor dealing with eccentricity
VEd = applied shear force
ui = length of the perimeter under consideration
d = mean effective depth
vRd,c = shear resistance without shear reinforcement (see Table C6)

For vertical shear reinforcement

(Asw/sr) = u1(vEd – 0.75 vRd,c)/(1.5 fywd,ef)
where
Asw = area of shear reinforcement in one perimeter around the column.
For Asw,min see Concise Eurocode 2, Section 10.4.2 and for layout see Section 12.4.3
sr = radial spacing of perimeters of shear reinforcement
u1 = basic control perimeter 2d from column face
Concise: 10.4.2,
12.4.3 fywd,ef = effective design strength of reinforcement = (250 + 0.25d) ≤ fywd. For Grade
500 shear reinforcement see Table C9
Table C9
Values of fywd,ef for grade 500 reinforcement

d 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

fywd,ef 287.5 300 312.5 325 337.5 350 362.5

At the column perimeter, check vEd ≤ VRdmax for cot y = 1.0 given in Table C7.

200
Appendix C: Design aids

C7 Check deflection
In general, the SLS state of deflection may be checked by using the span-to-effective-depth
approach. More critical appraisal of deformation is outside the scope of this publication. To use
the span-to-effective-depth approach, verify that:

Allowable l/d = N x K x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ actual l/d

where
N = basic span-to-effective-depth ratio derived for K = 1.0 and r' = 0 from Section 10.5.2
Concise: 10.5.2
of Concise Eurocode 2 or Table C10 or Figure C2
K = factor to account for structural system. See Table C11
F1 = factor to account for flanged sections. When beff /bw = 1.0, factor F1 = 1.0.
When beff/bw is greater than 3.0, factor F1 = 0.80.
For values of beff /bw between 1.0 and 3.0, interpolation may be used (see Table C12)
where
beff is defined in Section 5.2.2 of Concise Eurocode 2
bw = width of web
Concise: 5.2.2
In I beams bw = minimum width of web in tensile area.
In tapered webs bw = width of web at centroid of reinforcement in web.
F2 = factor to account for brittle partitions in association with long spans. Generally F2
= 1.0 but if brittle partitions are liable to be damaged by excessive deflection, F2
should be determined as follows:
a) in flat slabs in which the longer span is greater than 8.5 m, F2 = 8.5/leff
b) in beams and other slabs with spans in excess of 7.0 m, F2 = 7.0/leff
Values of F2 may be taken from Table C13
F3 = factor to account for service stress in tensile reinforcement = 310/ss ≤ 1.5
Conservatively, if a service stress, ss, of 310 MPa is assumed for the designed area
of reinforcement, As,req then F3 = As,prov /As,req ≤ 1.5.
More accurately,‡ the serviceability stress, ss, may be estimated as follows:
ss = fyk /gS[(Gk + c2 Qk)/(1.25Gk + 1.5Qk)] [As,req /As,prov] (1/d)
or
ss = ssu [As,req /As,prov] (1/d)
where
ssu = the unmodified SLS steel stress, taking account of gM for
reinforcement and of going from ultimate actions to serviceability
actions
= 500/gS(Gk + c2 Qk)/(1.25Gk + 1.5Qk)
ssu may be estimated from Figure C3 as indicated by the blue
arrow
As,req /As,prov = area of steel required divided by area of steel provided.
(1/d) = factor to ‘un-redistribute’ ULS moments so they may be used in
this SLS verification (see Table C14)
Actual l/d = actual span divided by effective depth, d.

‡ See Appendix B1.5

201
Table C10
Table 7.4N Basic ratios of span-to-effective-depth, N, for members without axial compression
Required fck
reinforcement, r
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
0.30% 25.9 32.2 39.2 46.6 54.6 63.0 71.8
0.40% 19.1 22.4 26.2 30.4 35.0 39.8 45.0
0.50% 17.0 18.5 20.5 23.0 25.8 28.8 32.0
0.60% 16.0 17.3 18.5 19.8 21.3 23.1 25.2
0.70% 15.3 16.4 17.4 18.5 19.6 20.6 21.7
0.80% 14.8 15.7 16.6 17.6 18.5 19.4 20.4
0.90% 14.3 15.2 16.0 16.8 17.7 18.5 19.3
1.00% 14.0 14.8 15.5 16.3 17.0 17.8 18.5
1.20% 13.5 14.1 14.8 15.4 16.0 16.6 17.3
1.40% 13.1 13.7 14.2 14.8 15.3 15.8 16.4
1.60% 12.9 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.8 15.2 15.7
1.80% 12.7 13.1 13.5 13.9 14.3 14.8 15.2
2.00% 12.5 12.9 13.3 13.6 14.0 14.4 14.8
2.50% 12.2 12.5 12.8 13.1 13.4 13.7 14.0
3.00% 12.0 12.3 12.5 12.8 13.0 13.3 13.5
3.50% 11.9 12.1 12.3 12.5 12.7 12.9 13.1
4.00% 11.8 11.9 12.1 12.3 12.5 12.7 12.9
4.50% 11.7 11.8 12.0 12.2 12.3 12.5 12.7
5.00% 11.6 11.8 11.9 12.1 12.2 12.4 12.5
Reference 0.45% 0.50% 0.55% 0.59% 0.63% 0.67% 0.71%
reinforcement ratio, r0
Notes
1 Where r = As /bd.
2 For T-sections r is the area of reinforcement divided by the area of concrete above the centroid of
the tension reinforcement.
3 The values for span-to-effective-depth have been based on Table 7.4N in Eurocode 2, using K = 1
(simply supported) and r' = 0 (no compression reinforcement required).
4 The span-to-effective-depth ratio should be based on the shorter span in two-way spanning slabs and
the longer span in flat slabs.

32
Basic span-to-effective-depth ratio N (l/d)

30 fck = 50
fck = 45
28
fck = 40
26 fck = 35
24
fck = 30
22

20

18

16
fck = 25
14
fck = 20
12
0.40% 0.60% 0.80% 1.00% 1.20% 1.40% 1.60% 1.80% 2.00%
Design tension reinforcement (100As,req /bd)
Figure C2
Basic span-to-effective depth ratios, N, for K = 1, r' = 0
202
Appendix C: Design aids

Table C11
K factors to be applied to basic ratios of span-to-effective-depth

Structural system K
Beams Slabs
Simply supported beams One- or two-way spanning simply supported slabs 1.0
End span of continuous beams End span of one-way spanning continuous slabs, or 1.3
two-way spanning slabs continuous over one long edge
Interior spans of continuous beams Interior spans of continuous slabs 1.5
— Flat slabs (based on longer span) 1.2
Cantilevers Cantilever 0.4

Table C12
Factor F1, modifier for flanged beams

beff/bw 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 ≥ 3.0

Factor 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80

Table C13
Factor F2, modifier for long spans supporting brittle partitions

Span, m leff ≤ 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0
Flat slabs 8.5/leff 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.85 0.77 0.71 0.65 0.61 0.57 0.53
Beams and other slabs 7.0/leff 1.00 0.93 0.88 0.82 0.78 0.70 0.64 0.58 0.54 0.50 0.47 0.44

320

35
300 y2 = 0.8, gG = 1.
1.35
y 2 = 0.6, g G =
Unmodified steel stress ssu

280 1.25
gG=
0.6, = 1.35
y2= .3, g G
y2 = 0
260 .25
=1 .35
, g G .25 , gG = 1
=0
.3 =1 y 2 = 0.2
y2 , g G
.2
240 =0
y2

220

200

180
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00
Ratio Gk/Qk

Figure C3
Determination of unmodified SLS, stress in reinforcement, ssu

203
Table C14
d) factor to be applied to unmodified ssu to allow for redistribution used
(1/d

Average redistribution used 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% –5% –10% –15% –20% –25% –30%

Redistribution ratio used, d 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70

(1/d) 83% 87% 91% 95% 100% 105% 111% 118% 125% 133% 143%
Notes
1 Where coefficients from Table C2 have been used in design and where Qk & 1.25Gk, the coefficients in Table C2 may be considered to
represent moment distribution of:
–8% near middle of end span with pinned end support
–22% at first interior support, as a worst case
+3% near middle of internal spans, as a worst case
–28% at interior supports, as a worst case.
2 Where coefficients from Table C3 have been used in design and where Qk & Gk, the coefficients in Table C3 may be considered to represent
moment redistribution of:
+3% near middle of end span with pinned end support, as a worst case
+9% near middle of internal spans, as a worst case
–15% at all interior supports.

C8 Control of cracking
Cracking may be controlled by restricting either maximum bar diameter or maximum bar
spacing to the relevant diameters and spacings given in Table C15. The appropriate SLS stress in
reinforcement, ss, may be determined as outlined for F3 in Section C7.

Minimum areas and aspects of detailing should be checked.

Table C15
Maximum bar diameters f or maximum bar spacing for crack control

Steel stress (MPa) ss Maximum bar size (mm) Maximum bar spacing (mm)
wk = 0.3 mm wk = 0.4 mm wk = 0.3 mm wk = 0.4 mm
160 32 40 300 300
200 25 32 250 300
OR
240 16 20 200 250
280 12 16 150 200
320 10 12 100 150
360 8 10 50 100
Notes
1 The ‘normal’ limit of 0.3 mm may be relaxed to 0.4 mm for XO and XC1 exposure classes if there is
no specific requirement for appearance.
2 Table assumptions include cnom = 25 mm and fct,eff (= fctm) = 2.9 MPa.

204
Appendix C: Design aids

C9 Design for axial load and bending

C9.1 General
In columns, design moments MEd and design applied axial force NEd should be derived from analysis,
consideration of imperfections and, where necessary, 2nd order effects.
It is necessary to calculate effective lengths in order to determine whether a column is slender
(see Eurocode 2, Cl. 5.8.3.2 and Expression (5.15)). The effective length of most columns will be
l/2< l0 < l (see Eurocode 2 Figure 5.7f). PD 6687[6] Cl. 2.10 suggests that using the procedure
outlined in Eurocode 2 (5.8.3.2(3) and 5.8.3.2(5)) leads to similar effective lengths to those
tabulated in BS 8110[7] as reproduced below as Table C16. Experience suggests that these
tabulated values are conservative.

Table C16
Effective length l0: conservative factors for braced columns

End condition End condition at bottom

at top 1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90
2 0.80 0.85 0.95
3 0.90 0.95 1.00
Key
Condition 1 Column connected monolithically to beams on each side that are at least as deep as the
overall depth of the column in the plane considered
Where the column is connected to a foundation this should be designed to carry moment
in order to satisfy this condition
Condition 2 Column connected monolithically to beams on each side that are shallower than the
overall depth of the column in the plane considered by generally not less than half the
column depth
Condition 3 Column connected to members that do not provide more than nominal restraint to
rotation
Note
Table taken from Manual for the design of concrete building structures to Eurocode 2[35]. The values are
those used in BS 8110: Part 1: 1997[7] for braced columns. These values are close to those values that
would be derived if the contribution from adjacent columns were ignored.

C9.2 Design by calculation

Assuming two layers of reinforcement, As1 and As2, the total area of steel required in a column,
As, may be calculated as shown below.

■ For axial load

AsN/2 = (NEd – accnfckbdc /gC)/(ssc – sst)
where
AsN = total area of reinforcement required to resist axial load using this method.
AsN = As1 + As2 and As1 = As2
where
As1(As2) = area of reinforcement in layer 1 (layer 2)
NEd = design applied axial force Concise:
acc = 0.85 Fig. 6.3
n = 1 for ≤ C50/60
b = breadth of section
dc = effective depth of concrete in compression = lx ≤ h Concise:
Fig. 6.4

205
where
l = 0.8 for ≤ C50/60
x = depth to neutral axis
h = height of section
ssc, (sst) = stress in compression (and tension) reinforcement

■ For moment
AsM/2 = [MEd – accnfckbdc(h/2 – dc /2)/gC]/[(h/2 – d2)(ssc + sst)]
where
AsM = total area of reinforcement required to resist moment using this method
AsM = As1 + As2 and As1 = As2

Where reinforcement is not concentrated in the corners, a conservative approach is to calculate

an effective value of d2 as illustrated in Figures C4a) to e).

■ Solution: iterate x such that AsN = AsM

C9.3 Rectangular column charts

Alternatively As may be estimated from column charts.

Figures C4a) to C4e) give non-dimensional design charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular
columns where reinforcement is assumed to be concentrated in the corners.

In these charts:
acc = 0.85
fck ≤ 50 MPa
fyk ≤ 500 MPa
Simplified stress block assumed.

As = total area of reinforcement required

= (As fyk /bhfck)bhfck /fyk
where
(As fyk /bhfck) is derived from the appropriate design chart interpolating as necessary
between charts for the value of d2/h for the section.
b = breadth of section
h = height of section

Where reinforcement is not concentrated in the corners, a conservative approach is to calculate

an effective value of d2 as illustrated in Figures C4a) to e).
d2 = effective depth to steel in layer 2

206
Appendix C: Design aids

1.3
Kr = 0.2
d 2 /h = 0.05
1.2

c k
hf
0.3

k /b
1.1 h/2

fy
h

s
A
1.0 0.4
1.0
0.9 d2
0.9 0.8
0.5 Centroid of bars in
0.7 half section
0.8 0.6
0.5 0.6
NEd/bhfck

0.7 0.4
0.3 0.7
0.6 0.2
0.5 0.1
0 0.8
0.4
0.9
0.3
1.0
0.2

0.1

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
MEd/bh2fck

Figure C4a)
Rectangular columns d2/h = 0.05

1.3
Kr = 0.2
d 2 /h = 0.10
1.2
ck

0.3
hf
k /b

h/2
1.1
fy
s
A

h
1.0 0.4
1.0
0.9 d2
0.9 0.8
0.7 0.5 Centroid of bars in
half section
0.8 0.6
0.5
NEd/bhfck

0.6
0.7 0.4
0.3 0.7
0.6 0.2
0.1
0.5
0 0.8
0.4
0.9
0.3
Kr = 1
0.2

0.1

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
MEd/bh2fck

Figure C4b)
Rectangular columns d2/h = 0.10

207
1.3
Kt = 0.2
d 2 /h = 0.15
1.2

k
0.3

c
hf
h/2

k /b
1.1

fy
h

s
A
1.0 1.0
0.4 d2
0.9
0.9 0.8 Centroid of bars in
0.5
0.7 half section
0.8 0.6
0.5 0.6
NEd/bhfck

0.7
0.4
0.3
0.6 0.7
0.2
0.1
0.5
0 0.8
0.4
0.9
0.3
Kr = 1
0.2

0.1

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40
MEd/bh2fck

Figure C4c)
Rectangular columns d2/h = 0.15

1.3
Kr = 0.2
d 2 /h = 0.20
1.2
ck
hf

0.3 h/2
k /b

1.1
fy

h
s
A

1.0 1.0
0.4 d2
0.9
0.9 Centroid of bars in
0.8
0.7 0.5 half section
0.8
0.6
NEd/bhfck

0.5 0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6 0.3
0.2 0.7
0.5 0.1
0 0.8
0.4

0.3 0.9

0.2
Kr = 1
0.1

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
MEd/bh2fck

Figure C4d)
Rectangular columns d2/h = 0.20

208
Appendix C: Design aids

1.3
Kr = 0.2 d 2 /h = 0.25
1.2

c k
hf
0.3 h/2

k /b
1.1

fy
h

s
A
1.0 1.0 d2
0.9 0.4
0.9 Centroid of bars in
0.8
half section
0.7
0.8
0.6 0.5
NEd/bhfck

0.7 0.5
0.4
0.6
0.6 0.3
0.2
0.5 0.1
0.7
0
0.4
0.8
0.3
0.9
0.2

0.1
Kr = 1
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30
MEd/bh2fck

Figure C4e)
Rectangular columns d2/h = 0.25

C9.4 Biaxial bending in rectangular columns

As a first step, separate design in each principal direction, disregarding biaxial bending, may be
Concise: 5.6.3
undertaken. No further check is necessary if 0.5 ≤ l y /l z ≤ 2.0 and, for rectangular sections, 0.2
≥ (ey/heq)/(ez /beq) or (ey/heq)/(ez /beq) ≥ 5.0. Otherwise see Section 5.6.3 of Concise Eurocode 2.

For square columns (ey /heq )/(ez /beq) = MEdy/MEdz.

C9.5 Circular column charts

In a similar manner to C9.3, the area of reinforcement for circular columns As may be estimated
from the charts in Figures C5a) to C5d).
In these charts:
acc = 0.85
fck ≤ 50 MPa
fyk = 500 MPa
As = total area of reinforcement required
= (A s f yk /h 2f ck )h 2f ck /f yk
where (As fyk /h2fck) is derived from the appropriate design chart interpolating as necessary.
d/h = effective depth/overall diameter.

C9.6 Links
Links in columns should be at least 8 mm or maximum diameter of longitudinal bars/4 in
diameter and adjacent to beams and slabs spaced at the least of:
■ 12 times the minimum diameter of the longitudinal bar,
■ 60% of the lesser dimension of the column, or
■ 240 mm.
209
1.2

k
fc
k /h 2
Ratio d/h = 0.6
0.2
1.1

fy
s
A
1.0 d
0.3 h
1.0 0.9
0.8 0.4
0.9
0.7
0.8 0.5
0.6
0.7 0.5
0.6
NEd /h2fck

0.4
0.6 0.3 0.7
0.2
0.5
0.1 0.8
0.4 0

0.3 0.9

0.2 Kr =1

0.1

0
0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07
MEd /h3fck

Figure C5a)
Circular columns d/h = 0.6

1.2
k
fc

Ratio d/h = 0.7

k /h 2

0.2
1.1
fy s
A

d
1.0 h
1.0
0.3
0.9
0.9 0.8
0.4
0.7
0.8
0.6
0.7 0.5
NEd /h2fck

0.5
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.6
0.5 0.2
0.1
0.7
0.4 0

0.3
0.8
0.2
Kr =1
0.1

0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12
MEd /h3fck

Figure C5b)
Circular columns d/h = 0.7
210
Appendix C: Design aids

1.2

ck
k h f
Ratio d/h = 0.8

s y / 2
0.2
1.1

Af
d
1.0 0.3 h
1.0
0.9
0.9 0.8
0.4
0.7
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.7 0.5
0.4
NEd /h2fck

0.6 0.3 0.6

0.5 0.2
0.1 0.7
0.4 0
0.8
0.3

0.2 0.9

0.1
Kr =1
0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20
MEd /h3fck

Figure C5c)
Circular columns d/h = 0.8

1.2
ck
f
s y /h 2

0.2 Ratio d/h = 0.9

1.1
k
Af

1.0 0.3 d h
1.0
0.9
0.9 0.8 0.4
0.7
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.7 0.5
0.4
NEd /h2fck

0.6 0.6
0.3
0.5 0.2
0.1 0.7
0.4 0
0.8
0.3

0.2 0.9

0.1 Kr =1

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30
MEd /h3fck

Figure C5d)
Circular columns d/h = 0.9

211
Eurocode 2 resources
Publications
Concise Eurocode 2
CCIP-005, The Concrete Centre, 2006
A handbook for the design of in-situ concrete buildings to Eurocode 2 and its UK National Annex

How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2

CCIP-004, The Concrete Centre, 2006
Guidance for the design and detailing of a broad range of concrete elements to Eurocode 2

Economic concrete frame elements to Eurocode 2

CCIP-025, The Concrete Centre, 2009
A selection of reinforced concrete frame elements in multi-storey buildings

Precast Eurocode 2: Design manual

CCIP-014, British Precast Concrete Federation, 2008
A handbook for the design of precast concrete building structures to Eurocode 2 and its National Annex

Precast Eurocode 2: Worked examples

CCIP-034, British Precast Concrete Federation, 2008
Worked examples for the design of precast concrete buildings to Eurocode 2 and its National Annex

Concrete buildings scheme design manual

CCIP-051, The Concrete Centre 2009
A handbook for the ISructE chartered membership examination, based on EC2

Properties of concrete for use in Eurocode 2

CCIP-029, The Concrete Centre, 2008
How to optimize the engineering properties of concrete in design to Eurocode 2

Standard method of detailing structural concrete

Institution of Structural Engineers/ The Concrete Society, 2006
A manual for best practice

Manual for the design of concrete building structures to Eurocode 2

Institution of Structural Engineers, 2006
A manual for the design of concrete buildings to Eurocode 2 and its National Annex

BS EN 1992-1-1, Eurocode 2 – Part 1-1: Design of concrete structures –

General rules and rules for buildings
British Standards Institution, 2004
National Annex to Eurocode 2 – Part 1-1
British Standards Institution, 2005

Software
RC spreadsheets: V3. User guide and CD
CCIP-008. The Concrete Centre, 2006
Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2 and its UK National Annex

Websites
Eurocode 2 – www.eurocode2.info
Eurocodes Expert – www.eurocodes.co.uk
The Concrete Centre – www.concretecentre.com
Institution of Structural Engineers – www.istructe.org
212
Members of the Steering Group
John Mason Alan Baxter & Associates (Chairman)
Stuart Alexander WSP Group plc
Pal Chana Mineral Products Association – Cement
Charles Goodchild The Concrete Centre
Tony Jones Arup
Andy Lyle NRM Consultants
Richard Moss Powell Tolner Associates
Nary Narayanan Clark Smith Partnership
Richard Shipman DCLG
Robert Vollum Imperial College, University of London
Russ Wolstenholme WS Atkins & DTI Project Officer
Rod Webster Concrete Innovation and Design

Members of the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG)

John Moore Consultant (Chairman)
Clive Budge British Precast Concrete Federation
Pal Chana Mineral Products Association – Cement
John Clarke The Concrete Society
Colin Cleverly Construct
Charles Goodchild The Concrete Centre
Haig Gulvanessian BRE
Geoff Harding DCLG
Tom Harrison Mineral Products Association – Concrete
Tony Jones Arup
John Mason Alan Baxter & Associates
Richard Moss Powell Tolner Associates
Nary Narayanan Clark Smith Partnership
Richard Shipman DCLG
Martin Southcott Consultant
Russ Wolstenholme WS Atkins
Rod Webster Concrete Innovation and Design

Initial section drafts

1 Introduction Nary Narayanan
2 Analysis, actions and load arrangements Nary Narayanan
3 Slabs Charles Goodchild
4 Beams Charles Goodchild, Rod Webster
5 Columns Tony Jones, Jens Tandler
6 Walls Tony Jones, Jens Tandler
Appendix A: Derivation of formulae Charles Goodchild, Rod Webster, Owen Brooker
Appendix B: Serviceability limit state Charles Goodchild, Nary Narayanan
Appendix C: Design aids Charles Goodchild, Rod Webster

3
Worked Examples to Eurocode 2

This publication gives examples of the design to Charles Goodchild is principal structural engineer
Eurocode 2 of common reinforced concrete elements for The Concrete Centre where he promotes efficient
in reinforced concrete framed buildings. concrete design and construction. Besides project
managing and authoring this publication he has
With extensive clause referencing, readers are guided undertaken many projects to help with the introduction
through design examples to Eurocode 2 and other relevant of Eurocode 2 to the UK.
Eurocodes and references. The publication, which includes
design aids, aims to help designers with the transition to
design to Eurocodes.

Worked Examples to Eurocode 2 is part of a range of resources

available from The Concrete Centre to assist engineers with
design to Eurocodes. For more information visit
www.eurocode2.info.

CCIP-041
Published December 2009
ISBN 1-904818-84-7
Price Group P
© MPA – The Concrete Centre

Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,

Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44( (0)126 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com